Quarterlytics / Communication Services / Restaurants / The Restaurant Group / FY2021 Annual Report

The Restaurant Group
Annual Report 2021

RTN · LSE Communication Services
Claim this profile
Ticker RTN
Exchange LSE
Sector Communication Services
Industry Restaurants
Employees 10,000+
← All annual reports
FY2021 Annual Report · The Restaurant Group
Loading PDF…
Annual Report 2021

The Restaurant Group plc operates 
approximately 400 restaurants and pub 
restaurants. Its principal trading brands 
are Wagamama and Frankie & Benny’s. The Group 
also operates Pub restaurants and a Concessions 
business which trades principally at UK airports.

Contents

Summary 

Our brands 

Chairman’s statement 

Business review 

Financial review 

Section 172 statement 

Environmental and Social report 

Corporate Governance report 

Board of Directors 

01 

Audit Committee report 

02

04

05

09

14

16

24

32

Nomination Committee report 

Directors’ remuneration report 

Directors’ report 

Senior Management Risk Committee 

Directors’ responsibility statements 

Independent Auditor’s report 

Consolidated income statement 

Consolidated balance sheet 

Consolidated statement  
of changes in equity 

34

39

41

55

57

59

60

70

71

72

Consolidated cash flow statement 

73

Notes to the consolidated  
financial statements 

Company balance sheet  

Statement of changes in equity 

Notes to the Company accounts 

Group financial record 

Glossary 

Shareholder information 

74

107 

108

109

115

116

118

FY21 Financial summary
(For the 53 weeks ended 2 January 2022)

•  Total sales of £636.6m (2020: £459.8m)

•  Adjusted EBITDA profit of £81.2m (2020: £8.7m) on a 

pre-IFRS 16 basis

•  Adjusted Profit before tax of £16.6m on a pre-IFRS 16 basis 

(2020: loss of £47.9m) 

•  Statutory loss before tax of £32.9m on an IFRS 16 basis 

(2020: loss of £132.9m) 

•  Net debt of £171.6m on a pre IFRS 16 basis (2020: 

£340.4m). IFRS 16 net debt was £582.0m (2020: £824.2m)

Current trading and outlook
•  The Group will continue to report like-for-like sales for FY22 
versus 2019 comparables (representing the last full year of 
comparisons without Covid related disruptions)

•  Current trading for the Group has continued to be strong, 
outperforming the market for the first two months of FY22:

LFL sales (%) vs 2019 comparable for the 8 weeks from 
3 January to 27 February 2022 

TRG Division
Wagamama
Pubs
Leisure
Concessions**

TRG LFL sales
+21%
+11%
+11%
(35)%

Market* LFL 
sales
+8%
(3)%
+8%
(48)%

Outperformance vs 
market*
+13%
+14%
+3%
+13%

•  c.95% of electricity and gas volume hedged for 2022 

 – c.75% of electricity and gas volume hedged for 2023  

and 2024

Management’s current expectations for FY22 remain 
unchanged, although we are mindful about the consequential 
inflationary impacts arising from the conflict in Ukraine.

Key highlights

The Group is making good progress against its 
four strategic priorities:

•  Maintain like-for-like sales outperformance 

versus market

Strong like-for-like sales (“LFL”) outperformance 
versus market since reopening for dine-in on 
17 May 2021:

LFL sales (%) vs 2019 comparable for the 33 weeks 
from 17 May 2021 to 2 January 2022

TRG Division

Wagamama 
Pubs 
Leisure 
Concessions** 

TRG 
LFL sales

Market* 
LFL sales

Outperformance 
vs market*

+15%
+9%
+14%
(41)%

+7%
(2)%
+7%
(59)%

+8%
+11%
+7%
+18%

•  Deliver against key financial targets

 – Recent Wagamama and Pub openings (2019 

& 2020) delivering good returns

 – Good progress made towards medium term net 
debt/EBITDA (“leverage”)*** target with FY21 
year-end leverage*** at 2.1x

•  Accelerate selective expansion opportunities

 – Healthy FY22 pipeline of new Wagamama and 

Pubs openings

•  Drive forward our ESG agenda

 – Carbon neutral on scopes 1 and 2 in FY22

 – Developing scope 3 emissions reduction plan

O
v
e
r
v

i

e
w

S

i

t
r
a
t
e
g
c
r
e
p
o
r
t

G
o
v
e
r
n
a
n
c
e

l

s
t
a
t
e
m
e
n
t
s

*  Market refers to Coffer Peach tracker for restaurants (Wagamama and Leisure benchmark) and Coffer Peach tracker for pub restaurants (TRG Pubs benchmark). 

Coffer peach LFL sales represent the weighted average of weekly LFL sales reported (internal calculation)

**  UK air passenger growth used as market benchmark for Concessions
***   Pre-IFRS 16 Adjustment and exceptional charges

The Restaurant Group plc Annual Report 2021  01
The Restaurant Group plc Annual Report 2021  01

i

F
n
a
n
c
a

i

 
 
 
 
Our brands

TRG operates a diverse portfolio of popular brands, 
each with their own unique and differentiated offering, 
but all with great hospitality at their core. Our portfolio 
offers something for everyone.

156*

Sites

79*

Sites

Wagamama first opened its doors in 1992 in London’s 
Bloomsbury. Inspired by fast-paced, Japanese ramen bars 
and a celebration of Asian food, Wagamama burst into life 
creating a unique way of eating. Bringing the fresh, 
nourishing, flavours of Asia to all.

*  This relates to UK full-service restaurants as well as eight delivery 

kitchens. Trading estate as at 2 January 2022

Set mostly in rural locations, each pub within the Brunning 
& Price family is unique, but all share a common love of local 
cask ales, decent, affordable wines, genuine hospitality and 
wholesome dishes cooked using the freshest ingredients.

Our characterful buildings are often set in beautiful surroundings 
and we go to great lengths to restore and preserve them, 
offering a timeless, calm, informal setting for people who like 
to meet, eat, drink and talk in a relaxed, friendly atmosphere.

*  Trading estate as at 2 January 2022

44*

Sites

TRG Concessions has over 25 years experience of providing 
exceptional hospitality to the travelling public and beyond. 
Our brand portfolio includes table service, counter service, 
sandwich shops, pubs and bars. We deliver existing TRG 
brands, create bespoke concepts and establish partnerships 
to franchise third-party brands. Our record of innovation, 
partnership and performance ahead of sector growth will 
ensure we remain a market leader in this industry.

*  Trading estate as at 2 January 2022

02  The Restaurant Group plc Annual Report 2021

O
O
v
v
e
e
r
r
v
v

i
i

e
e
w
w

S
S

i
i

t
t
r
r
a
a
t
t
e
e
g
g
c
c
r
r
e
e
p
p
o
o
r
r
t
t

G
G
o
o
v
v
e
e
r
r
n
n
a
a
n
n
c
c
e
e

i
i

F
F
n
n
a
a
n
n
c
c
a
a

i
i

l
l

s
s
t
t
a
a
t
t
e
e
m
m
e
e
n
n
t
t
s
s

96*

Sites

22*

Sites

Welcome to a place where genuine Italian passion blends 
with the confidence of New York City, the fusion that created 
the Frankie & Benny’s we all know and love today. Our 
passion for great Italian American food, a welcoming 
atmosphere and warm and friendly service is second to 
none. Welcome to Frankie & Benny’s – where ‘have a nice 
day’ meets ‘la dolce vita’.

*  Trading estate as at 2 January 2022. Includes one site trading under 

the ‘est est est’ brand

Chiquito has been delivering the best of Mexican cuisine 
for 30 years. Delivering fantastic food in a fun, fiesta-style 
environment is what the team are passionate about. Whether 
you want to embrace our Mexican heritage by wearing our 
iconic sombreros or just enjoy some classic dishes and 
drinks, Chiquito offers a fantastic experience for all.

*  Trading estate as at 2 January 2022

3*

Sites

At Firejacks our mantra is simple ‘Meat. Fire. Friends’. 
We pride ourselves on delivering an unparalleled restaurant 
experience where food innovation is at the heart.

*  Trading estate as at 2 January 2022

1*

Sites

3*

Sites

Coast to Coast offers a unique and authentic take on 
American home-style dining with an extensive menu 
spanning the breadth of the USA.

*  Trading estate as at 2 January 2022

The Restaurant Group plc Annual Report 2021  03
The Restaurant Group plc Annual Report 2021  03

 
 
 
 
 
 
Chairman’s statement

 TRG has made substantial progress 
in the last year with the successful 
recapitalisation of the Group and 
strong trading performance since 
reopening for dine-in trade.” 
Ken Hanna
Chairman

I am delighted to have been given the opportunity to join the Board of TRG as Chair, a role which commenced on 1 January 2022. 
I would like to take this opportunity to thank our former Chair, Debbie Hewitt, for her work with the Board and TRG over the last 
five years. 

During my first few months in the post, I have spent time with fellow Board members and other colleagues familiarising myself 
with our business. I have been very impressed with what I have seen thus far, affirming my view that TRG has a dynamic and 
experienced management team operating an excellent range of brands.

TRG has made substantial progress in the last year with the successful recapitalisation of the Group and strong trading 
performance since reopening for dine-in trade. This positions the Group well despite the inflationary pressures that continue to 
impact the sector.

The trading results for the year were obviously impacted by the ongoing effects of the Covid pandemic, and the resulting 
Government restrictions, with dine-in trading only possible from 17 May 2021. We welcomed the essential Government support 
received through these periods of restrictions, particularly the Coronavirus Job Retention Scheme, which enabled us to protect 
the employment of our employees whilst our restaurants and pubs were closed.

I would also like to thank all of my new colleagues at TRG, at our Head Office and in our restaurants and pubs nationwide, for 
their continued hard work and commitment during a very challenging year.

While we have no direct exposure to either Ukraine or Russia, it remains too early to assess the impact on supply chain costs 
and customer behaviour. We are however doing everything we can to offer support and assistance to our UK based Ukrainian 
and Russian employees.

Ken Hanna
Chairman

15 March 2022

04  The Restaurant Group plc Annual Report 2021

Business review

 This stronger long-term capital 
structure provides us with the ability 
and increased flexibility to execute 
our four strategic priorities”
Andy Hornby
Chief Executive Officer

Introduction
2021 was a year in which the whole TRG team demonstrated 
remarkable resilience in the face of ongoing disruption from the 
pandemic and Government restrictions. It is their dedication  
to serving our customers which allowed us to bounce back 
strongly, when we could open fully for dine-in trade from the 
middle of May and deliver a very strong recovery in sales, 
outperforming the wider market in each of our divisions.

The Board has confidence in the Group’s ability to perform 
against these strategic objectives and deliver long-term 
sustainable growth for all stakeholders, given the strength 
of our brands, substantially reduced net debt and trading 
outperformance versus the market.

We provide more detailed updates our strategic priorities, 
below: 

A significant achievement during the year was securing the 
refinancing and recapitalisation of TRG and in the first quarter 
we agreed new long-term debt facilities providing the Group 
with significant financial flexibility over the next four to five 
years. We received excellent support from our shareholders 
in raising net proceeds of £166.8 million of new equity capital.

1. FY21 trading performance since the recommencement 

of dine-in on 17 May 2021

2. Making good progress towards bringing medium-term 

leverage target below 1.5x

This stronger long-term capital structure provides us with 
the ability and increased flexibility to execute our four 
strategic priorities:

•  Maintain like-for-like sales outperformance versus 
the market: Making selective investments in our existing 
estate to enhance our customer offer, as well as supporting 
our colleagues with increased development opportunities 
and well-being tools to aid recruitment and retention 

•  Deliver against key financial targets: Driving good 

sustainable returns on invested capital and remaining firmly 
on track to achieve our medium-term leverage1 target of 
below 1.5x 

•  Accelerate selective expansion opportunities: From 

new Wagamama and Pubs sites and selectively considering 
inorganic opportunities that may arise

•  Drive forward our ESG Agenda: Developing and 
implementing a detailed plan to deliver on our 2035  
carbon net zero ambition and continuing to make positive 
contributions to our colleagues, customers and communities

1  Pre IFRS 16 Adjustment and exceptional charges

3. Targeted organic growth plans for FY22

4. Driving forward our ESG agenda

1. FY21 Trading performance since the recommencement 
of dine-in (LFL sales % vs 2019 comparable for the 
33 weeks from 17 May 2021 to 2 January 2022)

Wagamama
Since reopening for dine-in on 17 May 2021, we have seen 
strong trading with LFL sales growth of 15%, representing an 
8% outperformance versus the market. Customer ratings have 
remained strong with the December 2021 external NPS scores 
(as measured by BrandVue) positioning Wagamama as the 
number two brand within the top casual dining chains in the UK.

The key customer initiatives driving the performance have been: 

•  Food innovation: At the beginning of the year in support of 
Veganuary, Wagamama made a brand commitment that 
50% of its menu would be plant-based (vegan or vegetarian) 
before the end of the year. In October we achieved this goal 
with the launch of a new menu incorporating new plant-
based dishes such as our vegan ramens and vegan takes on 
some of our most popular items including “vegan chilli squid”. 
Vegan participation has increased by +5% to >20% since 
introducing our plant pledge. Looking forward to 2022, we’re 
excited to be introducing new plant-based dishes and 
ingredients with the launch of our summer menu. 

The Restaurant Group plc Annual Report 2021  05

O
v
e
r
v
e
w

i

i

S
t
r
a
t
e
g
c
r
e
p
o
r
t

G
o
v
e
r
n
a
n
c
e

i

F
n
a
n
c
a

i

l

s
t
a
t
e
m
e
n
t
s

 
 
 
Business review continued

•  Marketing: We are continually evolving our marketing 
tactics with purpose-led campaigns and initiatives to 
ensure we stay relevant and current. We have worked 
with celebrities in order to tap into complementary passion 
points (i.e. football and music) for our gen-z and eco-
millennial audience, continuing to build relevancy and brand 
equity. Regional and local activation plans remain a crucial 
part of our plan, and we continue to encourage sites to 
‘own their mile’ and have a positive presence in their 
local communities.

•  Delivery and takeaway: Given trading restrictions 

through the pandemic, we have seen an acceleration of the 
structural shift of both new and existing customers enjoying 
delivery and takeaway with our sales mix from these two 
channels combined increasing from 16% in 2019 to 28% 
in 2021. LFL delivery sales were up 114% and LFL takeaway 
sales up 76% in the period (33 week period ending  
2 January 2022). This strong performance was aided by 
dedicated operations resource, insight tools and ensuring 
over 90% of our menu is offered on delivery. We will 
continue to make investment to improve operational 
efficiency and reconfigure sites to improve the delivery 
operation where possible. 

Pubs
We have seen a consistent outperformance versus the market 
and continued strong trading with LFL sales growth of 9%, 
representing a 11% outperformance versus the market. 
Customer sentiment remains strong with social media scores 
(consolidation of Google, Facebook and Tripadvisor scores) 
averaging 4.51/5 for 2021, our highest rating over the past 
five years.

The key operational initiatives driving the performance 
have been:

•  Maximising opportunities from external trading: 

Developed more than 30 covered outside areas using stretch 
tents and marquees to facilitate external dining all year round. 
The installation of stretch tents gives more scope to extend 
our drinks festivals throughout the year and explore non-
summer events such as Oktoberfest and Christmas markets. 

•  Enhancements to food and drink offer: There has  

been a refocus post Covid on increased localisation and 
premiumisation on our menus. Within each section we have 
trialled providing more premium options and “when they’re 
gone, they’re gone!” blackboards to encourage increased 
participation and spend.

Leisure
The business has delivered an encouraging trading 
performance, achieving LFL sales growth of +14%, 
outperforming the market by 7%. Our partnership with 
Yumpingo has provided greater customer insight on both 
customer service standards and dish feedback, and we have 
seen an improving trend on NPS scores (as measured on the 
Yumpingo platform) for both Frankie & Benny’s and Chiquito.

06  The Restaurant Group plc Annual Report 2021

The key customer initiatives driving the performance have been: 

•  Significant investment in food quality: Our focus has 
been on improving food quality with new menus launched 
across all of our brands in May. We made investments 
across our range including fresh burger patties, better-
quality steaks and ribs and a new pizza dough. Additionally 
we reduced the menu content by c.20% to help improve 
operational execution and reduce complexity.

•  Delivery and takeaway: The delivery business has been 
transformed over the past 18 months due to a combination 
of customer habits changing due to Covid and the 
investment in our online delivery brands which represent 
c. 55% of the delivery sales mix. Delivery and takeaway 
sales now account for 17% of sales (for the 33-week 
period ending 2 January 2022) compared to only 5% in 
2019. LFL delivery sales were up 389% and LFL takeaway 
sales up 31% in this period. 

We will also look to trial some targeted capital refurbishments 
across 10-15 sites in our Frankie & Benny’s estate. The sites 
selected will be based on a number of factors including market 
capacity, delivery mix, competition and age of the current fit out. 
The focus of the refresh will be on external works to improve 
kerb appeal, customer facing areas such as seating & bar areas 
with targeted replacement of kitchen equipment as required. 
We expect to spend approximately £250,000 per site. If the trial 
sites generate a good return on capital, we will explore further 
opportunities to invest in the estate.

Concessions
The international travel sector had an incredibly challenging 
year due to ongoing changes in Government restrictions and 
the associated cost of Covid testing.

Our focus in the year was on a measured reopening programme, 
only opening in locations with sufficient passenger volumes to 
support a positive commercial outcome. We also achieved 
more flexible terms with the vast majority of airport partners with 
regards to minimum guaranteed rents (MGRs) and mothballing 
fees. In addition, we have flexed our operating hours to match 
departing flight times in order to minimise costs whilst ensuring 
we offer a great service.

LFL sales declined by 41%, 18% ahead of the passenger 
volume decline in the period (for the 33-week period ending 
2 January 2022). Sales have benefited from a higher average 
spend per passenger (due to longer dwell times and the 
benefit of a reduced VAT rate) and reduced competition as 
other food and beverage operators manage their reopening 
profile. We expect the level of out-performance to reduce as 
competitors reopen more sites and VAT reverts to 20%. 

We currently have 27 sites open, representing c.60% of 
our total estate. Our opening plans for the remaining estate 
is dependent on passenger volume recovery and discussions 
with airport partners on terminal reopening’s. With the recent 
encouraging news that restrictions and testing requirements 
are being relaxed, we currently expect to open the majority  
of the remaining estate over the summer in FY22.

2. Making good progress towards bringing medium-
term leverage target below 1.5x
The Group made good progress during the year towards its 
medium-term leverage target with FY21 year-end leverage2 
(net debt/EBITDA) standing at 2.1x.

The equity capital raise, strong EBITDA recovery in the 
second half of the year and disciplined capital investment all 
contributing to the significant reduction in net debt in the year.

With the good progress made, the Group has repaid £45m  
of term loan on 15 March 2022, maintaining further flexibility  
to pay a further £44m at par before November 2022.

There is further detail in the financial review section on other 
key movements in the cashflow.

3. Targeted organic growth plans for FY22
The strength of trading of our Wagamama and Pubs 
businesses since reopening has strengthened our belief  
on the site roll-out potential for both businesses.

We continue to apply a highly selective approach to opening 
new sites, based on a methodical, data-driven approach and 
a capital expenditure investment appraisal that carefully 
evaluates and scores its key selection criteria, including 
demographic and competitive dynamics.

Recent openings in 2019 and 2020 have delivered good 
returns with:

•  Wagamama UK restaurants (excluding delivery kitchens) 
having delivered over 45% returns on invested capital3 
(consisting of 10 new openings)

•  Wagamama UK delivery kitchens having delivered over 60% 
return on invested capital3 (consisting of five new openings)

•  Pub restaurants having delivered over 20% return on 
invested capital4 (consisting of three new openings)

We continue to make good progress and our expansion plans 
for our UK openings in FY22 are outlined in the table below:

Existing estate

New openings 
target annual 
run-rate

2022 planned 
openings

Wagamama UK 
restaurants
Wagamama UK 
Delivery kitchens
Pubs

148

8
79

5-7

4-5
3-5

7-9

4-5
3

With regard to the Wagamama International business we 
expect to open three to four new US sites under our JV 
partnership with the first two sites expected to be in Atlanta 
and Tampa. We also expect to open five to eight new 
international franchise sites predominantly in Italy and the 
Middle East. 

We will remain disciplined in the way that we grow the estate, 
focusing on delivering good sustainable returns for our 
shareholders.

4. Driving forward our ESG agenda
‘Preserving The Future’ is TRG’s programme that shapes and 
drives our Environmental, Social and Governance (ESG) 
agenda. We are committed to operating ethically and 
sustainably and the programme focuses on continuously finding 
ways to reduce our carbon footprint, improve our packaging, to 
further contribute to our communities and to improve the health 
and wellbeing of our colleagues and customers, all of which is 
underpinned by a strong governance framework.

Environmental initiatives overview
After having spent considerable time in the year assessing and 
compiling the appropriate data, in collaboration with the Zero 
Carbon Forum for Hospitality, we now have visibility of our 
emissions across all scopes allowing us to build a programme 
of activity focused on short, medium and long term 
decarbonisation, in order to achieve our ambition of  
being net zero carbon emissions by 2035.

We recognise the significant challenge of reaching net zero and 
are focused on a number of environmental initiatives to reduce 
our impact, including:

•  On 1 October 2021, we completed the move of all5 our 

directly controlled supplies of electricity, gas and LPG used 
in our Wagamama, Pubs and Leisure divisions to renewable 
sources and all residual emissions from this particular scope 
will be offset by carbon removal reforestation projects from 
FY22. Carbon emissions from these scopes (i.e. scope 1 
and 2) represent c.15% of our total carbon emission 
footprint

2  Pre IFRS 16 Adjustment and exceptional charges
3  Return on invested capital (ROIC) defined by 2021 outlet EBITDA/initial capex 
invested grossed up for 12 months. i.e. 2021 outlet EBITDA is for the 7 month 
period June to December 2021. Returns have also been adjusted to take out the 
VAT benefit and property grants received in the respective period

4  Pub restaurants returns EBITDA assumed on leasehold basis at 6% interest on 

5 

freehold component of investment

Includes electricity, gas & LPG. Where we control the specific supply point for 
contracting. Excludes landlord supplies

The Restaurant Group plc Annual Report 2021  07

O
v
e
r
v
e
w

i

i

S
t
r
a
t
e
g
c
r
e
p
o
r
t

G
o
v
e
r
n
a
n
c
e

i

F
n
a
n
c
a

i

l

s
t
a
t
e
m
e
n
t
s

 
 
 
Our role to provide a diverse and inclusive environment with 
a strong sense of purpose has never been more important. 
We have launched a range of engagement initiatives, led by 
colleague groups, which provide information, awareness  
and learning sessions to promote an inclusive workplace  
with appropriate recruitment, leadership and behaviours. 
Additionally, we partner with The Burnt Chef Project, a not-for-
profit organisation who specialise in improving the wellbeing of 
those within the hospitality profession and challenging the 
stigma of mental health. We work with them to deliver mental 
health training to our managers and to put in place effective 
practices which improve wellbeing.

Reflecting the progress we have made in 2021, the 
Sustainable Restaurant Association awarded a three-star 
rating to each of our divisions, representing the highest rating 
attainable. The assessment areas focus on sourcing, society 
and the environment reflecting the importance of sourcing and 
serving food well. This is a significant progression on our 2019 
ratings where we achieved a three-star rating for our Pubs 
division, two-star for our Leisure and Concessions division 
and one star for Wagamama.

We acknowledge the important role TRG plays in global climate 
and societal change. Our “Preserving The Future” programme 
is a continuous journey to establish environmental, social and 
governance best practice in everything we do.

Andy Hornby
Chief Executive Officer

15 March 2022

Business review continued

•  Reducing energy consumption through ongoing activities 

that baseline usage per site, sets targets and drives ongoing 
consumption reduction through operational best practice 
and with the adoption of monitoring technologies that 
drive efficiency

•  Reducing plate waste through a partnership with the 

Sustainable Restaurant Association that identifies menu 
ingredients that contribute most food waste so we can 
adapt menu design accordingly

•  We have a new waste framework with our partners, that 

over the next three years aims to increase waste recycling by 
16% to 71%, with an ambition to increase it by 6% in 2022

•  Continuing to evolve our packaging with a new lower 
plastic packaging content range launching in 2022 for 
Wagamama with the ambition of reducing plastic 
packaging by at least 30% 

•  Our ‘Bowl Return Scheme’ trial in Brighton Wagamama  
that encourages recycling has been well received by our 
customers and we are looking at rolling it out more widely 
this year

We have worked with the Zero Carbon Forum to develop the 
high-level industry roadmap to net zero for Scope 3 and are 
using this as a starting point to develop our own specific 
roadmap and plan. Their sectoral guidance suggests a 70% 
reduction in emissions is possible with the residual 30% of 
emissions being offset. It should not be under-estimated 
though that this is a multi-year programme through to 2035 
and that residual emissions will need to be off-set from 2035.

Social initiatives overview
Our charity partners are ‘Mind’ and ‘Young Minds’  
(Mental Health Charities) and ‘Only a Pavement Away’  
(A Homelessness Charity). We support our charities through  
a variety of fundraising activities and are donating profits from 
our retail range in Wagamama. We are also supporting our 
homelessness charity by providing employment opportunities 
and a skills hub that offers hospitality training. Through a 
combination of colleague led fundraising, company matched 
programmes, and contributions from our retail product range 
we are aiming to raise up to £500,000 in 2022.

In 2021 our Apprenticeship programme provided practical 
skills, experience and qualifications for over 240 apprentices 
across front of house, back of house, management and 
commercial roles and we are aiming to double the number of 
apprenticeships to over 500 apprentices in total in 2022. This 
will equip our graduates from the Apprenticeship programme 
with the equivalent qualifications ranging from 5 GCSEs right 
up to degree level.

08  The Restaurant Group plc Annual Report 2021

Financial review

 From full reopening, the business has traded very 
strongly, and we have been delighted with the 
performance of all our divisions outperforming their 
respective markets, which gives us confidence in 
our ability to trade relatively well into 2022”
Kirk Davis
Chief Financial Officer

The impact of Covid continued to have a significant impact on 
the performance with the business operating only on delivery 
and takeaway in our Wagamama and Leisure businesses, 
through to ‘outside dining’ trade and full trading from 17 May 
2021. The results for this year therefore represent only seven 
months of unrestricted trading when also allowing for the 
effect of the Omicron variant in December 2021. In addition, 
international air travel volumes have been significantly 
depressed throughout the whole period.

From full reopening, the business has traded very strongly, 
and we have been delighted with the performance of all our 
divisions outperforming their respective markets, which gives 
us confidence in our ability to trade relatively well into 2022.

We welcomed the invaluable government support through this 
period in the form of the reduced VAT rate, the business rates 
holiday and property grants. In a period where our team 
members, operations and financial performance were 
significantly impacted by the pandemic, these measures, 
along with the Coronavirus Job Retention Scheme, enabled 
us to protect the employment of our employees.

Statutory Results
The key statutory financial measures (IFRS 16) are 
summarised below and are stated after the impact of 
exceptional costs:

Statutory Results (IFRS 16)

53 weeks ended 
2 January 2022
£m
636.6
14.1
2.2%
(32.9)
(38.4)
(5.3)p

52 weeks ended 
27 December 
2020*
£m
459.8
(95.1)
(20.7%)
(132.9)
(124.2)
(22.1)p

Revenue
Operating profit/(loss)
Operating margin
Loss before tax
Loss after tax
Statutory EPS (pence)

*  Restated

Revenue for the year was £636.6m (2020: £459.8m) which 
represents an increase of 38.5% on the prior year. The 
comparison between the two periods is complicated by the 
impacts of the pandemic and various Government restrictions 
in place across the hospitality sector during both years, with 
the increased ability to trade in 2021 the primary driver for the 
increase year-on-year. 

Following the removal of restrictions in May to early December, 
we are particularly pleased to have delivered strong LFL sales 
growth across our Wagamama, Pubs and Leisure businesses 
with all our businesses (including Concessions) outperforming 
their respective markets. 

Statutory operating profit increased substantially to £14.1m 
compared to an operating loss of £95.1m in 2020. These figures 
include the impact of exceptional items which significantly 
reduced from £45.4m to £24.9m. The remainder of the increase 
was due to the increased ability to trade across the business in 
2021, disciplined cost control and the benefit of Government 
assistance noted above. Interest costs (including the impact of 
IFRS 16) rose to £47.0m from £37.8m due to an increase in the 
effective interest rate, a higher gross debt, and an exceptional 
write off of fees on the prior facilities of £1.9m. 

l

s
t
a
t
e
m
e
n
t
s

The Restaurant Group plc Annual Report 2021  09

O
v
e
r
v
e
w

i

i

S
t
r
a
t
e
g
c
r
e
p
o
r
t

G
o
v
e
r
n
a
n
c
e

i

F
n
a
n
c
a

i

 
 
 
Financial review continued

Alternative Performance Measures
TRG uses a number of non-statutory measures to monitor 
business performance which are referred to within the Annual 
Report, but primarily relate to Adjusted and pre-IFRS 16 profit 
metrics. This is because the pre-IFRS 16 profit is consistent 
with the financial information used in the management 
accounts to inform business decisions and investment 
appraisals. It is our view that presenting the information 
on a pre-IFRS 16 basis will provide a useful basis for 
understanding the Group’s results to all stakeholders. 
Specifically, the measures mainly relate to three adjustments:

•  The main profit measure used is Adjusted EBITDA. This is 

not a statutory measure but closely represents the Group’s 
ability to make cash trading profits as it excludes key 
non-cash elements of the Income Statement such as 
depreciation and amortisation.

•  The adjusted profit and debt measures are based on the 

IAS 17 approach to lease accounting and does not include 
the impact of IFRS 16. This is used as it more closely 
represents the cash profit of the business, and the debt 
as measured by our banks.

•  The adjusted profit measures are quoted excluding the 
impact of items that management have deemed as 
exceptional as they are material and not related to 
underlying trading.

The key alternative performance measures (APM) are 
summarised below. Both pre-IFRS 16 and IFRS 16 figures 
are shown and are stated before the impact of 
exceptional costs:

APM (Pre-IFRS 16)

APM (IFRS 16)

53 weeks 
ended 2 Jan 
2022
Pre-IFRS 16
£m
636.6

52 weeks 
ended 27 Dec 
20202
Pre-IFRS 16
£m
459.8

53 weeks 
ended 2 Jan 
2022
IFRS 16
£m
636.6

52 weeks 
ended 27 Dec 
20202
IFRS 16
£m
459.8

81.2

8.7

115.2

53.4

42.8

(30.5)

37.1

(49.7)

6.7%

(6.6%)

5.8%

(10.8%)

16.6

(47.9)

(8.0)

(87.5)

Revenue
Adjusted1 
EBITDA
Adjusted1 
operating 
profit/(loss)
Adjusted1 
operating 
margin
Adjusted1 
profit/(loss) 
before tax

1  The Group’s adjusted performance metrics are defined within the glossary at the 
end of this report. All such adjusted measures are stated pre-exceptional items

2   Restated

As these measures are not defined by accounting standards, 
they may not be comparable across companies. The adjusted 
results may exclude significant costs (such as restructuring or 
impairments) and so may not be a complete picture of the 
Group’s financial performance, which is presented in the 
statutory results. Full definitions of the APMs are included 
in the Glossary to the Annual Report.

Adjusted EBITDA (pre-IFRS 16) for 2021 is £81.2m (2020: 
£8.7m). The Group generated an Adjusted EBITDA loss 
(pre-IFRS 16) of £18.1m in the first quarter, whilst in lockdown 
and only being able to trade for delivery and takeaway. As 
mentioned above, we saw strong LFL sales growth and 
EBITDA delivery across our Wagamama, Pubs and Leisure 
businesses once we were able to reopen for dine-in. 

The Group made a profit before tax (pre-IFRS 16) for the year 
of £16.6m (2020: loss £47.9m). 

Refinancing and Equity Raise
During February 2021, the Group successfully agreed a 
£500.0m debt package which consisted of a five year £380.0m 
term loan through to 2026, and a four year £120.0m super senior 
revolving credit facility through to 2025.

In March 2021, the Group successfully raised net proceeds 
of £166.8m of equity from its supportive shareholder base 
through a placing and open offer with the aim to give us the 
liquidity needed to withstand further trading restrictions, to 
invest in growing the business over the medium term and 
to deliver good sustainable shareholder returns.

In May 2021, the Group drew down £330.0m of the term loan 
facility which reduced the total available facilities to £450.0m. 
Given the strong recovery of EBITDA and lower net debt, the 
Group has repaid £45.0m of the term loan on 15 March 2022. 
The Group currently has £405.0m of available debt facilities. 

10  The Restaurant Group plc Annual Report 2021

Capital allocation framework
The Group remains disciplined in its approach to capital 
allocation with the overriding objective being to enhance 
shareholder value. The Group’s capital allocation 
framework prioritises.

Priorities

(1)  Investment in customer 

offer

(2)  Maintain a strong 
balance sheet

(3)  Wagamama and Pubs 
new site expansion
(4)  Selectively consider 
inorganic growth 
opportunities

Parameters
Refurbishment and 
maintenance capex within a 
range of £25m to £35m
Target leverage1 below 1.5x 
in the medium term
Deliver against targeted 
returns criteria:

•  Wagamama >40% ROIC
•  Pubs >20% ROIC

Deliver long-term 
shareholder value

1  Net debt to EBITDA ratio (Pre-IFRS 16 Adjustment and exceptional charges).

Cash flow and net debt
Net debt on an IFRS 16 basis has fallen from £824.2m to 
£582.0m in the year, a fall of £242.2m. The key driver of this 
reduction has been the injection of £166.8m of equity from the 
capital raise in March 2021. Secondly, the reduction in lease 
liabilities of £73.4m is due to both the renegotiations of existing 
airport rent contracts to remove minimum payments and 
making them more flexible in line with passenger numbers, 
and payments of lease liabilities in the year.

Pre-IFRS 16 net debt has decreased from £340.4m to 
£171.6m, a reduction of £168.8m. As mentioned above this 
is due primarily to the capital raise. Free cash flow increased 
to £44.7m (2020: outflow £50.6m) following an increase in 
Adjusted EBITDA to £81.2m (2020: £8.7m) and a reduction in 
maintenance and refurbishment capex to £19.0m (2020: 
£21.9m), offset by an increase in interest costs to £20.6m 
(2020: £15.5m).

Development capital expenditure of £15.1m (2020: £17.9m) 
related primarily to opening four new Wagamama restaurants, 
two Wagamama delivery kitchens, and, one freehold pub. 
There were also some costs relating to the completion of five 
new Concession sites in the redeveloped Manchester 
Airport terminal.

Summary cash flow for the year (on a pre-IFRS 16 basis) is set 
out below:

Adjusted EBITDA (Pre-IFRS 16 
basis)*
Working capital and non-cash 
adjustments
Operating cash flow** 
Net interest paid
Tax (paid)/received
Refurbishment and maintenance 
expenditure
Free cash flow
Development expenditure
Utilisation of onerous property cost 
provisions 
Exceptional costs
Proceeds from issue of share 
capital
Other items
Cash movement

Net Debt (Pre-IFRS 16 basis)
Group net debt brought forward
Derecognition of finance lease 
liability (IFRS 16 transition)

Non-cash movements in net debt
Group net debt carried forward 
(Pre-IFRS 16 basis)

2021
£m

81.2

5.7
86.9
(20.6)
(2.6)

(19.0)
44.7
(15.1)

(13.4)
(7.4)

166.8
(1.6)
174.0

2020
£m

8.7

(27.0)
(18.3)
(15.5)
5.1

(21.9)
(50.6)
(17.9)

(9.3)
(34.9)

54.6
3.3
(54.8)

(340.4)

(286.6)

–

(5.2)

2.6

(1.6)

(171.6)

(340.4)

Incremental lease liabilities (IFRS 16)
Group net debt carried forward 
(IFRS 16 basis)

(410.4)

(483.8)

(582.0)

(824.2)

* 

The Group’s adjusted performance metrics are defined within the glossary at the 
end of this report. All such adjusted measures are stated pre-exceptional items
**  Operating cash flow excludes certain exceptional costs and includes payments 

made against lease obligations

O
v
e
r
v
e
w

i

i

S
t
r
a
t
e
g
c
r
e
p
o
r
t

G
o
v
e
r
n
a
n
c
e

i

F
n
a
n
c
a

i

l

s
t
a
t
e
m
e
n
t
s

The Restaurant Group plc Annual Report 2021  11

 
 
 
Financial review continued

At year end, the Group had cash headroom of £258.1m (2020: 
£118.7m) consisting of £111.6m of undrawn revolving credit 
facilities (2020: £78.0m) and a cash balance of £146.5m 
(2020: £40.7m) which provides the Group with significant 
liquidity to fund both the operations of the Group and future 
new openings for both our Wagamama and Pubs businesses.

Exceptional items
An exceptional pre-tax charge of £24.9m has been recorded 
in the year (2020: £45.4m). 

Exceptional items consist of:

•  Impairment of assets of £25.9m (2020: £142.9m). 

The impairment charges relate to:

 – £19.6m due to trading in certain locations, primarily 

relating to sites in our Concessions business 

 – A charge of £6.3m relating to the write down of assets 

on closed sites 

•  A credit of £4.5m (2020: credit of £100.7m). The key 

elements are rent concessions achieved of £15.1m, lease 
liabilities exited totalling a net credit of £4.9m, partially offset 
by onerous property cost provisions of £8.6m, payments 
to exit sites of £2.7m, staff redundancies of £2.7m, and 
other costs of £1.5m.

•  A cost of £1.9m (2020: £Nil) for loan facility fees relating 

to the prior debt facilities written off on refinancing.

•  Professional fees of £1.6m (2020: £3.2m) relating to 

corporate financing and restructuring activity.

The tax credit relating to these exceptional charges was 
£2.6m (2020: £1.5m). 

Cash expenditure associated with the above exceptional 
charges was £7.4m in the year (2020: £33.7m) relating 
principally to the staff restructuring, closure costs, and 
professional fees as discussed above. The remainder of 
the exceptional items were non-cash in nature.

Tax 
The tax charge for the year was £5.5m (2020: credit of 
£8.7m), summarised as follows:

2021
Exceptional
£m

Trading
£m

Total
£m

Trading
£m

2020
Exceptional
£m

Total
£m

0.7

(0.7)

–

(9.5)

– (9.5)

(2.6)
(1.9)

10.3
9.6

7.7
7.7

(2.3)
(11.8)

3.3
1.0
3.3 (8.5)

(2.4)

0.2

(2.2)

(0.2)

– (0.2)

(4.3)

9.8

5.5 (12.0)

3.3 (8.7)

Corporation 
tax
Deferred  
tax
Total
Adjustments 
in respect of 
prior years
Total tax 
(credit) / 
charge

Effective 
tax rate 
(excluding 
prior years 
adjustments)23.8% (38.6%)(23.4%) 13.5%

(8.2%) 6.7%

Effective 
tax rate

53.8% (39.4%) (16.7%) 13.7%

(8.2%) 6.8%

Given that the Group has made a statutory loss in both the 
current and prior periods, the effective tax rate is not indicative 
of future expected tax rates. It is also worth noting that the 
Group has further statutory losses and interest restrictions 
worth £19.8m which will reduce future cash tax payments 
over the next two to three years.

The effective adjusted tax rate for the year was 53.8% 
compared to the 13.7% in the prior year. In the current year, 
we have had an increase in the tax credit following a review 
of the tax treatment for corporate activities undertaken and 
an updated capital allowances claim, resulting in a lower tax 
charge for prior years which has been reflected in these 
accounts. Excluding these benefits, the effective tax rate 
is 23.8% (2020: 13.5%). Consistent with prior years, the tax 
rate is higher than the UK corporation tax rate due to non-
deductible expenses primarily relating to depreciation on 
non-qualifying assets. 

The current year exceptional tax charge of £9.6m consists 
of a £12.2m charge relating to the change in the tax rate from 
19% to 25% in April 2023 which increases the value of the 
deferred tax liability, offset by £2.6m of tax credits from the 
exceptional costs.

12  The Restaurant Group plc Annual Report 2021

Key inflationary themes FY22
There are some well-documented sector wide cost challenges 
for the year ahead, as outlined below: 

All inflation figures below are stated as their incremental 
impact in FY22 vs FY21 post mitigating activities.

•  Labour market pressures: as widely reported the economy 
is at near full employment and there is well over 1 million 
vacancies in the UK. This shortage of labour across the UK 
is leading to upward pressure on wage rates in addition to 
the above inflationary increase in the National Living Wage 
(NLW) from April 2022 of 6.6%.

•  General food & drink inflation: is driven by global commodity 
markets and supply chain pressures that are expected to 
continue into 2023. This is expected to result in cost inflation 
of 5%+ for FY22 before any consequential inflationary 
impacts arising from the conflict in Ukraine.

•  Utilities inflation: Material market-driven increases in 

electricity and gas will cost the Group an additional £6.0m 
to £7.0m in FY22.

There are a number of actions the Group is taking to mitigate 
the significant effects from the elevated levels of cost inflation 
expected for the current year: 

•  Revised labour deployment model to manage the evolving 

sales mix across dine-in and delivery sales

•  Continuing to work with our supply chain partners to 

leverage the scale of the business based on both volume 
growth and new site openings

•  c.95% of electricity and gas volume now hedged for 2022

•  c.75% of electricity and gas volume hedged for 2023 

and 2024

Viability Statement
In accordance with provision 31 of the UK Corporate 
Governance Code (July 2018) (the ‘Code’), the Directors have 
assessed the viability of the Group over a three-year period to 
December 2024. 

The Directors believe that three years is the appropriate 
time-period over which to evaluate long term viability, and 
this is consistent with the Group’s current strategic planning 
process. Management have prepared, and the Board has 
considered two key scenarios:

•  A ‘base case’ where the business is allowed to trade 

normally throughout the period without further trading 
restrictions, specifically the Group has forecast sales 
like-for-like performance to be broadly in line with the levels 
seen in the 33 weeks since trading resumed on the 17 May 
2021, and cost inflation of c.5%. The Concessions business 
is forecast to return to pre-pandemic levels in 2024 in line 
with current air passenger forecasts.

•  A ‘stress case’ whereby the company is impacted by 

further variants of the Covid-19 in winter 2022, 2023 and 
2024 to the same severity as the recent Omicron strain, 
sales are further reduced by 5% across the entire period 
(outside of variant impact), and cost inflation is higher than 
in the base case by 1%.

As detailed in the Risk Committee report, the Board has 
conducted a robust assessment of the principal risks facing 
the business. The resilience of the Group to the impact of 
these risks has been assessed by the creation of the ‘stress 
case’ which management believe to be a severe but plausible 
scenario based on past experience. 

Taking account of the company’s current position, principal  
risks facing the business and the sensitivity analysis 
discussed above, as well as the potential mitigating actions 
that the company could take, and the experience that the 
Company has in adapting the business to change, the Board 
expects that the Company will be able to continue in operation 
and meet its liabilities as they fall due over the three-year 
period of assessment.

Further details on the forecast process and assumptions can 
be found in Note 1 to the accounts.

Kirk Davis
Chief Financial Officer

15 March 2022

O
v
e
r
v
e
w

i

i

S
t
r
a
t
e
g
c
r
e
p
o
r
t

G
o
v
e
r
n
a
n
c
e

i

F
n
a
n
c
a

i

l

s
t
a
t
e
m
e
n
t
s

The Restaurant Group plc Annual Report 2021  13

 
 
 
Section 172 statement

This section 172 statement sets out the factors considered 
by the Board in carrying out its duty to promote the success 
of the Company for the benefit of its shareholders.

Background
Section 172 of the Companies Act 2006 (the “Act”) requires 
the Directors to act in the way they consider, in good faith, 
would be most likely to promote the success of the Company 
for the benefit of its members as a whole, having regard to 
various factors, including the matters listed below in section 
172(1)(a) to (f):

(a) the likely consequences of any decision in the long term,

(b) the interests of the Company’s employees,

(c)  the need to foster the Company’s business relationships 

with suppliers, customers and others,

(d)  the impact of the Company’s operations on the community 

and the environment,

(e)  the desirability of the Company maintaining a reputation  

for high standards of business conduct, and

(f)  the need to act fairly as between members of the Company.

The Companies (Miscellaneous Reporting) Regulations 2018 
require Directors to explain how they have considered the 
interests of key stakeholders and the broader matters set 
out in section 172(1)(a) to (f) when performing their duty to 
promote the success of the Company under section 172. 

Stakeholder engagement
The Directors take into account the views and interests of 
a wide set of stakeholders. During the year the Board and 
its Committees received papers, presentations and reports, 
participated in discussions and considered the impact of 
the Company’s activities on its key stakeholders (wherever 
relevant). Particularly in light of the ongoing Covid-19 
pandemic and the various lockdowns and restrictions 
placed on the hospitality industry during 2021, the Board 
has frequently had to make difficult decisions having regard 
to competing priorities. By considering the Company’s 
strategic priorities and being prepared to adapt to the 
challenges faced, the Board has acted to promote the 
success of the Company for the benefit of its members 
as a whole.

The Board has engaged directly with stakeholders on certain 
issues, such as the extensive discussions with our major 
shareholders prior to the capital raising in March 2021 and 
our debt lenders in advance of the refinancing in March 2021. 
In addition, the Board also considers information from across 
the organisation to help it understand the impact of its 
decisions, and to consider the interests and views of our key 
stakeholders. It also reviews strategy, financial and operational 
performance, as well as information covering areas such as 
key risks.

Principal decisions
We have outlined below examples of how the Directors of the 
Company have had regard to the matters set out in section 
172(1)(a) to (f), including consideration of the Company’s 
employees and other stakeholders when discharging their 
duties under section 172 and the effect on the principal 
decisions taken by them.

Decisions related to the Covid-19 pandemic
2021 was another challenging year for the hospitality sector 
and the wider economy. The Board acted to ensure the health 
and safety of our guests and colleagues, particularly during 
the reopening of our estate following the lockdown in the first 
part of the year and the arrival of the Omicron variant in late 
autumn. Decisive actions were taken in response to the 
pandemic and the impact of Government restrictions,  
supply chain issues and general economic uncertainty.

Key decisions taken by the Board included:

•  continuing to limit costs, particularly during the national 

lockdown;

•  operating approximately 200 sites for delivery and takeaway 

during the national lockdown; 

•  accessing Government support where appropriate, 

including the Coronavirus Job Retention Scheme (‘CJRS’), 
reduced VAT and business rate relief;

•  delivering an accelerated reopening plan for dine-in trading 
(once the restrictions for hospitality businesses ended)  
for the Wagamama, Pubs and Leisure businesses and 
managing the reopening of certain Concession sites  
based on passenger numbers.

14  The Restaurant Group plc Annual Report 2021

In taking all of these decisions, the Board was mindful of  
the long-term interest of the Company and its stakeholders, 
particularly the matters set out in s. 172(1)(b), (c), (e) and (f).

Long-term debt refinancing
In light of the Covid-19 crisis and its impact on the Group and 
the wider economy, the Board was keenly aware of the need 
to secure long-term debt funding. 

In March 2021, we secured £500.0m of new debt facilities  
(the “New Facilities”), comprising a £380.0m Term Loan 
Facility (the “Term Loan”), and a £120.0m Super Senior 
Revolving Credit Facility (the “RCF”). The New Facilities 
provide the Group with enhanced liquidity and long-term 
financing with the maturities of the Term Loan and the RCF 
being in 2026 and 2025, respectively. The Term Loan and,  
as required, an initial simultaneous drawing of the RCF were 
used to repay and refinance in full all of the Group’s existing 
debt facilities, namely the Company’s existing revolving credit 
facility, the CLBILS Facility, the Wagamama Notes and the 
Wagamama revolving credit facility (the “Existing Facilities”), 
which were all due to reach maturity by July 2022.

The New Facilities also allowed the Group to be consolidated 
into one finance group which provides a more efficient funding 
structure to support the Group’s strategic initiatives.

The Board considered carefully the need for flexibility to cope 
with short-term uncertainties about possible Covid-related 
lockdowns and the Company’s ability to repay the New 
Facilities over the longer term. The New Facilities’ covenant 
package provides significant covenant headroom during 2021 
and 2022. Both the Term Loan and the RCF are also subject 
to a margin ratchet which allows the Group’s cost of debt to 
decrease according to prevailing net leverage. Further, the 
Term Loan provides flexibility to allow the Group to prepay the 
facility, if desirable, with a significant proportion of the facility 
able to be prepaid without penalty in the 18 months following 
the initial drawdown. 

The Board concluded that it would most likely promote the 
success of the Company in the long term for the benefit of its 
members as a whole, to enter into the New Facilities. In taking 
these decisions, the Board considered matters set out in 
s. 172(1)(a) to (e).

£175m capital raising
Also in March 2021, the Board proposed a £175m 
underwritten capital raising (“Capital Raising”), which was 
approved by c. 99% of shareholders voting at the General 
Meeting of the Company held on 29 March 2021. The Board 
felt that Covid-19, the associated restrictions, and its future 
possible duration, would materially impact the Group’s ability 
to reduce leverage organically or support selective growth 
opportunities in the medium term. 

Having considered a number of different scenarios, and in 
particular a “reasonable worst case” scenario, and the impact 
these might have on TRG’s financial position, the Board 
believed the Capital Raising would be most likely to promote 
the success of the Company for the benefit of its members. 
Having regard to the Group’s strategic objectives, the Board 
proposed that the net proceeds from the Capital Raising 
would be used to improve TRG’s liquidity headroom to protect 
against any potential resurgence of the Covid-19 pandemic, 
accelerate TRG’s deleveraging and strengthen TRG’s flexibility 
to capitalise on selective site expansion in its Wagamama and 
Pubs businesses.

The Board had explored selective asset disposals as an 
alternative to the Capital Raising, however, based on extensive 
work, the Board believed that it was not in the best interest of 
shareholders based on prevailing multiples at the time. Any 
disposals would not achieve best value for shareholders and 
might have long-term implications for Management’s flexibility 
to pursue its strategy. Accordingly, the Board concluded that 
the most appropriate course of action to reduce debt and 
leverage in the medium term was to raise equity. 

The Board also had to balance the need to secure additional 
funding, including from institutions and large investors, with 
the need to act fairly as between members of the Company. 
As a result, the Capital Raising was split into a Firm Placing 
of 95,299,430 New Ordinary Shares, on a non-pre-emptive 
basis, and a Placing and Open Offer of 79,700,570 New 
Ordinary Shares in which existing shareholders had the 
opportunity to participate pro rata to their holdings.

In taking the decision to propose the Capital Raising, the 
Board considered the matters set out in s. 172(1)(a) to (f).

O
v
e
r
v
e
w

i

i

S
t
r
a
t
e
g
c
r
e
p
o
r
t

G
o
v
e
r
n
a
n
c
e

i

F
n
a
n
c
a

i

l

s
t
a
t
e
m
e
n
t
s

The Restaurant Group plc Annual Report 2021  15

 
 
 
Environmental and Social report

Non-financial reporting information
The Companies Act 2006 requires the Company to disclose 
certain non-financial reporting information within the Annual 
Report and Accounts. Accordingly, the required disclosures 
can be found on the following pages in this report:

•  information on environmental matters (page 18)

•  information on our employees (from page 21)

•  information on social, community and human rights matters 

(page 23)

•  information on anti-corruption and anti-bribery (page 22)

To drive progress and ensure strong governance is in place, 
our Preserving the Future programme has Executive 
sponsorship, a Steering Committee made up of Divisional 
leadership, including heads of key functional areas, and a 
dedicated head of sustainability and programme lead. TRG is 
accelerating business-wide environmental and social initiatives 
in a coordinated and target-driven programme. As founder 
members of the Zero Carbon Forum and co-chair of the 
emissions working groups (for scopes 1 and 2) we play 
an active role in developing sector-wide plans to reduce 
emissions across the value chain and are committed to 
net zero carbon emissions by 2035. 

•  information on diversity (pages 21 and 22, and in the 

We have outlined activity around key areas below:

Corporate Governance report on page 27).

We are committed to doing business responsibly and 
acknowledge that the Group has a significant role to play in 
the communities and the wider environment in which we 
operate. This report sets out the principal areas of focus and 
activity in 2021 relating to the environment, our food and drink 
offering, and our people and communities.

1. Reducing our utilities consumption and associated 

carbon emissions;

2. Driving down carbon emissions in our supply chain;

3. Reducing our food waste and packaging;

‘Preserving The Future’ is the Group’s programme that shapes 
and drives our Environmental and Social agenda. We are 
committed to:

4. Sourcing ethical, sustainable and healthy produce; and

5. Supporting our colleagues and the community.

•  operating ethically and sustainably;

•  continuously finding ways to reduce our carbon footprint;

•  further contributing to our communities; and

•  improving the health and wellbeing of our customers and 

colleagues.

Reflecting the progression of our Environmental and Social 
agenda, we have compiled a Sustainable Accounting 
Standards Board (SASB) report for the first time. The SASB 
framework consolidates a set of widely recognised metrics 
and can be found in the Governance section of our website: 
https://www.trgplc.com/governance/policies

16  The Restaurant Group plc Annual Report 2021

Taskforce for Climate-related Financial Disclosure (TCFD) 
The Restaurant Group recognises the value that the Taskforce for Climate-related Financial Disclosure (TCFD) will bring to 
climate-related risk management and to both the identification and mitigation of risk. We provide an update on TCFD disclosures 
in the table below, and as part of the process we can confirm that we align with the key recommendations related to:

•  Executive-level accountability and reporting;

•  Climate-related risk assessment and management; and

•  Environmental performance metrics.

Governance

Strategy

Risk Management

Metrics & Targets

We have considered physical 
and socioeconomic risk. This 
takes into account risk to our 
property estate, supply chain, 
employees and proposition.

We do not consider the 
climate-related risks as 
material at this time. However, 
we are taking reasonable steps 
to ensure this remains the 
case. This will be done  
by regular reviews in the 
Preserving the Future Steering 
Committee, and any initiatives 
will be tracked through the 
relevant working groups.

Actions that the Group is 
taking to mitigate the future 
impacts of climate-related  
risks include using resources 
efficiently, ongoing review of 
energy source sustainability, 
product reviews, assessing 
emerging sustainable market 
opportunities and innovation, 
and building resilience into 
our supply chain.

Each business unit or 
functional area of the Group is 
responsible for identifying and 
assessing its risks at least 
quarterly. This process 
identifies the gross risk, the 
likelihood of occurrence, 
mitigating controls in place, 
and the potential impact  
on the Group. The Risk 
Committee formally reviews 
the Divisional/functional  
risk registers to form the 
consolidated view of the 
Group’s principal risks.

If identified, climate-related 
risks and mitigating actions 
are discussed and governed 
by our Preserving the Future 
Steering Committee.

No climate-related risks were 
identified as being material 
through 2021 and therefore 
they do not appear on the 
businesses risk registers. 
Therefore, no material impact 
on the financial statements of 
the business were identified 
due to climate-related risks.

The Company will report 
Scope 1,2,3 emissions in line 
with SECR and GHG protocol.

It will also report against the 
SASB framework that can  
be found in the Governance 
section of our website:  
https://www.trgplc.com/
governance/reports

Please refer to the SECR 
section of the annual report 
on page 18.

The Company is currently 
developing an action plan 
to progress its ambition to 
achieve net zero in 2035.

Our Preserving the Future 
environmental and social 
programme is structured to 
reflect the key areas of focus: 
energy usage reduction and 
carbon reduction in our supply 
chain, alongside associated 
menu changes, and in our 
distribution network. 

The Restaurant Group will 
continue to report progress 
annually.

The Restaurant Group has a 
Risk Committee to cover  
all risks to the business  
which reports to the Audit 
Committee and, through it, 
ultimately to the Board.

The Company recognises the 
need to reduce its impact on 
climate change and has set 
up the Preserving the Future 
programme and Steering 
Committee to ensure we take 
the relevant action to do this 
by setting and tracking 
climate-related targets. 

The Board has overall 
responsibility for risk 
management, while the  
Audit Committee has been 
delegated responsibility for 
the regular review of risk 
management procedures

At least three members of  
the Senior Management team 
are members of the Risk 
Committee. Individual risks will 
be assigned functional owners.

The Risk Committee is 
responsible for: governance 
over the Company’s risk 
management process; 
monitoring, assessing and 
management of individual 
risks; and the aggregation of 
the group risk register. Any 
material climate-related risks 
that are identified will be 
captured on the Group 
Risk Register.

O
v
e
r
v
e
w

i

i

S
t
r
a
t
e
g
c
r
e
p
o
r
t

G
o
v
e
r
n
a
n
c
e

i

F
n
a
n
c
a

i

*  Scope 1 and 2 residual emissions include: FGAS, reconciliation of market-based gas and LPG emissions, any direct energy/gas supplies that are awaiting transfer to our 

national group contract. For example, new site opening where we have inherited an incumbent supplier

**  Our chosen offsetting projects are Verified Carbon Standard (VCS) certified. We have ensured carbon removal rather than just carbon avoidance

l

s
t
a
t
e
m
e
n
t
s

The Restaurant Group plc Annual Report 2021  17

 
 
 
Environmental and Social report continued

Utilities consumption and associated carbon emissions reduction

To continue our journey towards our net zero targets we have taken immediate practical steps to manage our Scope 1 and 
2 footprint.

Scope 1 and 2 makes up 15% of our total 2021 footprint. In October 2021 we completed the move to renewable electricity, gas 
and LPG across our directly contracted supplies which for a full year will be approximately a 90% carbon emissions reduction 
across Scope 1 and 2*. We will be offsetting the remaining 10% with carbon credits from carbon removal reforestation projects  
that we have invested in **.

In addition to the investment in renewable utility sources, we are still committed to reducing Scope 1 and 2 usage by a further 
5% in 2022, which will be achieved through a combination of behavioural change and technology investments. Some of our 
initiatives include:

•  Launching in-restaurant sustainability champions: as an example, our Carbon Crew in Leisure & Concessions are operational 

staff leading on team engagement, building energy reduction knowledge and driving site-level action plans.

•  A variety of technology investments at various stages of concept and trial aimed at reducing our carbon footprint.

•  Feasibility assessments of energy reduction solutions for new site openings: for example, heat recovery units and lower-

footprint cook line options.

•  Water volume reduction: through improved data reporting, exception management, improving processes and managing 

maintenance issues.

We plan to develop an action plan for Scope 3 emissions that focuses primarily on the decarbonisation of our supply chain 
before we look to offset residual emissions in 2035.

Greenhouse gas emissions
As a quoted public company, The Restaurant Group is required under the Streamlined Energy and Carbon Reporting regulations 
to report annually on its greenhouse gas emissions from Scope 1 and 2 Electricity, Gas, LPG and Transport. We are also disclosing 
our Scope 3 footprint for the first time and will report on this moving forward to show our progress to carbon net zero. 

•  Total emissions reported across scope 1, 2 and 3 for both 2020 and 2021 are not representative of a full trading year and are 

therefore not comparable due to the difference in Covid restrictions and disruption to trade across both years.

•  We are reporting on both location and market-based footprints for the first time to illustrate the benefits of renewable 

purchasing. A location-based method involves using an average emission factor that relates to the grid on which energy 
consumption occurs; so it doesn’t take into account any renewable purchasing that exceeds the grid average. A market-
based method reflects emissions from energy that companies have purposefully chosen for example renewable energy.

•  The intensity ratio includes Scope 3 emissions for the first time.

•  Due to the comparability issues above we are only disclosing our 2021 emissions in the table below, however going forward 
we will measure ourselves against this footprint and our intensity ratio which will enable a comparison even when trading 
patterns change.

Scope 1

Scope
Location Based

Scope 2

Scope 3

Market Based

Location Based
Market Based
Location Based

Total

Location Based

Intensity 
Ratio

Description
Combustion of fuel on site 
and transportation

Example Emission Sources
Natural Gas, LPG, Fgas

Purchased Energy

Electricity

Indirect upstream and 
downstream emissions

Purchased Goods and Services, Business 
Travel, Transportation, Capital Purchasing, 
Water, Waste

tCO2e/£1m Turnover

Location Based

tCO2e
18,044

13,635

15,257
5,993
188,105

221,406

347.79

*   Scope 1 and 2 residual emissions include: FGAS, reconciliation of market-based gas and LPG emissions, any direct energy/gas supplies that are awaiting transfer to our 

national group contract. For example, new site opening where we have inherited an incumbent supplier 

* *  Our chosen offsetting projects are Verified Carbon Standard (VCS) certified. We have ensured carbon removal rather than just carbon avoidance

18  The Restaurant Group plc Annual Report 2021

Greenhouse gas reporting methodology
•  Our methodology has been based on the Greenhouse 

Gas Protocol. 

•  We have reported on all the measured emissions sources 
required under The Companies (Directors’ Report) and 
Limited Liability Partnerships (Energy and Carbon 
Report) Regulations. 

•  The period of our report is 30 December 2020 to 

2 January 2022.

•  This includes material emissions under Scope 1, 2 and 3.

•  Conversion factors for UK electricity (location-based 

methodology), gas and other emissions are those published 
by the HM Government, or where available, supplier-specific 
emissions for use in market-based calculations.

•  There are no material known exclusions.

•  Our energy efficiency action is referred to throughout 

the report.

•   A location-based method reflects the average emissions 
intensity of grids on which energy consumption occurs 
(using mostly grid-average emission factor data).

•  A market-based method reflects emissions from energy 
that companies have purposefully chosen, for example 
renewable energy. 

Driving down carbon emissions in our supply chain
We have worked with the Zero Carbon Forum to develop the 
high-level industry roadmap to net zero for Scope 3 and are 
using this as a base to develop our own specific roadmap and 
plan. Their sectoral guidance is a 70% reduction in emissions 
is achievable over the long term with the residual 30% of 
emissions being offset. We now understand our emissions 
hotspots, which are primarily in food and drink purchases 
and through the transportation of our purchased goods. 
During 2022 we will be progressing with our supplier 
engagement and carbon reduction planning which will be 
made up of short, medium and long-term activity to reduce 
carbon intensity and volume, through:

•  Upstream product and process engineering in the 

supply chain.

•  Working with our transport and distribution partners to find 

more efficient solutions.

•  Menu and proposition development.

It should not be under-estimated though that this is a multi-
year programme through to 2035 and that residual emissions 
will need to be offset from 2035.

Reducing our food waste and packaging
We are committed to reducing the volume and footprint 
intensity of our food and packaging waste. As part of our 
Preserving the Future programme we have working groups 
focusing on a range of initiatives underway, for example:

•  Recycling optimisation: through enhanced guidance 

support and analysis, 99% of our waste is diverted from 
landfill and 55% is recycled. This is achieved by segregating 
where possible food, card, commingled dry mixed recycling 
and glass. 99% of our remaining general waste is used to 
create clean energy.

•  Delivery packaging reviews: to reduce both the volume of 

material in new packaging designs and the carbon intensity 
through the use of non-virgin material and material that is 
more effectively recycled and exploring recycling 
opportunities. In 2022 Wagamama will launch a lower 
plastic packaging content range with the ambition of 
reducing plastic material content by at least 30%.

•  Food Waste reduction: working with the Sustainable 

Restaurant Association to identify high wastage ingredients, 
which in turn feeds into trials of new dish design and 
ingredient combinations.

•  Having removed plastic straws from the business in 2020, 
we have further reduced single use plastic by moving to 
wooden cutlery for all our deliveries. Cutlery is now only 
provided when the customers ‘opt in’ on their order.

Sourcing ethical, sustainable and healthy produce

Sustainable and ethical sourcing
We practise responsible sourcing throughout our supply 
chain, ensuring our customers get good-quality, high-welfare 
and sustainable food on their plates. We are a member of the 
Supplier Ethical Data Exchange (Sedex), which facilitates 
measurement and improvement in ethical business practices 
across the supply chain. We require all our suppliers to be 
registered and risk assessed with Sedex. All suppliers must:

•  Meet the requirements of our Responsible Sourcing.

•  Complete a declaration on Responsible Sourcing and 
Modern-Day Slavery as part of their onboarding and 
ongoing review.

•  Be certified to the British Retail Consortium Food Safety 

Global Standard or GFSI equivalent, as a minimum.

We conduct routine supplier visits and audits to ensure our 
suppliers are operating to our high standards. During 2021 we 
have continued to actively reduce the number of bespoke lines 
that we list by over 50% following a simplification of our menus 
across the brands. Following a review of delivery schedules 
and frequency, the number of deliveries to our restaurants has 
also been reduced by 6% on a like-for-like comparable basis, 
which also contributes to a reduction in the total food 
miles travelled.

The Restaurant Group plc Annual Report 2021  19

O
v
e
r
v
e
w

i

i

S
t
r
a
t
e
g
c
r
e
p
o
r
t

G
o
v
e
r
n
a
n
c
e

i

F
n
a
n
c
a

i

l

s
t
a
t
e
m
e
n
t
s

 
 
 
Environmental and Social report continued

As previously reported, we are committed to sourcing 
sustainable fish, which is achieved through:

•  Sourcing Marine Stewardship Council (MSC)-certified fish 

rated 3 or below.

•  For farmed fish and seafood, only sourcing from 

GLOBALG.A.P or BAP 2* or higher certified farms. 

•  Within our Wagamama operation, using tuna that is dolphin 

friendly. 

•  Reviewing the Good Fish Guide every six months when 

it is published and modifying our menus to remove any fish 
classified as ‘avoid’ in terms of purchasing.

We work with our suppliers and farmers (both UK and 
non-UK) to reduce and control unnecessary antibiotic use in 
farm animals. All our beef steaks are from UK or Irish farms 
reared to Red Tractor or Bord Bia welfare standards, the Irish 
equivalent of Red Tractor. 

All supplier farms must have in place policies and standards 
that reflect UK/EU legislation as a minimum, even if they are 
located outside of the EU, and farms must have in place 
policies and standards that reflect the principles of the Five 
Freedoms as adopted by the Farm Animal Welfare Committee 
and detailed below:

•  Freedom from hunger and thirst – access to fresh water 

and a diet for full health and vigour.

•  Freedom from discomfort – an appropriate environment 

with shelter and comfortable rest area.

•  Freedom from pain, injury, and disease – prevention or 

rapid treatment.

•  Freedom to express normal behaviour – adequate space 

and facilities, company of the animal’s own kind.

•  Freedom from fear and distress – conditions and treatment 

which avoid mental suffering.

Since November 2017, all mayonnaise comes from cage-free 
and/or free-range sources and all shell eggs used in our 
restaurants are RSPCA Assured™ free range. Furthermore, 
we are committed to ensuring that eggs used as an ingredient 
in our UK supply chain will be cage-free and/or free-range  
by the end of 2023 at the latest. We are also committed to 
working with our partners to ensure that 100% of our eggs 
(shell, liquid and egg products) will be from cage-free sources 
throughout our global operations for all owned, managed and 
franchised businesses by the end of 2025. In 2020 the Group 
signed the European Better Chicken Commitment supported 
by Compassion in World Farming with the goal to source all 
chicken to this standard by 2026.

We continue to support the Sustainable Restaurant 
Association (SRA) and in 2021 improved our overall 
performance by achieving 3-star ratings in the Food Made 
Good programme (the highest rating) for our Wagamama, 
Brunning and Price, and Leisure and Concession brands. 
This is a significant progression on our 2019 ratings where we 
achieved a 3 rating for our Pubs division, 2 for our Leisure and 
Concessions Division and 1 star for Wagamama. Food Made 
Good is the most globally recognised industry standard for 
measuring the hospitality sector. https://thesra.org/our-work/. 
The programme provides the industry with a practical means 
of understanding, reviewing and acting on key issues. 
The assessment areas focus on sourcing, society and the 
environment, reflecting the importance of sourcing and 
serving food well. 

Nutrition and Health
We are committed to offering a healthy choice for our 
customers. The nutritional balance of menus is incorporated 
into the menu design process, and we have successfully 
increased the number of lower-calorie, lower-salt and lower-
sugar options available year on year. Our brand standards are 
being further developed to ensure that all additives used are in 
line with industry best practice and we continue to expand our 
vegan/plant-based menus and support the Veganuary 
campaign run by the Vegan Society.

Wagamama launched its first vegan menu in 2017 and has 
continually innovated its plant-based offering. This remains a 
huge focus for Wagamama, and in October 2021 we achieved 
a 50% plant-based menu.

As in previous years, there continue to be no genetically 
modified foods or trans fats in any of our products, and 
we have banned artificial colours that cause hyperactivity 
in children from all our products served to children. 

Salt
We have reduced the amount of salt in our bespoke products 
purchased directly from suppliers in line with the Department 
of Health Responsibility Deal for 2017. 95% of all products 
purchased adhere to 2017 salt targets. We have now begun 
work to ensure our bespoke products meet the new 2024 
salt targets.

Palm Oil
Where palm oil is used in our products, it is RSPO certified. 
We have embarked on a palm oil removal programme within 
Wagamama and are committed to be palm-free by 2026. 
We continue to find and implement ways of reducing palm 
oil across our other brands

Soy
Where soy is used, we ask our suppliers to ensure that all our 
soy has been responsibly sourced under the RTRS Standard 
for Responsible Soy Production or equivalent and are 
committed to fully sustainable soy in the food and feed  
supply chain across all our brands by the end of 2026.

20  The Restaurant Group plc Annual Report 2021

Allergens
Our pubs and our Frankie & Benny’s and Chiquito restaurants 
offer a Coeliac UK-accredited gluten-free menu to cater for 
those with Coeliac Disease.

The menus offer a range of classic dishes including gluten-
free burgers, pastas, pizzas, and fish and chips

Wagamama’s approach to food is centred on mindful eating 
and providing more plant-based and non-gluten options to 
their guests. Wagamama has a gluten-free menu and has 
innovated to provide more gluten-free choices. There are 
plans to further innovate and achieve gluten-free accreditation 
for our non-gluten menu in 2023.

Across the Group, our allergen information is available in 
restaurants, pubs and online on our brand websites, allowing 
guests to view dishes that are suitable based on individual 
allergies and intolerances. We also categorise the 14 allergens 
as detailed in legislation.

Initiatives to reduce the allergen risk profile in our food dishes 
have continued, with further allergy removal across ingredients 
and menu. For example, in Leisure & Concessions we have 
removed celery from Napolitana sauce, and eggs from chicken 
bites, while in Wagamama we have removed nuts and peanuts 
from the main dish menu (with them only remaining in desserts). 
A wider range of our dishes are now entirely allergy free.

Serving alcohol responsibly
We operate Challenge 25 in Scotland and Challenge 21 in 
England, Wales and Northern Ireland. We continue to support 
Drinkaware, whose campaign promotes responsible drinking. 
We offer a wide range of alcohol-free beers, low-alcohol wine, 
mocktails, soft drinks, juices and milkshakes.

Food safety
The health and safety of our customers and employees is 
of paramount importance to us. The Group has extensive 
procedures to ensure we mitigate risks to our guests and 
teams as far as possible. We have clear procedures and 
standards in place, and to enforce these, we carried out 
a programme of safety audits to monitor our compliance. 

Additionally, we continued to incorporate Covid-secure ways 
of working throughout our businesses, which were put in 
place in 2020 and have continued to be developed in line with 
Government legislation and guidance over the last two years.

At year-end 2021, over 99% of our restaurants and pubs 
scored 4 stars or above (including pass ratings in Scotland) 
where rated under the Food Hygiene Rating Scheme, a sign 
of excellence in both food safety and hygiene, with 94% at  
5 stars (or a pass rating in Scotland). We continue to invest 
significant time and resources in health and safety matters 
across the Group, to further enhance the clean, safe 
environment for our customers and colleagues.

Supporting our colleagues and the community

Our people
We believe that a great customer experience is key to our 
business success and therefore our most important asset is 
our people. As of December 2021 we employed in excess of 
16,000 people. Our teams are passionate about the food and 
drink they serve and support each other to ensure the best 
customer service in all of our restaurants and pubs, taking 
huge pride in their work. We truly embrace diversity and 
employ colleagues from more than 60 nationalities.

In 2021, we continued to focus on supporting our colleagues 
and ensuring our communication was consistent and 
supportive to help them through a very difficult time due to the 
impact of the Covid-19 pandemic on our team’s employment. 
All Divisions amplified this communication via team-focused 
apps, offering our colleagues both personal and professional 
development programmes.

Our employment commitments
The Restaurant Group is committed to being a fair and 
inclusive employer. Employment with the Group offers 
everyone equal rights and career development and promotion 
prospects, regardless of age, race, gender, sexual orientation, 
disability or religion. We ensure as far as possible that the 
diversity of our teams reflects the diversity of the customers 
we serve. We continue our commitment to improve our 
Equality, Diversity and Inclusion (EDI) with focus on a number 
of key areas, including introducing and building development 
programmes for our management/leadership teams in 
anti-racism and gender identity. In Wagamama this extended 
to all of the leadership teams within their restaurants, which 
incorporates circa 600 leaders. 

Within each Division we have a built teams of EDI 
ambassadors chosen from our colleague base. Their 
knowledge is integral to the development of our future  
EDI programme, and we will continue to build upon the 
foundations with our ambassadors. 

Wagamama have gathered and assessed the ethnicity data 
for 89% of their team, and intend to publish the ethnicity pay 
gap in 2022. 

We will continue to work with our EDI Ambassadors to build 
mentoring and reverse mentoring schemes. In our support 
centre and throughout the Leisure and Concessions Division 
we have launched a calendar of activity to celebrate our 
team’s diversity with an aim to increase representation from 
those communities that are currently under-represented. 

We are currently trialling an ethnic minority focused 
management apprenticeship scheme to improve career 
progression. 

The Restaurant Group plc Annual Report 2021  21

O
v
e
r
v
e
w

i

i

S
t
r
a
t
e
g
c
r
e
p
o
r
t

G
o
v
e
r
n
a
n
c
e

i

F
n
a
n
c
a

i

l

s
t
a
t
e
m
e
n
t
s

 
 
 
Environmental and Social report continued

TRG will continue to ensure all of our employees understand 
they have a voice and will be heard, not only in shaping our 
people programmes, but also in the event of any serious 
occurrences of unethical behaviour, discrimination, harassment 
or health and safety concerns. We have Safe Sanctuary 
schemes across our Group which are embedded through  
our induction, development and cultural programmes. 

Details relating to the gender diversity of our employees are 
contained in the Corporate Governance report on page 27. 

We are committed to paying our colleagues fairly and 
equitably for the roles they are doing. In 2021, we carried out 
our annual Equity Pay Audit. The audit shows that we have a 
high level of consistency in pay, with men and women being 
paid fairly and equitably remunerated when performing the 
same role. Our audit also showed that men tend to dominate 
the higher-paid roles, driving our gender pay gap.

The Group pays all of its colleagues at least the National 
Minimum Wage (or for the over 23s the National Living Wage) 
appropriate to their age. Tips are not included in this rate, and 
all gratuities are additional to their hourly rate and are paid 
directly to colleagues. Cash tips are self-declared, and only 
tips paid by credit card have tax deducted by the Company. 
In addition, no administration fee is charged by the Company.

If a colleague makes us aware of any disability, or becomes 
disabled during their employment with us, then our policy 
is to offer assistance and explore ways of overcoming any 
difficulties they may have at work and make the necessary 
adjustments to help them wherever possible.

Our commitment to equality and human rights is discussed 
in the induction for all colleagues and covered in our online 
policies and employee handbook, which are available and 
accessible to all. Our policies include an Equality and Diversity 
Policy, a Family Friendly Policy, Whistleblowing Policy, and a 
Harassment and Bullying Policy. The various management 
skills courses offered cover the responsibilities of the 
management team in upholding these policies to ensure 
a safe and respectful working environment.

Anti-bribery and corruption
It is our policy to conduct all our business in an honest and 
ethical manner. We take a zero-tolerance approach to bribery 
and corruption and are committed to acting professionally, 
fairly and with integrity in all our business dealings and 
relationships. All colleagues must declare all hospitality or 
gifts given or received over a certain minimum value, and  
all expense claims relating to hospitality, gifts or payments  
to third parties must be submitted in accordance with  
our expenses policy, and the reason recorded for that 
expenditure. Anyone offered, or asked to make, a bribe 
or who suspects any bribery or corruption has occurred 
is obliged to notify the Company Secretary without delay. 
So far as we are aware, there were no incidences of bribery 
or corruption during 2021.

Colleague support
In 2021, we focused on supporting our colleagues who were 
on prolonged furlough with their physical and mental wellbeing. 
We focused on providing honest, supportive and consistent 
communication to all colleagues. We continued to enhance our 
app-based communication and engagement tools, ensuring all 
colleagues were able to receive and share both personal and 
Company updates, and we saw very high levels of usage 
across our teams. Health and wellness was our core focus, 
ensuring we nurture our colleagues and give them the support 
they need, particularly in areas of physical, financial and mental 
health. These platforms are also utilised to promote internal and 
external activities, run competitions, and drive positive 
engagement across our colleague community. 

We enhanced our employee assistance provision to ensure 
the information was accessible via an app 24/7 and that, 
wherever requested, face-to-face counselling was delivered. 
Mental health training was delivered to our leaders in our 
support centre, restaurants and pubs.

To increase retention levels and improve colleague satisfaction, 
additional benefits and rewards programmes were introduced. 
Following feedback from our colleagues, we extended our 
30% food and drink discounts for all colleagues across all TRG 
Divisions, and now offer 50% friends and family discounts, and 
an additional allowance for shift meals. Across each Division, 
bespoke reward and recognition initiatives have been 
appreciated and our colleagues have been fully engaged.

We launched another Save As You Earn share option scheme 
in 2021, which all colleagues with more than one month’s 
employment were invited to join. They can purchase TRG shares 
at a discounted price after saving each month for three years.

Our team and customer safety
During 2021, safety continued to be high on our agenda and 
we ensured our colleagues were fully trained and supported 
on Covid-19 regulations, general legislation and Group safety 
policies. This was audited throughout 2021 to ensure we 
continued to support and protect our colleagues. We completed 
colleague surveys across the Group and our colleagues 
overwhelmingly confirmed their confidence in the TRG focus 
on safety and protection of our colleagues and customers.

Reporting of injuries at work
In 2021, the Group reported 48 accidents under the Reporting 
of Injuries, Diseases and Dangerous Occurrences Regulations 
2013, with no deaths or dangerous occurrences. This 
compares to 35 in 2020 and 132 in 2019 for the Group.

Building our team
The recruitment market for the hospitality sector was 
significantly affected post-Brexit and the Covid-19 pandemic. 
During Covid many hospitality workers changed careers or 
left the country, with the pool of potential candidates severely 
diminished. Across our sector, many businesses were unable 
to fully trade due to the lack of team members, particularly 
kitchen staff and chefs throughout 2021. 

22  The Restaurant Group plc Annual Report 2021

We have continued to drive recruitment through our online 
platforms and channels, investing further in adverts and paid 
search terms, and we have run open days to reach more 
candidates and grown our talent acquisition teams. We saw 
our colleague numbers grow between July and December 
and have continued to invest in a number of chef-led 
apprenticeship programmes to build our teams.

Our team development
In 2021 we further aligned and enhanced our learning and 
development by implementing a Group-wide online platform. 
We continued to focus on our on-the-job learning to  
help support the development of our colleagues. We 
complemented this with e-learning, increased face-to-face 
delivery, and virtual learning, all delivered by our dedicated 
brand and Group learning and development teams. 

All new managers in our restaurants are enrolled on the 
manager in training and leadership programmes. This gives 
a structured pathway to be successful leaders with us. The 
programme covers all aspects of operational management, 
focusing heavily on leadership skills, all being underpinned 
with our culture, behaviours and values of the Group.

Development of our internal talent continues to be high on 
our agenda through multiple development programmes. 
We enhanced our colleague induction programme, ensuring 
everyone across the Group completes role-specific e-learning 
modules and face-to-face courses, not only to meet legislative 
requirements but also to enhance their development and 
career path opportunities.

Apprenticeship programmes and investing in our employees’ 
development are at the very heart of our learning programmes. 
In 2021 we aligned our own internal development programmes 
with our apprenticeship programme, providing a flexible and 
personalised approach to development and progression 
across the Group. We offer a suite of apprenticeships across 
all roles, ensuring that from entry level through to Director 
level, we are supporting progression, with kitchen team 
development our main priority. With a higher proportion of 
younger people joining hospitality, (post Covid circa 30% of 
our new team are 17-21 year olds) our entry-level programmes 
are critical so that our employees can continue their education 
with TRG. We work alongside various external companies 
who support young people with the transition into employment. 
Our wide range of apprenticeships run from level 1 through to 
level 7. 

During the lockdown period in 2021 we were able to support 
our employees on furlough with increased apprenticeship 
support. This enabled us to underpin our commitment to our 
employees, with the success of this continuing through the 
second half of 2021. We continue to evolve our apprenticeship 
programme to align with the needs of our employees, offering 
bespoke schemes for those looking to progress in hospitality 
but also for those who wish to learn a skill independent of their 
role or career path, i.e. HR qualification (CIPD) for a general 
manager whose future aim is to join the learning & 
development team. 

In 2021 our apprenticeship programme provided practical 
skills, experience and qualifications for over 240 apprentices 
across front of house, back of house, management and 
commercial roles, and we are aiming to double the number of 
apprenticeships to over 500 apprentices in total in 2022. This 
will equip our graduates from the apprenticeship programme 
with qualifications ranging from those equivalent to 5 GCSEs 
right up to degree level equivalent. This will not only enable our 
employees to gain an external qualification but also assist TRG 
with retention and internal development aims. 

Our communities
Through a combination of colleague-led fundraising, Company-
matched programmes, and contributions from our retail 
product range, we are aiming to raise up to £500,000 in 2022.

We continue to support our colleagues with their fundraising 
efforts and community activities. We partner with a number 
of charities across the Group which focus on advising, 
supporting and empowering individuals’ mental health. 

TRG supports Only A Pavement Away, a charity committed to 
supporting homeless ex-offenders and our veterans who are 
struggling to get into work or find housing. It works closely 
with other charities such as Crisis and Help For Heroes.  
We are committed to support by offering jobs and careers, 
and also supporting its Life Skills Hub programme. 

Wagamama continue their partnership with Young Minds, 
dedicated to supporting young people’s mental health. 

Leisure and Concessions introduced Mind as their charity 
partner, which was chosen by our colleagues. Mind offers 
online and face-to-face mental health support and education. 
A year-long programme of activities has been introduced 
which each restaurant will support, with any amounts raised 
being matched by TRG. In addition, the partnership with 
Pennies continues to flourish, with our Leisure businesses 
raising more than £50,000 per year. 

Rather than a Divisional approach, our Pubs teams focus 
on activities and fundraising with local, community-based 
charities. The Pubs Division have also partnered with the 
Burnt Chef Project, who offer leadership awareness and 
support with mental health training.

In addition to our Divisional-led charity support, a number 
of pubs and restaurants also supported local community 
charities across a number of causes including suicide 
prevention, children’s cancer, youth housing and meals 
for the homeless to mention a few.

O
v
e
r
v
e
w

i

i

S
t
r
a
t
e
g
c
r
e
p
o
r
t

G
o
v
e
r
n
a
n
c
e

i

F
n
a
n
c
a

i

l

s
t
a
t
e
m
e
n
t
s

The Restaurant Group plc Annual Report 2021  23

 
 
 
Corporate Governance report

Ken Hanna
Chairman

Chairman’s introduction
Maintaining high standards of governance is critical to the delivery of the Company’s 
strategy and its long-term success. This was especially the case in 2021, when the 
continuing impact of the Covid-19 pandemic meant another year of disruption for  
the Company, the hospitality sector, and the wider economy in general. In these 
circumstances, the Board continued to prioritise the health and safety of our guests 
and colleagues, whilst taking decisive steps to protect the long-term success of the 
business, including implementing the long-term refinancing of the Group’s debt and 
a capital raising to strengthen our liquidity. Further information on the key decisions 
taken by the Board can be found in the section 172 statement on page 14.

The principal corporate governance rules applying to the Company are contained  
in the Financial Reporting Council’s (FRC) UK Corporate Governance Code 2018 
and the UK Financial Conduct Authority (FCA) Listing Rules. Within the Company’s 
governance framework, it is the Board’s role to provide effective leadership in 
promoting the long-term success of the Company. It sets the Group’s strategy, 
identifies and mitigates the risks in delivering the strategy (such as the Covid-19 
pandemic), approves the funding and major capital allocations of the Group, and 
provides independent oversight of the Company’s performance. To support the 
Group’s strategy, the Board seeks to ensure that good governance standards are 
embedded throughout the organisation.

The Non-Executive Directors (NEDs) play an important role in exercising independent 
judgement to shape and agree the strategy and the relevant priorities with the 
Executive Directors. They bring constructive challenge to the Executive and the 
Senior Management team at Board and Committee meetings, while providing 
support and guidance to promote effective decision-making. The delivery of the 
Group’s strategy and day-to-day running of the business are delegated to the Chief 
Executive Officer, and specific responsibilities of oversight are passed to various 
Board Committees.

2022 will be my first year as Chairman, and I see my role as ensuring that the 
Board and its Committees practise good corporate governance, focus on the key 
issues of strategy, performance, value creation and accountability, and that the 
Board continues to set its clear expectations concerning the Company’s values 
and standards. I intend to continue my predecessor’s good work in providing clear 
and cohesive leadership of the Board, promoting a culture of mutual respect and 
openness, and fostering a productive relationship with the Executive Directors, 
as well as ensuring effective communication with all of our stakeholders.

Ken Hanna
Chairman

15 March 2022 

24  The Restaurant Group plc Annual Report 2021

The Board
Details of the Chairman, Senior Independent Director and 
other members of the Board, Audit Committee, Nomination 
Committee and Remuneration Committee are set out in this 
Annual Report in the biographies of the Directors. There have 
been a number of Board changes throughout the year, which 
are detailed below.

Alex Gersh was appointed as a Non-Executive Director on 
23 February 2021. Alex also became a member of the Audit 
and Nomination Committees and was identified as a potential 
successor to the Chairman of the Audit Committee, in light of 
his strong listed finance experience.

On 8 June 2021, it was announced that, after more than  
six years with the Company, Debbie Hewitt MBE, the then 
Chairman, would be stepping down from the Board with effect 
from 31 December 2021. On 1 December, Ken Hanna joined 
the Company as a Non-Executive Director and took on  
the role of Chairman from 1 January 2022. Ken is a highly 
experienced Chair and brings a wealth of relevant business 
experience from both his executive and non-executive 
careers. His executive career has included the roles of CFO  
of Avis Europe plc, CFO of United Distillers plc, CFO of Sygen 
International plc, CFO and CEO of Dalgety plc and CFO of 
Cadbury plc. Since embarking on a non-executive career, 
Ken’s roles have included Non-Executive Director of Tesco 
plc, and Chairman of Inchcape plc, Shooting Star Chase, 
Aggreko plc, RMD Kwikform and Arena Events Group plc.

Statement of compliance with the UK 
Corporate Governance Code
The Company is required to measure itself against the UK 
Corporate Governance Code 2018 (the ‘Code’), which is 
available on the Financial Reporting Council website  
(www.frc.org.uk).

Throughout 2021, the Company complied with the principles 
set out in the Code with the exception that the Audit 
Committee temporarily comprised two independent Non-
Executive Directors instead of three as required by the Code, 
until 23 February 2021 when Alex Gersh joined the Committee 
thus ensuring full compliance with the Code requirement. 

In addition, although the Code requires that the annual Board 
and Committee evaluation should be externally facilitated at 
least every three years, in light of the Covid-19 crisis and the 
change of Board Chairman at the end of 2021, it was felt more 
appropriate to carry out the annual Board evaluation as an 
internal exercise this year. Details of the Board and Committee 
evaluation can be found on page 29 of this report. It is the 
Board’s intention to appoint an external evaluator for the 2022 
exercise, in compliance with the Code.

Further explanations of how the Main Principles of the Code 
have been applied are set out below and also in the Audit 
Committee report and Directors’ remuneration report.

Leadership
Role of the Board
The Board’s role is to review, challenge and approve the 
strategic direction of the Group as well as the business 
operating model that delivers on the strategic priorities. 
It looks to ensure that the necessary financial and human 
resources are in place to achieve these priorities, to sustain 
them over the long term and to review Management’s 
performance in their delivery.

Its role is also to provide strong values-based leadership of the 
Company. The Board sets the tone of the Company’s ethical 
standards and manages the business in a manner to meet its 
obligations to all stakeholders.

During 2021, the Board invested time first in trying to manage 
the impact of the Government lockdown and then in preparing 
the Group for revitalised strategic progress as the economy 
reopened. Decisive actions were taken in response to the 
pandemic including a long-term refinancing of the Group’s 
debt and a capital raising to strengthen our liquidity. Following 
the lifting of the lockdown restrictions, considerable efforts 
were made to secure reliable and timely product supplies to 
our restaurants and pubs and to put in place enhanced 
arrangements to ensure guest and colleague safety, while 
continuing to optimise off-trade channels such as delivery 
and take-away.

O
v
e
r
v
e
w

i

S

i

t
r
a
t
e
g
c
r
e
p
o
r
t

G
o
v
e
r
n
a
n
c
e

i

F
n
a
n
c
a

i

l

s
t
a
t
e
m
e
n
t
s

The Restaurant Group plc Annual Report 2021  25

 
 
 
Corporate Governance report continued

The Directors who held office during 2021 were as follows:

Director
Debbie Hewitt

Role
Chairman

Andy Hornby
Kirk Davis
Graham Clemett

Alison Digges
Zoe Morgan

Alex Gersh
Ken Hanna

Chief Executive Officer 
Chief Financial Officer
Non-Executive Director and Chairman  
of Audit Committee. Senior Independent 
Director (from November 2020)
Non-Executive Director 
Non-Executive Director. Chairman of 
Remuneration Committee (from April 2020)
Non-Executive Director
Non-Executive Director

Details
Appointed Non-Executive Director from 
May 2015 and Chairman from May 2016 
Resigned December 2021
Appointed August 2019
Appointed February 2018
Appointed June 2016

Appointed January 2020
Appointed January 2020

Appointed February 2021
Appointed December 2021  
Appointed Chairman from January 2022

The Board considers each of the current Non-Executive Directors to be independent, including the Chairman of the Board on 
appointment, as set out in the Code. Each Director demonstrates the skills and experience the Board requires for the success 
of the Group. Biographies of the current Directors are set out on pages 32 and 33.

Division of responsibilities
Andy Hornby, Chief Executive Officer, together with the Senior 
Management team, is responsible for the day-to-day running 
of the Group and provides regular reports on performance 
to the Board.

Ken Hanna, Chairman, leads the Board to challenge and 
support the Executives in shaping, agreeing and executing 
the strategy.

Non-Executive Directors maintain an ongoing dialogue with  
the Chairman and Executive Directors, creating constructive 
challenge to the Group’s strategy and day-to-day performance.

The Non-Executive Directors are provided with insightful and 
appropriate information to allow them to monitor, assess and 
challenge the Executive Management of the Group.

The Chairman, Chief Executive Officer and Chief Financial 
Officer meet regularly with shareholders. The Senior 
Independent Director is available to liaise with any 
shareholders who have concerns that they feel have not been 
addressed through the usual channels of the Chairman, Chief 
Executive Officer and Chief Financial Officer.

The Board has a formal schedule of matters specifically 
reserved for its consideration, which includes items such as: 
the approval of the annual budget and business plan; approval 
of the Group’s interim and year-end reports; review and 
approval of significant capital expenditure; significant 
disposals of assets; and acquisitions and disposals of 
businesses. Any matter not formally reserved to the Board 
is generally delegated to Management, unless it has some 
unusual or significant feature which makes it appropriate for 
it to be considered by the Board.

Meetings and attendance
A summary of the Directors’ attendance at meetings of the Board and its Committees that they were eligible to attend during 
2021 is shown below. Unless otherwise indicated, all Directors held office throughout the year:

Debbie Hewitt
Andy Hornby
Kirk Davis
Graham Clemett
Alison Digges
Zoe Morgan
Alex Gersh1
Ken Hanna2

Committee appointments
Nom/Rem
n/a
n/a
Audit/Nom/Rem
Audit/Nom/Rem
Nom/Rem
Audit/Nom
Nom/Rem

Board
13/13
13/13
13/13
13/13
13/13
13/13
10/11
1/1

Audit 
Committee
n/a
n/a
n/a
4/4
4/4
n/a
4/4
n/a

Nomination 
Committee
7/7
n/a
n/a
7/7
7/7
7/7
6/6
–

Remuneration 
Committee
8/8
n/a
n/a
8/8
8/8
8/8
n/a
1/1

1  Alex Gersh was appointed as Non-Executive Director and a member of the Audit and Nomination Committees on 23 February 2021
2  Ken Hanna was appointed as Non-Executive Director and a member of the Nomination and Remuneration Committees on 1 December 2021

26  The Restaurant Group plc Annual Report 2021

Comprehensive electronic papers are provided to the 
Directors prior to Board meetings and to Committee members 
prior to Board Committee meetings, and financial information 
packs are provided on a monthly basis. The Non-Executive 
Directors have the opportunity to meet without the Executive 
Directors to examine, among other matters, the targets set 
and the performance achieved by Management.

Independent advice
All Directors have access to the advice and services of the 
Company Secretary and in the furtherance of their duties are 
entitled to take independent professional advice if necessary, 
at the expense of the Company.

Conflicts of interest and independence
The Board reviews potential conflicts of interest and 
independence where necessary at each meeting. Directors 
have continuing obligations to update the Board on any 
changes to these conflicts or matters which may impinge 
upon their independence. No potential conflicts were  
identified during the year.

Directors’ and Officers’ liability (‘D&O’) insurance
The Company maintains D&O insurance to cover the cost of 
defending civil and criminal proceedings brought against an 
individual acting in their capacity as a Director or Officer of the 
Company (including those who served as Directors or Officers 
during 2021).

Effectiveness
Board composition and diversity
As required by the Code, at least 50% of the Board, excluding 
the Chairman, are independent Non-Executive Directors.  
As at 2 January 2022, the Board comprised the Non-
Executive Chairman, two Executive Directors and four 
independent Non-Executive Directors. The Board considers 
that all the Non-Executive Directors, including the Chairman 
on appointment, are independent.

It is the Board’s policy that appointments to the Board will 
always be based solely on merit without any discrimination 
relating to age, gender or any other matter that has no  
bearing on an individual’s ability to fulfil the role of Director. 
Notwithstanding this policy, the Board is mindful of the aims 
of the Hampton-Alexander Review. The principle of Board 
diversity is strongly supported by the Board, recognising that 
diversity of thought, approach and experience is an important 
consideration as part of the selection criteria used to assess 
candidates to achieve a balanced Board.

The Company is a member of WiHTL Diversity in Hospitality 
Travel & Leisure, a community of businesses devoted to 
increasing diversity and inclusion across Hospitality, Travel 
and Leisure, and our Chairman in 2021, Debbie Hewitt, was 
a member of its advisory board.

Further details on the Board’s and the Group’s policy on 
diversity are contained in the Nomination Committee report 
on page 40 and the Environmental and Social report on 
pages 21 and 22.

The table below sets out the position of the Group on 
a gender basis as at 2 January 2022:

Main Board
Divisional Heads
Direct Reports to  
Executive Directors
TRG Employees at 2 January 2022

Male
5 (71%)
2 (67%)

Female
2 (29%)
1 (33%)

7 (88%)

1 (12%)
8,150 (50%) 8,058 (50%)

At the start of 2021, the Board comprised three males (50%) 
and three females (50%). Following the appointment of 
Alex Gersh on 23 February 2021, the Board comprised four 
males (57%) and three females (43%). As at 2 January 2022, 
following the appointment of Ken Hanna and the resignation of 
Debbie Hewitt, the Board comprised five males (71%) and two 
females (29%). It is the intention of the Board to ensure it is in 
compliance with the Hampton-Alexander recommendations 
during 2022.

The Board is also mindful of the aims of the Parker Review, an 
independent review body dedicated to improving the ethnic 
and cultural diversity of UK boards to better reflect their 
employee base and the communities they serve. The business 
currently has no Director from an ethnic minority background 
either on the Board or among its Divisional Heads. The Board 
will develop a pipeline of candidates and mentoring schemes, 
working towards compliance with the Parker Review 
recommendations.

The Board considers that each Director is able to allocate 
sufficient time to the Company to discharge his or her 
responsibilities effectively.

Colleague engagement
Our aim is to create great places to work that attract and 
retain the best industry talent and we believe that wider 
colleague engagement is an essential part of this. In 2019, 
the Board agreed its approach to wider colleague 
engagement and decided to work with a designated Non-
Executive Director to provide colleagues across all brands 
the opportunity to engage directly with a representative from 
the Board on all matters relating to colleague engagement. 
Zoe Morgan is currently the designated Non-Executive 
Director responsible for colleague engagement and  
diversity & inclusion (D&I) and in 2020 set up the Colleague 
Engagement Steering Group to steer the implementation of 
colleague engagement across all our Divisions. The Steering 
Group comprises the Directors/Heads of People from 
Wagamama, Pubs, and Leisure and Concessions, and is 
chaired by Zoe Morgan. The Steering Group meets three 
times per year to openly discuss opportunities, successes, 
and future engagement strategies to support cross-functional 
working and best practice.

The Restaurant Group plc Annual Report 2021  27

O
v
e
r
v
e
w

i

S

i

t
r
a
t
e
g
c
r
e
p
o
r
t

G
o
v
e
r
n
a
n
c
e

i

F
n
a
n
c
a

i

l

s
t
a
t
e
m
e
n
t
s

 
 
 
Corporate Governance report continued

The key activity of the Steering Group in 2021 was to 
prepare, oversee and report on a comprehensive colleague 
engagement survey across the entire Group. The survey 
consisted of a core of identical questions common to each 
Division plus additional questions for each brand, depending 
on its focus and individual engagement strategies. The survey 
produced useful insights into the views of our colleagues, and 
the findings have been reviewed by the Board and will be 
acted upon. All people leaders found the ability to discuss the 
insights and comparison across the brands useful and agreed 
to hold a further full survey in June 2022. This will allow for an 
in-depth comparison against the results. The key activities for 
the Steering Group in 2022 will be:

•  overseeing a Group diversity & inclusion review and 

evaluation;

•  supervising the implementation of a further all-colleague 

survey planned for June 2022; and

•  ensuring that the Board understands and takes into account 

the views of colleagues across the Group and that the 
findings and action plans are communicated effectively.

Throughout 2021, we reviewed our colleague value 
proposition as we started trading again post-lockdown to 
ensure that we are attracting and retaining top talent. We 
continued improving our colleague communications through 
tools such as ‘Woks App’ and ‘The Sauce’, which are 
specifically aimed at driving more effective engagement and 
which ensure our teams are informed of relevant news for their 
brand and across the Group. 

Environment and Sustainability
The Board acknowledges its responsibility to minimise the 
Company’s impact on the environment and supports and 
promotes efforts to reduce the Company’s energy consumption 
and carbon emissions, water usage and waste. Details of our 
environmental policies and practices, and our commitment to 
sustainable and ethical sourcing are contained in the 
Environmental and Social report on pages 16 to 20. 

We also provide disclosure of our current position in respect 
to the reporting framework of the Taskforce for Climate-related 
Financial Disclosures (TCFD). This framework contains 
guidance for disclosures on the four core pillars of Governance, 
Strategy, Risk Management, and Metrics & Targets, and we 
align with the key recommendations related to:

•  Executive-level accountability and reporting;

•  Climate-related risk assessment and management;

•  Environmental performance metrics.

Annual re-election
In accordance with the Code, Alex Gersh and Ken Hanna are 
subject to election by shareholders at the Annual General 
Meeting (AGM) in May 2022. All other Directors are subject to 
re-election annually. Details setting out why each Director is 
deemed to be suitable for re-election will be included with the 
AGM papers circulated to shareholders.

Board Committees
The Board is supported by three Committees: Audit, 
Nomination and Remuneration. The terms of reference of 
these Committees are available at http://www.trgplc.com/ 
investors/corporate-governance. Full reports for each of the 
Committees are set out on pages 34 to 54.

Director induction
Alex Gersh and Ken Hanna, who joined the Board during 
2021, were provided with a comprehensive induction on 
appointment, including:

•  briefings by the Executive Directors;

•  meetings with the MDs of each Division;

•  induction from the Company Secretary on Group structure, 
corporate governance, Board and Committee meetings and 
Directors’ duties;

•  meetings with various senior managers and operational 

heads;

•  visits to the Group’s operations including various restaurants 

and pubs to witness the operations first-hand; and

•  where appropriate, meetings with shareholders and 

Company advisers.

Each Director’s induction is tailored to their experience and 
background with the aim of enhancing their understanding 
of the Group’s business, its brands, employees, shareholders, 
suppliers, advisers and processes, and the Board’s role in 
setting the tone of the culture and governance standards.

Director training and development
The Company acknowledges the importance of developing 
the skills of Directors to run an effective Board. To assist in 
this, Directors are given the opportunity to attend relevant 
courses and seminars to acquire additional skills and 
experience to enhance their contribution to the ongoing 
progress of the Group. Presentations by external advisers 
are also given at Board meetings on specific regulatory and 
governance topics. In 2021, presentations were given on:

•  Directors’ duties – covering, in particular, Directors’ interests 

and their Directors’ duties under the Companies Act, 
including those set out in sections 171-177 of the Act; 

•  Debt refinancing options and structures; and

•  Covid-19 safety precautions and the AGM.

28  The Restaurant Group plc Annual Report 2021

Board effectiveness review
The Board and Committee evaluation in December 2020 
identified the following key areas for improvement: more 
insight to the competitive context of each business; more 
frequent management information (especially cash flow); 
better engagement with employees and understanding of the 
culture; ESG to come higher up the agenda; a more granular 
understanding of risk management; and the addition of an 
experienced NED in Q1 2021. From a process point of view, 
there was a strong desire to return to face-to-face meetings 
when possible and to clarify Company Secretarial 
responsibilities going forward.

In 2021, although Covid continued to impact the operating 
priorities for the business, good progress was made across 
these areas, specifically:

•  Board processes were improved with a return to face-to-

face meetings in the second half of the year and clarification 
of the division of responsibilities within the Company 
Secretariat team;

•  strategic planning was included in all Divisional strategic 

reviews;

•  the Board was strengthened by the appointment of Alex 
Gersh as a Non-Executive Director on 23 February 2021;

•  employee/Board engagement was hampered by the various 

Covid-related lockdowns and restrictions, however the 
implementation of the colleague engagement survey across 
all our Divisions helped the Board’s understanding of the 
culture and colleague sentiment throughout the Group; and

•  monthly management accounts, including cash flow, were 

circulated to all Directors.

A new Board and Committee evaluation was conducted 
in December 2021. All Executive Directors, Non-Executive 
Directors and the Company Secretary participated. Input was 
provided through a questionnaire consisting of 43 questions, 
covering the areas of Board Process, Business Strategy, Skills 
and Influence, Governance and Stakeholder Management, 
and a separate section on the Board’s response to the 
Covid-19 pandemic. There were also questions on the 
effectiveness of each Board Committee and a separate 
section on the Chairman. There was a range of strongly agree, 
agree, disagree and strongly disagree responses to a series 
of statements, with space to add qualitative comments and 
examples. There was a 100% completion rate. The review 
was performed internally and the results discussed at a Board 
meeting, with a separate feedback session by the Senior 
Independent Director to the Chairman.

As a result, this year’s evaluation highlighted the following:

•  generally a positive evaluation of the Board, which was 

seen as open, transparent and non-political. It was noted 
that 2021 was another challenging year with complexities 
of reopening post-lockdown, capital raising, debt 
refinancing, operational challenges, economic headwinds 
and Board change;

•  it was felt face-to-face Board meetings were most effective 
and that Committee meetings might benefit from longer 
scheduling;

•  good progress had been made on strategy/market reviews 

for each brand;

•  key areas for improvement were Board admin support, 
more scenario planning with improved focus on the 
competitive context, the need to bring ESG up the Board 
agenda, the need to review Executive and Senior 
Management succession and consider the recruitment of 
an additional NED with hospitality experience; and 

•  the Board Committees largely worked well. It was felt that 

the Audit Committee needed to implement a more 
structured review of risk, the Remuneration Committee 
needed to review incentives below direct reports of the 
Executives, and the Nomination Committee should review 
Executive succession. 

As a result the Board agreed the following actions:

Board Process
Resolve Company Secretarial resourcing and circulate 
monthly finance packs.

Strategy
Improved insight to the competitive context and Divisional 
strategic reviews to include scenario planning.

Skills and influence
Agree skill set of next NED/Board composition. Digital strategy 
to be further developed.

Governance
Bring ESG up the Board agenda.

Committees
Audit: 

 Complete a more detailed review of key 
risks going forward.

Remuneration:  

 Insight and review of staff Incentives below 
Executive level.

Nomination: 

Review Executive succession.

O
v
e
r
v
e
w

i

S

i

t
r
a
t
e
g
c
r
e
p
o
r
t

G
o
v
e
r
n
a
n
c
e

i

F
n
a
n
c
a

i

l

s
t
a
t
e
m
e
n
t
s

The Restaurant Group plc Annual Report 2021  29

 
 
 
Corporate Governance report continued

Individual Director appraisal process
Individual performance evaluations of all members of the 
Board are carried out by the following individuals:

Director being  
appraised
Chairman

Chief Executive 
Officer

Chief Financial 
Officer

Non-Executive 
Directors

Appraiser
Reviewed by the Executive and Non- 
Executive Directors excluding the 
Chairman and feedback facilitated by 
the Senior Independent Director.
Reviewed by all the Non-Executive 
Directors and feedback facilitated by 
the Chairman.
Reviewed by the Chief Executive Officer 
and all the Non-Executive Directors and 
feedback facilitated by the Chief 
Executive Officer and Chairman.
Reviewed by the Executive Directors and 
by their Non-Executive Director peers 
and feedback collated and given by 
the Chairman.

Accountability
Risk management
The Board has ultimate responsibility for ensuring that 
business risks are effectively identified and appropriately 
mitigated. The Board has delegated regular review of the 
risk management procedures to the Audit Committee and 
collectively reviews the overall risk environment on an annual 
basis, which includes the principal risks and mitigation plans 
as set out on page 58. The day-to-day management of 
business risks is the responsibility of the Senior Management 
team together with the Risk Committee. For the report of  
the Risk Committee see pages 57 to 58.

Internal controls
The Group has a system of internal controls, which aim to 
support the delivery of the strategy by managing the risk 
of failing to achieve business objectives and the protection 
of assets. As such the Group can only provide reasonable 
and not absolute assurance.

The Group insures against risks, but certain risks remain 
difficult to insure due to the breadth and cost of cover. In some 
cases, external insurance is not available at all, or not at an 
economical price. In such cases the Group identifies and 
agrees to accept such risk. The Group regularly reviews both 
the type and amount of external insurance that it buys. There 
were no meaningful changes to the policy undertaken in 2021.

Remuneration
For information on remuneration, see the Directors’ 
remuneration report on pages 41 to 54.

Board decision-making
The Board is required to act in the way it considers would be 
most likely to promote the success of the Company for the 
benefit of its members as a whole, and in so doing, have 
regard to the interests of certain stakeholders and the other 
matters set out in section 172 of the Companies Act 2006. 
For information on the Board’s decision-making see the 
section 172 Statement on pages 14 and 15.

30  The Restaurant Group plc Annual Report 2021

Relations with shareholders
Share capital structure
The Company’s issued share capital at 2 January 2022 
consisted of 765,046,600 ordinary shares of 28 1⁄8 pence 
each. There are no special control rights, restrictions on share 
transfer or voting rights, or any other special rights pertaining 
to any of the shares in issue, and the Company does not have 
preference shares. During the year, a total of 175,241,238 new 
ordinary shares in the capital of the Company were issued as 
a result of a Firm Placing and Placing and Open Offer 
(together, the ‘Capital Raising’) and a concurrent subscription 
by the Directors (‘Subscription’), which raised gross proceeds 
of approximately £175m. The new shares issued represented 
approximately 30% of the existing issued ordinary share 
capital of the Company prior to the Capital Raising and 
Subscription. A further 9,887 shares were allotted during 
the year to participants in the Company’s Save As You Earn 
(SAYE) employee share scheme. 

As far as is reasonably known to the Board and Management, 
the Company is not directly or indirectly owned or controlled 
by another Company or by any government.

As granted at the 2021 AGM, the Directors currently have 
authority to allot shares in the Company (a) up to a nominal 
amount of £71,722,191 (such amount to be reduced by any 
allotments or grants made under (b) in excess of such sum); 
and (b) comprising equity securities (as defined in section 560 
of the Act) up to a nominal amount of £143,444,383 (such 
amount to be reduced by any allotments or grants made 
under (a)) in connection with an offer by way of a rights issue: 
(i) to holders of ordinary shares in the capital of the Company 
and (ii) to holders of other equity securities in the capital of the 
Company, as required by the rights of those securities or, 
subject to such rights, as the Directors otherwise consider 
necessary, such authority to expire at midnight on 25 August 
2022 or, if earlier, the 2022 AGM, where it is intended that a 
resolution granting a similar authority will be put to shareholders.

As granted at the 2021 AGM, the Company is currently 
authorised to purchase its own shares and to cancel or 
hold in treasury such shares provided that: (a) the maximum 
aggregate number of shares authorised to be purchased 
is 76,503,671 (representing approximately 10% of the 
Company’s then issued share capital); (b) the minimum price 
(exclusive of expenses) which may be paid for each share is 
28 1/8 pence (being equal to the nominal value of each share); 
and (c) the maximum price (exclusive of expenses) which may 
be paid for each share is the higher of (i) an amount equal to 
105% of the average of the middle market quotations for the 
shares as derived from the London Stock Exchange Daily 
Official List for the five business days preceding the date 
on which the shares are contracted to be purchased, and 
(ii) the higher of the price of the last independent trade and 
the highest current independent bid on the London Stock 
Exchange Daily Official List at the time of the purchase. This 
authority will lapse on 25 August 2022 or, if earlier, at the 2022 
AGM, where it is intended that a resolution granting a similar 
authority will be put to shareholders.

Board engagement with shareholders
Communications with shareholders are given high priority. 
There is regular dialogue with institutional investors including 
presentations after the Company’s year-end and interim results 
announcements. A programme of meetings takes place 
throughout the year with major institutional shareholders, with 
both Executive Directors attending, with a follow-up meeting 
offered by the Chairman. Private shareholders have the 
opportunity to meet the Board face-to-face and ask questions 
at the AGM.

In addition to the Board’s regular engagement with 
shareholders in 2021, the Chairman of the Board and the 
Executive Directors consulted extensively with the Company’s 
top shareholders in respect of the Capital Raising.

Board shareholder updates
Feedback from major institutional shareholders is provided 
to the Board on a regular basis and, where appropriate, the 
Board takes steps to address their suggestions, concerns 
and recommendations.

Electronic shareholder communications
As part of the Company’s commitment to reducing its impact 
on the environment, we ask shareholders to elect to view our 
annual reports, notices of meetings and other shareholder 
documentation online, rather than in paper form. Shareholders 
retain the right to ask to receive hard copy shareholder 
communications by post if they so wish.

Substantial shareholdings
As at 2 January 2022, the Company was aware of the 
following interests of 3% or more in the issued share capital 
of the Company:

Directors’ shareholdings
For details of Directors’ shareholdings, remuneration and 
interests in the Company’s shares and options, together 
with information on Directors’ service contracts, see pages 
43 to 50 of the Directors’ remuneration report.

Annual General Meeting
The AGM is an opportunity for shareholders to vote on 
certain aspects of Group business and provides a useful 
forum for communication with private shareholders. At the 
AGM shareholders receive presentations on the Company’s 
performance and may ask questions of the Board. The 
Chairman seeks to ensure that all Directors attend and that 
the Chairs of the Audit, Remuneration and Nomination 
Committees answer relevant questions at the meeting. Where 
shareholder attendance is discouraged due to Government 
guidelines relating to Covid-19 (as was the case for the 2021 
AGM), we provide a facility for shareholders to submit 
questions to the Directors electronically and the answers 
are published on our website.

The 2022 AGM will be held on 24 May 2022 at 11:00 a.m. 
at the Group’s Head Office at 5-7 Marshalsea Road, 
London SE1 1EP. The notice convening this meeting is 
expected to be sent to shareholders in mid-April, along with 
the proxy forms and shareholder vouchers, and will be made 
available at the same time at www.trgplc.com/investors/
reports-and-presentations.

By order of the Board.

Ken Hanna
Chairman

Number of 
shares

% of issued 
share capital

15 March 2022

Columbia Threadneedle 
Investments 
Fidelity Mgt & Research
AXA Investment Mgrs
River & Mercantile Asset Mgt
Royal London Asset Mgt 
Vanguard Group

133,306,645
48,962,019
38,573,115 
34,872,610 
29,693,721 
27,194,977 

17.42
6.40
5.04
4.56
3.88
3.55

Since 2 January 2022 and up to the date of this report, the 
Company has received notifications under the Disclosure 
and Transparency Rules in respect of the following interests 
of 3% or more in the issued share capital of the Company:

River & Mercantile Asset Mgt

Number  
of shares
37,946,698

% of issued 
share capital
4.96

O
v
e
r
v
e
w

i

S

i

t
r
a
t
e
g
c
r
e
p
o
r
t

G
o
v
e
r
n
a
n
c
e

i

F
n
a
n
c
a

i

l

s
t
a
t
e
m
e
n
t
s

The Restaurant Group plc Annual Report 2021  31

 
 
 
Board of Directors as at 15 March 2022

N R

Ken Hanna 
Non-Executive Chairman 

Andy Hornby
Chief Executive Officer

Ken Hanna was appointed as a Non-Executive Director  
on 1 December 2021 and Chairman with effect from 
1 January 2022.

Ken is an experienced Chair and brings a wealth of relevant 
business experience from both his Executive and Non-
Executive careers. His Executive career has included the roles 
of CFO of Avis Europe plc, CFO of United Distillers plc, CFO of 
Sygen International plc, CFO and CEO of Dalgety plc and CFO 
of Cadbury plc. Since embarking on a Non-Executive career, 
Ken’s roles have included Non-Executive Director of Tesco 
plc, and Chairman of Inchcape plc, Shooting Star Chase, 
Aggreko plc, RMD Kwikform and Arena Events Group plc.

Ken chairs the Nomination Committee.

Andy joined the Company as Chief Executive Officer on 
1 August 2019. Andy is an experienced company Chief 
Executive, with strong consumer and digital credentials. 
He was previously Co Chief Operating Officer of GVC Holdings 
plc (‘GVC’). After joining Gala Coral in 2011, he was successively 
Chief Executive of Coral, Chief Operating Officer of Gala Coral, 
Chief Operating Officer of Ladbrokes Coral (following the 
merger with Ladbrokes in 2016) and Co Chief Operating 
Officer of GVC (following the purchase by GVC in 2018).

Prior to joining Gala Coral, Andy was Group Chief Executive 
of Alliance Boots from 2009 to 2011, having previously held 
positions as Chief Executive of Halifax Retail, CEO of the Retail 
Division of HBOS plc, Chief Operating Officer of HBOS plc and 
then Chief Executive of HBOS plc from 2006 to the end of 
2008. Earlier in his career Andy held a range of roles at Asda, 
the supermarket retailer, including Retail Managing Director 
and Managing Director of ‘George’ clothing.

Andy is also Non-Executive Chairman of Sharps Bedrooms 
and a Trustee of the charity Only A Pavement Away.

A N R

Kirk Davis
Chief Financial Officer

Graham Clemett
Senior Independent Director

Kirk joined the Company as Chief Financial Officer on 
5 February 2018. He has extensive finance experience within 
listed leisure and retail businesses and was previously Chief 
Financial Officer at Greene King plc for three years. Prior to 
that he was Finance Director at JD Wetherspoon plc, and he 
has also held senior finance roles at Tesco plc and Marks & 
Spencer plc. He is a member of the Chartered Institute of 
Management Accountants.

Graham was appointed as a Non-Executive Director on 
1 June 2016. Graham is currently Chief Executive Officer of 
Workspace Group plc. He previously held roles as Finance 
Director for UK Corporate Banking at RBS Group plc and as 
Group Financial Controller at Reuters Group plc. He qualified 
as a chartered accountant with KPMG.

Graham chairs the Audit Committee.

32  The Restaurant Group plc Annual Report 2021

A  Member of the Audit Committee

N  Member of the Nomination Committee

R  Member of the Remuneration Committee

 Committee Chairman

A N R

N R

Alison Digges
Independent Non-Executive Director

Zoe Morgan
Independent Non-Executive Director

Alison Digges was appointed as a Non-Executive Director on 
1 January 2020. Alison has extensive experience of running 
consumer businesses in the media and gaming sectors, 
leading programmes of digital transformation. She was until 
recently the UK Managing Director of Digital for Entain plc, 
one of the world’s largest sports betting and gaming groups, 
with full P&L accountability for their gaming brands. She 
previously held digital and marketing roles for Gala Coral, 
Datamonitor and Granada Television, and brings a wealth of 
commercial, operations and digital experience from multi-site 
consumer businesses.

Zoe Morgan was appointed as a Non-Executive Director  
on 1 January 2020. Zoe is an experienced marketeer and 
Non-Executive Director. She has been Marketing Director 
of a number of retail, consumer and food businesses 
including Boots and the Co-operative Group. She has also 
been co-founder of a number of start-up businesses. She has 
a strong marketing background in multi-site, retail businesses, 
with a broad skill set in strategy, brand management and 
CRM. She has previously held a number of NED roles, 
including at Finsbury plc, a leading speciality bakery 
manufacturer, and Moss Bros Group plc, and chaired  
the Remuneration Committees of both organisations.  
She is currently a Non-Executive Director at Dogtooth 
Technologies Ltd and Amicable.

Zoe chairs the Remuneration Committee.

O
v
e
r
v
e
w

i

S

i

t
r
a
t
e
g
c
r
e
p
o
r
t

G
o
v
e
r
n
a
n
c
e

A N

Alex Gersh
Independent Non-Executive Director

Alex Gersh was appointed as a Non-Executive Director on 
23 February 2021. Alex is currently the CFO of Sportradar, a 
global leader in leveraging the power of sports data and digital 
content for clients around the world. Prior to that he was CFO 
of Cazoo, an online used car business. He is an experienced 
listed business CFO and was previously CFO of the FTSE 100 
listed business Paddy Power Betfair Group, where he played 
a key role in the merger of Betfair with Paddy Power plc and 
in driving the subsequent success of the combined business.

From 2018 to 2020, Alex was Non-Executive Director and 
Chairman of the Audit Committee of Moss Bros plc, until the 
business was delisted in June 2020. From 2007 to 2013, 
he was Non-Executive Director and Chairman of the Audit 
Committee of Black Earth Farming Ltd, an agricultural 
company listed on NASDAQ OMX (Stockholm).

The Restaurant Group plc Annual Report 2021  33

i

F
n
a
n
c
a

i

l

s
t
a
t
e
m
e
n
t
s

 
 
 
Audit Committee report

Graham Clemett
Chairman of the Audit Committee

The Audit Committee is appointed by the Board and the current members of the 
Audit Committee are Graham Clemett, Alison Digges and Alex Gersh. It is chaired 
by Graham Clemett and met four times during the year. Membership and 
attendance are set out below:

Membership during the year
A summary of the Directors’ attendance at Audit Committee meetings that they 
were eligible to attend during 2021 is shown below:

Director
Graham Clemett
Alison Digges
Alex Gersh

Status
Member for whole year
Member for whole year
Member from 23 February 2021

Attendance
4/4
4/4
4/4

Since 2 January 2022, there has been one Audit Committee meeting to review and 
approve this Annual Report and Accounts amongst other matters. The meeting was 
attended by all three current members of the Audit Committee.

In accordance with the UK Corporate Governance Code (“Code”) the Board considers 
that Graham Clemett has significant, recent and relevant financial experience based on 
his current role as CEO of Workspace Group plc, a FTSE 250 company, where he was 
also CFO prior to his current role. Biographies of all Committee members, including a 
summary of their experience, appear on pages 32 to 33.

On an ongoing basis the Board reviews the composition of the Committee to ensure 
that it remains proportionate to its role and responsibilities and provides sufficient 
scrutiny of risk management, internal controls and external audit. 

The Committee regularly invites the external audit lead partner, the Chairman of the 
Board, the other Non-Executive Directors, the Chief Executive Officer and the Chief 
Financial Officer to its meetings. The Committee meets privately with the External 
Auditor at least annually and liaises with Company Management in considering 
areas for review. 

Role of the Audit Committee
The Committee is responsible for monitoring and reviewing the integrity of the 
Company’s financial reporting in advance of its consideration by the Board, reviewing 
the adequacy of the Company’s internal controls and risk management systems, and 
making recommendations to the Board in relation to the External Auditor.

Key responsibilities
The Committee discharges its responsibilities through Committee meetings during 
the year at which detailed reports are presented for review. The Committee will 
also commission reports and presentations from external advisers and Company 
Management in relation to the Company’s major risks, or in response to 
developing issues. 

34  The Restaurant Group plc Annual Report 2021

The Committee’s key responsibilities are to:

•  discussed the Group’s long-term viability and going concern 

•  provide assurance regarding the integrity, quality and 

reliability of financial information used by the Board and 
of externally published financial statements;

•  review the Company’s internal procedures on control and 

compliance for financial reporting to satisfy itself that these 
are adequate and effective;

•  review the principles, policies and practices adopted in the 
preparation of the Group’s financial statements to ensure 
they comply with statutory requirements and UK Adopted 
International Accounting Standards;

•  review the adequacy and effectiveness of the Company’s 
risk management and internal control, supported by the 
Risk Committee;

•  receive and review reports from the Group’s External 

Auditor concerning external announcements, in particular 
the Annual Report and Accounts and the Interim Report;

•  develop and oversee the Company’s policy regarding the 

external audit process, review the External Auditor’s 
independence, review the provision of non-audit services 
they provide and approve their remuneration;

statements; and

•  considered and approved the company’s response to the 

communications received from the FRC.

External audit:
•  received the External Auditor’s report on the Annual Report 
and Accounts and Interim Report process and discussed 
the 2021 year-end audit;

•  considered the scope and cost of external audit;

•  considered the effectiveness of the external audit process;

•  discussed the Board representation letter; and

•  discussed the non-audit work carried out by the External 

Auditor and its impact on safeguarding audit independence.

Internal control and risk management:
•  reviewed the Group’s principal risk factors (see page 58);

•  reviewed the Group’s internal controls and risk 

management systems;

•  initiated the outsourcing of an internal audit function for 

specific reviews;

•  review the whistleblowing arrangements whereby 

•  commissioned updates on cyber security; and

•  discussed regular reports and copies of the minutes from 

the Chairman of the Risk Committee.

Compliance, whistleblowing and fraud
•  reviewed the operational effectiveness of the Company’s 
policies and procedures for detecting fraud or illegal acts; 
and

•  reviewed the Whistleblowing Policy and the effectiveness of 
the Company’s whistleblowing arrangements and received 
a report on whistleblowing activity.

Committee governance:
•  reviewed the Committee terms of reference; and

•  conducted an internally facilitated Committee 

effectiveness review.

employees may, in confidence, raise concerns about possible 
improprieties in financial reporting or other matters, to ensure 
there are proportionate and independent procedures in place 
and review the operational effectiveness of the Company’s 
policies and procedures for detecting fraud or illegal acts; and 

•  consider any other matter that is brought to its attention by 
the Board or the External Auditor, or any other matter falling 
within its remit that the Committee itself determines should 
be considered, and make recommendations as appropriate.

2021 Committee activities
The Committee is required by its terms of reference to meet at 
least three times a year. During 2021, the Committee held four 
meetings and in discharging its responsibilities:

Financial and narrative reporting:
•  reviewed the full year and interim results and associated 

announcements; 

•  considered whether taken as a whole the Annual Report 
and Accounts were fair, balanced and understandable  
and whether they provided the necessary information for 
shareholders to assess the Company’s position, 
performance, business model and strategy;

•  reviewed the suitability of the Group’s accounting policies 

and practices; 

O
v
e
r
v
e
w

i

S

i

t
r
a
t
e
g
c
r
e
p
o
r
t

G
o
v
e
r
n
a
n
c
e

i

F
n
a
n
c
a

i

l

s
t
a
t
e
m
e
n
t
s

The Restaurant Group plc Annual Report 2021  35

 
 
 
Audit Committee report continued

Significant financial judgements
In recommending the Annual Report and Accounts to the Board for approval, the Committee commissioned and reviewed 
reports into the accounting and disclosure of the following key accounting matters:

Matter considered 
Impairment of property,  
plant and equipment

Prior year restatement

Segmental disclosure

Going concern

Exceptional costs

Alternative Performance Measures 
(APMs)

IFRS 16

Useful economic life of  
the Wagamama brand

Action taken by the Committee
The Committee reviewed the proposals prepared by Management setting out their 
approach and challenged the key judgements made relating to both impairment and 
reversals of impairments previously booked. The key judgements related to forecast sales 
performance, allocation of central costs and discount rates. In addition, these judgements 
and disclosures were reviewed with the External Auditor.
The Committee reviewed and approved all correspondence with the FRC following the 
enquiries from the Corporate Reporting Review Team. The FRC review was based on 
a desktop review of the 2020 Annual Report and Accounts and provides no assurance 
that the report and accounts are correct in all material respects. The outcome of these 
enquiries is that the Group has revisited its application of accounting standards relating 
to the development of its sites in Manchester Airport. Accordingly, it has restated the prior 
year balances relating to exceptional cost of sales, exceptional tax charge, property, plant 
and equipment, deferred tax liabilities, and retained earnings. Further details are given 
in Note 2.
The Committee reviewed the paper prepared by Management on the determination and 
presentation of the operating segments within the Group and Management’s proposal 
to continue to aggregate into one reportable segment. The Committee focused on the 
economic characteristics of the different operating segments, and the criteria set within 
IFRS 8. The Committee agreed with Management’s proposal subject to appropriate 
disclosure in the Accounting Policies and the Significant Judgements sections of the 
Annual Report.
The Committee, alongside the wider Board, reviewed the base and stress case forecasts 
with Management, with reference to the current loan facilities. This included cash flows and 
forecast covenant calculations for the Group. The Committee discussed the assessment 
by Management with the External Auditor. The Committee agreed with Management’s 
assessment as explained on page 37.
Management presented a paper to the Committee covering the details of all costs 
classified in the accounts as exceptional in the year. This covered both the calculation of 
relevant amounts, as well as the rationale for separating them from the underlying trading 
of the business. These costs were reviewed and discussed with Management and with 
the External Auditor.
Management presented a paper to the Committee including a rationale for the use of 
APMs specifically excluding the impact of Exceptional Items and IFRS 16 ‘Leases’. This 
paper also included several improvements to be made to the 2021 Annual Report to more 
clearly explain the use of APMs following the Thematic Review by the FRC. The Committee 
considered this paper in light of the FRC guidance and challenged Management on 
whether APMs continue to be appropriate. The Committee was satisfied with the 
responses by Management and endorsed the improved disclosure.
The Committee received a paper from Management regarding the movement in the 
right-of-use assets and lease liabilities recognised under IFRS 16. The Committee paid 
particular attention to the completeness of the calculations, the significant changes in 
these balances relating to site exits and renegotiations, and the discount rates applied. 
This was discussed with Management, and the External Auditor.
The Committee reviewed Management’s paper on the appropriateness of maintaining an 
indefinite useful economic life. Particular consideration was given to the current strength of 
the brand and its performance since acquisition, which was assessed using an agreed set 
of brand metrics including LFL sales performance versus the market, Net Promoter Score, 
and staff turnover. The financial forecast which demonstrated Management’s intention, 
and ability, to keep investing in the brand to maintain its strength and relevance was also 
reviewed. This assessment was discussed with Management, and the External Auditor.

36  The Restaurant Group plc Annual Report 2021

No unresolved issues remain from the Committee’s 
consideration of these matters.

Fair, balanced and understandable
The Committee carried out an assessment of whether the 
Annual Report and Accounts, taken as a whole, are fair, 
balanced and understandable and provide the information 
necessary for shareholders to assess the Company’s position, 
performance, business model and strategy. This assessment 
included a review for consistency of the narrative reporting 
and the financial statements and forms the basis of the advice 
given by the Committee to the Board to assist them in making 
this statement. 

Long-term viability and going concern statements
The Committee considered, with reference to a detailed 
management paper, the Group’s going concern and long-term 
viability statements. The viability period has been extended back 
to three years from the two years used in 2020. The factors used 
when assessing the Group’s viability for the next three years, 
together with the statement, are set out on page 55.

External audit
The Committee has primary responsibility for overseeing the 
relationship with, and performance of, the External Auditor. 
Annually the Committee undertakes a review of the objectivity 
and effectiveness of the audit process. 

Auditor effectiveness
When considering the effectiveness of the External Auditor, 
the Committee takes account of: 

•  the findings set out in the FRC’s Audit Quality Review team’s 

public reports on audit firms;

•  any specific observations on the audit of the Company 

arising from the FRC;

•  the quality of challenge and insight of the Auditor in their 
handling of the key accounting and audit judgements; 

•  the arrangements for ensuring the independence and 

objectivity of the External Auditor;

•  the External Auditor’s fulfilment of the agreed audit plan;

•  the ability of the External Auditor to add value through 

observations from the audit process and interactions with 
the Company’s Management; and

•  the External Auditor’s conclusions with regard to 

management and control processes.

A formal assessment will be conducted after the approval  
of the financial statements in March 2022. Subject to this 
review, it is the Committee’s intention to recommend the 
re-appointment of Ernst & Young LLP (EY) to shareholders  
at the Annual General Meeting in May 2022. If appointed,  
EY will hold office until the conclusion of the next Annual 
General Meeting at which accounts are laid.

Auditor independence
EY were appointed in November 2018, following a tender 
process as outlined in the 2018 Annual Report. This is the 
fourth year auditing the Group’s annual report. Over that time, 
the audit has been led by Bob Forsyth, Audit Partner. The 
Committee has been made aware of Bob Forsyth’s intention 
to rotate off the audit of the Group after the 2021 Annual 
Report has been issued. A selection process for his successor 
has been conducted, which consisted of EY proposing a 
selection of Audit Partners to meet both Management and the 
Audit Committee Chairman. This process has resulted in the 
selection of Julie Carlyle, who will lead the audit going forward.

To ensure the External Auditor remains independent the 
Committee considers the following:

•  the External Auditor’s plan for the current year, noting the role 
of the external audit lead partner and their length of tenure;

•  the arrangements for day-to-day management of the 

external audit relationship;

•  a report from the External Auditor describing their 
arrangements to identify, report and manage any 
independence matters or conflicts of interest; and

•  the overall extent of non-audit services provided by the 

External Auditor, in addition to its case-by-case approval of 
the provision of non-audit services by the External Auditor.

Non-audit work and pre-approval policy
The Company has a non-audit work policy in place which 
was updated and approved at the December 2020 Audit 
Committee meeting, following the changes implemented  
in the Revised Ethical Standard 2019 issued by the FRC.  
The services that can now be provided by the Auditor are 
restricted to a specific ‘whitelist’ of services closely linked to 
the audit or regulatory work. In line with the requirements of 
the Revised Ethical Standard, the External Auditor would  
only be appointed to perform a non-audit service when it is 
consistent with the requirements and overarching principles 
of the Standard, and when its skills and experience make it 
the most appropriate supplier. The revised policy also requires 
prior approval from the Audit Committee prior to any non-audit 
services being conducted.

The Committee aims to minimise non-audit fees as far as 
is possible and practicable. To safeguard objectivity and 
independence the Committee also assesses whether any 
such fees are appropriate. The priority is to ensure that 
an effective, high-quality audit can be conducted and 
independence maintained. 

O
v
e
r
v
e
w

i

S

i

t
r
a
t
e
g
c
r
e
p
o
r
t

G
o
v
e
r
n
a
n
c
e

i

F
n
a
n
c
a

i

l

s
t
a
t
e
m
e
n
t
s

The Restaurant Group plc Annual Report 2021  37

 
 
 
Audit Committee report continued

Despite an intention to keep non-audit fees at a relatively 
minor proportion of the total EY fee, for practical reasons, 
these fees have been elevated in 2018, 2020, and 2021. 
In 2018, EY performed Reporting Accountant work on the 
acquisition of Wagamama. In 2020, they were engaged to 
provide comfort letters and working capital reports on an 
aborted equity issuance and debt refinancing. In 2021, EY 
were engaged to provide comfort letters and working capital 
reports on the equity issuance completed in April 2021. We 
believed that EY, as our Auditor, was best placed to provide 
these services during the pandemic, as the services were 
closely associated with knowledge gained from the audit 
process and were required to be performed in a short 
timeframe. Therefore, the Committee requested EY to engage 
with the FRC to obtain clearance in advance of appointing EY 
to undertake the work. An FRC exemption was obtained to 
exceed the 70% non-audit fee cap for the year ending 
2 January 2022. Separately, the Audit Committee also 
considered the safeguards that EY put in place to ensure 
its independence in undertaking the work. 

As a result of the above workstreams, the audit fees to 
non-audit fee ratio has been 1:1.4 (2020: 1:1.4), causing the 
Committee to closely scrutinise the safeguards in place to 
maintain independence. The Committee receives updates 
on the level of fees from the Auditor twice per year.

Internal controls and risk management
Internal audit function
The Committee keeps under regular review the scope of 
the Group’s internal control activity. In the year, the Audit 
Committee discussed the appropriate strategy for Internal 
Audit and received reports from PwC on the Group’s process 
for risk management, payroll management and treasury. 
Management and the Committee are monitoring the 
implementation of all recommended actions. The Audit 
Committee meets with PwC to agree the annual scope 
of work and to review its execution.

Committee Governance
Terms of reference
In December 2021, the Committee reviewed its terms of 
reference. The full terms of reference are available on the 
Company’s website at www.trgplc.com/investors/corporate-
governance.

Committee effectiveness review
A Board and Committee evaluation was conducted in 
December 2021. All Executive Directors, Non-Executive 
Directors and the Company Secretary participated. Input was 
provided through a questionnaire consisting of 43 questions, 
covering the areas of Board Process, Business Strategy,  
Skills and Influence, and Governance and Stakeholder 
Management, and a separate section on the Board’s 
response to the Covid-19 pandemic. There were also 
questions on the effectiveness of each Board Committee. 
The review was performed internally and the results discussed 
at a Board meeting where an action plan was agreed.

Of specific note for the Audit Committee was the desire for 
risk management to be more granular and included as a more 
substantial part of the Committee agenda.

Rotation of Committee Chairman
The Committee Chairman, Graham Clemett, has indicated 
to the Board his intention to stand down from his role as 
Audit Committee Chairman from the date of the Annual 
General Meeting, but will continue in his role as a Non-
Executive Director and Senior Independent Director and will 
remain as a member of the Audit Committee. It is proposed 
that Alex Gersh will take over as Chairman of the Committee 
following this year’s AGM.

On behalf of the Audit Committee.

In addition, the Company has appointed a Director of Risk and 
Compliance, who will further enhance the processes around 
risk management and mitigation.

Graham Clemett
Chairman of the Audit Committee

15 March 2022

Risk Committee
As set out in the Risk Committee’s terms of reference, the 
Audit Committee Chairman received regular reports on its 
activities during 2021. For further details on the membership, 
roles and responsibilities and Risk Committee activities,  
see page 57. 

The Group’s principal risk factors are set out on page 58.

38  The Restaurant Group plc Annual Report 2021

Nomination Committee report

Ken Hanna
Chairman of the  
Nomination Committee

The Nomination Committee is appointed by the Board and, as at 2 January 2022, 
comprised five independent Non-Executive Directors – the Committee Chairman 
Ken Hanna, Graham Clemett, Alison Digges, Zoe Morgan and Alex Gersh. 

The Nomination Committee met seven times during the year.

Biographies of all Committee members, including a summary of their experience, 
appear on pages 32 to 33.

Role of the Nomination Committee
The principal role of the Committee is to review the structure, size and composition 
of the Board and its Committees, to identify, evaluate and recommend candidates 
for appointment to the Board and its Committees and to keep under review the 
Group’s broader Executive leadership and succession needs, together with Board, 
Committee and senior leadership succession planning.

Key responsibilities
The Committee discharges its responsibilities through regular meetings during 
the year. Its key responsibilities are to:

•  review the structure, size and composition (including the skills, knowledge, 

experience and diversity) and effectiveness of the Board and make 
recommendations for any changes;

•  give full consideration to succession planning for Directors and the Executive 

leadership and Executive succession needs of the Group;

•  recommend Directors for annual re-election, and explicitly keep under review 

Directors being re-elected for a term exceeding six years; and

•  make recommendations for new Director appointments to the Board.

2021 Committee activities
The Committee is required by its terms of reference to meet at least twice 
a year. During 2021, the Committee held seven meetings and considered the 
following matters:

•  the structure and skill set of the Board, including its diversity in composition, 

skills, thinking and approach and its Committee succession needs;

•  the recruitment of a new Non-Executive Director, with strong financial skills, 
including the appointment of an executive search firm and the process to 
be adopted;

•  the consideration of the succession for the role of Chairman of the Audit 

Committee, in view of the fact that Graham Clemett, the current Chairman of the 
Audit Committee would attain six years of service on the Board on 31 May 2022;

•  the appointment and induction of Alex Gersh as a Non-Executive Director, who 

commenced on 23 February 2021 and who will assume the role of Audit 
Committee Chair from the May 2022 AGM;

•  the recruitment of a new Chairman of the Board of Directors, following the 
resignation of Debbie Hewitt in June 2021, including the appointment of an 
executive search firm and the process to be adopted;

•  the appointment and induction of Ken Hanna, who commenced as a Non-

Executive Director on 1 December 2021 and became Chairman of the Board 
on 1 January 2022; and

•  the format and process of the Committee evaluation, in particular the areas 
of focus and subsequently a review of the outcome and development of an 
action plan.

The Committee took part in the comprehensive Board effectiveness review at the 
end of 2021.

The Restaurant Group plc Annual Report 2021  39

O
v
e
r
v
e
w

i

S

i

t
r
a
t
e
g
c
r
e
p
o
r
t

G
o
v
e
r
n
a
n
c
e

i

F
n
a
n
c
a

i

l

s
t
a
t
e
m
e
n
t
s

 
 
 
Nomination Committee report continued

Effectiveness of the Committee
The Board effectiveness review concluded that the Committee 
was working effectively, with an inclusive and forward-thinking 
approach. Progress included:

•  succession for the Chairman, with Ken Hanna appointed  
as a Non-Executive Director on 1 December 2021 and 
succeeding Debbie Hewitt as Chairman on 1 January 2022;

•  the induction and integration of new Non-Executive 

Directors;

•  succession identified going forward for the Audit Committee 

chair; and

•  ensuring the succession of the then Managing Director of 

Wagamama and the establishment of a stable management 
team for the Leisure brands.

The key area for improvement and focus going forward was 
Executive succession planning.

Board changes during the year
Board changes during the year are detailed in the Corporate 
Governance report on page 25.

Non-Executive Director recruitment
The Company engaged an executive search consultant, 
Sam Allen Associates, to assist in the recruitment of a new 
Non-Executive Director. Following an extensive search, the 
Company announced the appointment of Alex Gersh as 
Non-Executive Director with effect from 23 February 2021. 
Alex also became a member of the Audit and Nomination 
Committees.

The Company also engaged Sam Allen Associates to assist  
in the recruitment of the new Non-Executive Chairman. 
Following an extensive search, the Company announced the 
appointment of Ken Hanna as a Non-Executive Director with 
effect from 1 December 2021. Ken also joined the Nomination 
and Remuneration Committees and, on 1 January 2022, 
became Non-Executive Chairman of the Board and  
Chairman of the Nomination Committee. 

Sam Allen Associates has no other connection with 
the Company.

Board and Senior Management diversity
On an ongoing basis, the Committee keeps under review the 
tenure and qualifications of the Executive and Non-Executive 
Directors to ensure the Board has an appropriate and broad 
mix of skills, experience, knowledge and diversity.

The aim of the Board’s approach to diversity is to ensure that 
the Group has in place the most effective Board, Management 
and colleagues to represent and operate the business 
effectively for the benefit of all its stakeholders.

The Committee continues to be aware of, and embrace, the 
Hampton-Alexander Review on Improving Gender Balance in 
FTSE Leadership and its targets of 33% female representation 
on boards and executive committees and in their direct 
reports. The Board is aligned on these ambitions. As at 
2 January 2022, following the appointment of Ken Hanna 
and the resignation of Debbie Hewitt, the Board comprised 
five males (71%) and two females (29%). It is the intention of 
the Board to ensure it is in compliance with the Hampton-
Alexander Review recommendations during 2022.

The Committee also embraces the Parker Review on 
the ethnic diversity of boards, and its recommendations 
concerning the representation of people of colour on 
boards and in the Senior Management and executive  
ranks of organisations. The Board recognises the value  
of, and strongly supports, the principle of diversity generally, 
particularly cognitive diversity, and over the coming years will 
work to ensure that the Group maximises the benefits that 
diverse management and employees can bring.

Further details on the Group’s policy on diversity are included 
in the Corporate Governance report on page 27 and the 
Environmental and Social report on pages 21 and 22.

Succession planning
The Nomination Committee keeps under review the skill 
set and tenure of Non-Executive Directors to ensure the 
appropriate mix of skill and independence is maintained for 
the Board and its Committees. No current Directors have 
Board tenure exceeding six years however Graham Clemett 
will have served six years on 31 May 2022. The Committee 
has proposed that, following the 2022 AGM on 24 May 2022, 
Alex Gersh will take on the role of Chairman of the Audit 
Committee. Graham Clemett will remain as a Non-Executive 
Director, Senior Independent Director and a member of the 
Audit, Nomination and Remuneration Committees.

The Committee also monitors Executive succession planning 
to ensure the Company has a strong leadership pipeline.

Annual re-election of Directors
As required by the Code, all Directors are subject to annual 
re-election and details setting out why each Director is 
deemed to be suitable for reappointment will be included 
with the AGM papers circulated to shareholders.

Committee Governance
Terms of reference
The full terms of reference are available on the Company’s 
website at http://www.trgplc.com/investors/corporate-
governance.

On behalf of the Nomination Committee.

Ken Hanna
Chairman of the Nomination Committee

15 March 2022

40  The Restaurant Group plc Annual Report 2021

Directors’ remuneration report

Zoe Morgan
Chairman of the  
Remuneration Committee

Dear Shareholder,
I am pleased to provide the Directors’ remuneration report for the year ended 
2 January 2022. The Remuneration Committee (the ‘Committee’) currently consists 
of myself, Ken Hanna, Graham Clemett and Alison Digges.

As usual, the annual statement and annual report on remuneration, which provide 
details of the remuneration earned by Directors in the year and how the Directors’ 
Remuneration Policy will be implemented for the 2022 financial year, will be subject 
to an advisory shareholder vote at this year’s AGM on 24 May 2022.

2021 was another busy and challenging year for the Committee as the Covid-19 
pandemic continued to affect the hospitality industry. As with 2020, the Committee 
adapted the Company’s remuneration decisions to the changing environment of 
Government lockdowns and restricted trading, followed by the gradual reopening 
of much of our estate and, more recently, the impact of the Omicron variant. 
Management continued to implement a series of actions to mitigate the substantial 
impact of the pandemic, including the refinancing of our Group debt, voluntary 
salary reductions, access to the Coronavirus Job Retention Scheme to protect 
the jobs of around 12,000 colleagues affected by Government lockdowns and 
restrictions, access to other Government support, continuing restraint on capital 
expenditure, and the capital raising in March 2021 to strengthen our liquidity. 
The key decisions on remuneration are outlined in more detail below.

Remuneration in 2021 
In light of the Government lockdown at the start of 2021, the Executive Directors 
and, indeed, the Board of Directors as a whole, continued their responsible 
approach to remuneration to safeguard the business including:

•  the Executive and the Non-Executive Directors continued to waive 20% of their 

salaries/fees from 1 January 2021 until 31 March 2021 – it is worth noting that the 
Directors proactively volunteered these waivers, which were in place for a full year 
prior to 1 April 2021;

•  as previously reported, the Committee exercised its discretion to resolve that no 
annual bonuses would be paid to the Executive Directors in respect of the 2020 
financial year (in addition to the Executive Directors having waived any entitlement 
to bonuses earned in respect of the 2019 financial year);

•  the Executive Directors received a 2% pay increase, in line with other head office 
colleagues. However, as previously reported, the pay review date was moved 
from 1 January to 1 April; and

•  in light of the Covid-19 pandemic and the receipt of significant Government 
support, the Committee reduced the Executive Directors’ bonuses by 40% 
to cap them at 60% of maximum outturn.

The Committee debated at length the appropriate bonus award for strong 
performance once trading resumed in 2021. The Committee was cognisant of the 
significant Government support received, mainly in the early part of the year when 
all our restaurants and pubs were closed due to Covid-19. As set out elsewhere 
in the Annual Report, the Group’s Management led the business through a very 
challenging period of Covid-19 lockdowns and restrictions during the year, and 
successfully re-launched our businesses achieving trading performance which 
outperformed the market despite significant headwinds. 

The Committee was also acutely aware of the fact that the Executive Directors had 
not been paid any bonus for the 2019 and 2020 years, and noted that TRG was one 
of very few companies not to have paid bonuses for two years. The 2019 bonuses, 
already earned and about to be paid out, were voluntarily waived by the Executive 
Directors in March 2020, and the Committee decided no bonuses would be paid 
in respect of 2020. The full Board also volunteered partial salary waivers over the 
past two years. 

The Restaurant Group plc Annual Report 2021  41

O
v
e
r
v
e
w

i

S

i

t
r
a
t
e
g
c
r
e
p
o
r
t

G
o
v
e
r
n
a
n
c
e

i

F
n
a
n
c
a

i

l

s
t
a
t
e
m
e
n
t
s

 
 
 
Directors’ remuneration report continued

The Chief Financial Officer’s pension contribution rate will be 
aligned with the average for colleagues from 1 January 2023, 
reducing from the contracted rate of 20% to 3%.

As a result of the on-going Covid-19 crisis, there was no 
increase made to Non-Executive Director fees in 2021 and the 
Non-Executive Directors voluntarily waived 20% of their fees 
from 1 January to 31 March 2021. For 2022, the Non-Executive 
Directors were awarded a 2.6% fee increase to their base 
Director fees from 1 April 2022, with no change to the 
Committee chair/SID fees. Due to his recent recruitment, the 
Chairman was not considered for a fee increase as part of the 
2022 pay review.

I hope that you will agree with how we have dealt with executive 
remuneration in what was another challenging year and 
support the annual vote on this report.

Yours faithfully,

Zoe Morgan
Chairman of the Remuneration Committee

15 March 2022

In light of the successful refinancing of the Group debt  
and strong trading since reopening, with all Divisions out-
performing their respective markets, the Committee felt that it 
was appropriate to pay bonuses for 2021. However, taking into 
account the effect of the Covid-19 pandemic and the receipt 
of significant support from the Government, the Committee 
reduced the bonuses earned by 40%, capping the  
Executive Directors’ bonuses at 60% of maximum outturn, 
notwithstanding that 100% was due on a formulaic basis. 
No other discretion was exercised in respect of the year.

It should also be noted that the Executive Directors are required 
to defer 50% of any bonus earned into share awards with a 
three-year vesting period under the Deferred Bonus Plan. 

Remuneration for 2022
A 2.5% salary increase was awarded to the Executive Directors 
(effective 1 April 2022), which is below both general inflation 
and the 3% average awarded to the head office team. Salary 
increases for non-managerial staff in restaurants and pubs are 
determined in line with changes to the National Minimum and 
National Living Wage.

The Chief Executive Officer and Chief Financial Officer will be 
eligible for a maximum annual bonus for 2022 of 150% and 
135% of salary respectively. The increase to a 135% maximum 
for the Chief Financial Officer is permitted under our 
Remuneration Policy, which provides for a maximum 
of 150%, and aligns with the market.

The Committee intends to grant Restricted Share Awards 
of 100% of salary for each of the Executive Directors during 
2022. The Committee is mindful of the current volatility in 
share prices and, to prevent an inadvertent windfall gain, will 
use the average closing price over the three months prior to 
grant when making the grants.

The 2022 awards will be subject to a discretionary underpin 
in respect of 100% of the Award based on the Group’s 
underlying performance and delivery against its strategy, 
ensuring that the progress made is sufficient to justify the 
level of vesting having regard to such factors as the 
Committee considers to be appropriate in the round. 
In normal circumstances, such factors will include the 
Company’s financial performance, balance sheet strength 
and performance against environmental, social and corporate 
governance priorities and strategic goals set by the 
Committee from time to time. 

42  The Restaurant Group plc Annual Report 2021

Annual report on remuneration

Implementation of the Remuneration Policy  
for the 2022 financial year
Executive Directors’ salaries for the 2022 financial year are set 
out below and will be subject to increase from April:

Basic salary
Andy Hornby
Kirk Davis

20211  
(from 1 April)
£642,600
£376,729

2022  
(from 1 April)
£658,000
£386,000

Increase2
2.4%
2.5%

1  The Executive Director salaries shown in the above table were subject to 

voluntary reductions from 1 January to 31 March 2021 of 20%

2  The salaries shown in the above table do not take into account the Executive 

Directors’ voluntary salary waivers

The Committee considered that the increases for the Chief 
Executive Officer and Chief Financial Officer are in line with 
the rest of the Senior Management team. The average 
increase for head office colleagues will be 3% for the 2022 
pay review, with a higher average increase applied to 
colleagues affected by the National Living Wage and the 
National Minimum Wage increases.

Pension and benefits
Pension and benefits will continue to be provided in line  
with the stated policy. The Chief Executive Officer receives  
no pension contribution and the Chief Financial Officer’s 
contribution rate, set at 20% as negotiated on his recruitment, 
will be reduced to 3% from 1 January 2023 to be aligned with 
the average for all colleagues who opt to take a pension. Any 
new Executive Directors will similarly be aligned.

Performance targets for the annual bonus in 2022
For 2022, the annual bonus will be based on a Group financial 
measure of 85% and, for the first time, ESG KPIs of 15% 
(comprising environmental, social and customer measures), 
and will be capped at 150% and 135% of salary for the Chief 
Executive Officer and Chief Financial Officer respectively. 
The financial measure will be adjusted profit before tax.1 As in 
previous years, the Committee has chosen not to disclose, in 
advance, further details of KPIs for the forthcoming year or the 
adjusted profit before tax target as these include items which 
the Committee considers commercially sensitive. However 
retrospective disclosure in respect of the 2022 targets will be 
provided in next year’s report. Executive Directors are required 
to defer 50% of any bonus earned into share awards with 
a three-year vesting period under the Deferred Bonus Plan.

1.  Pre-IFRS 16 and exceptional items

Underpin for RSP awards to be granted in 2022
The RSP awards intended to be granted to each of the 
Executive Directors in April 2022 will be over shares equal 
to 100% of salary.

Awards granted in April 2022 will be subject to a discretionary 
underpin in respect of 100% of the Award: the Committee 
will determine its view based on the Group’s underlying 
performance and delivery against its strategy, ensuring that 
the progress made is sufficient to justify the level of vesting 
having regard to such factors as the Committee considers 
to be appropriate in the round. In normal circumstances, 
such factors will include the Company’s financial 
performance, balance sheet strength and performance 
against environmental, social and corporate governance 
priorities and strategic goals set by the Committee from 
time to time. 

We have disclosed the 2021 RSP underpins relating to 
the awards made to the Chief Executive and Chief Financial 
Officer on page 47 of this report.

Non-Executive Directors
As detailed in the Remuneration Policy, the Company’s 
approach to setting Non-Executive Directors’ fees is by 
reference to fees paid at similarly sized companies and 
reflects the time commitment and responsibilities of each 
role. A summary of current fees is as follows:

Chairman
Non-Executive 
Directors’  
base fee
Committee 
Chair/Senior 
Independent 
Director fee6

20211,2
£224,0004

2022  
(from 1 April)
£230,0005

Increase3
2.7%

£56,200

£57,650

2.6%

£10,000

£10,000

0%

1  From 1 January 2021 or date of appointment 
2 

In line with the rest of the Board, the Non-Executive Directors voluntarily waived 
20% of their fees from 1 January until 31 March 2021

3  The percentage increases shown in the above table do not take into account the 

Non-Executive Directors’ voluntary salary waivers

4  Fees of Debbie Hewitt until she stepped down from the Board on 31 December 

2021

5  Fees of the current Chairman, Ken Hanna, who joined the Board on 1 December 
2021 and became Chairman from 1 January 2022. Due to his recent recruitment, 
the Chairman was not included in the 2022 fee review
6  No increase was applied to the Committee chair/SID fees

O
v
e
r
v
e
w

i

S

i

t
r
a
t
e
g
c
r
e
p
o
r
t

G
o
v
e
r
n
a
n
c
e

i

F
n
a
n
c
a

i

l

s
t
a
t
e
m
e
n
t
s

The Restaurant Group plc Annual Report 2021  43

 
 
 
Directors’ remuneration report continued

Remuneration received by Directors (audited)
The table below sets out the remuneration received by the Directors in relation to performance for the financial years ended 
2 January 2022 and 27 December 2020 (for Directors who served for part of 2021). The table shows actual amounts after 
taking into account salary/fee waivers during approximately nine months in 2020 and three months in 2021 (which impacts 
the year-on-year comparisons).

£’000
Ken Hanna
2021
2020
Andy Hornby
2021
2020
Kirk Davis
2021
2020
Graham Clemett
2021
2020
Zoe Morgan6
2021
2020
Alison Digges7
2021
2020
Alex Gersh8
2021
2020
Former Directors
Debbie Hewitt9
2021
2020

Fixed pay 

Performance-related pay

Salary and 
fees

Taxable 
benefits1

Pensions2

Sub-total

Annual 
bonus3

SAYE 
Scheme4

LTIP5

RSP5

Sub-total

Total10

19
–

608
504

356
314

72
54

63
50

53
45

47
–

213
179

–
–

12
10

11
10

–
–

–
–

–
–

–
–

–
–

–
–

–
–

71
61

–
–

–
–

–
–

–
–

–
–

19
–

620
514

438
385

72
54

63
50

53
45

47
–

213
179

–
–

578
–

271
–

–
–

–
–

–
–

–
–

–
–

–
–

–
4

–
–

–
–

–
–

–
–

–
–

–
–

–
–

–
–

–
–

–
–

–
–

–
–

–
–

–
–

–
–

–
–

–
–

–
–

–
–

–
–

–
–

–
–

–
–

–
4

–
–

–
–

–
–

–
–

–
–

–
–

19
–

1,198
518

710
385

72
54

63
50

53
45

47
–

213
179

1  Taxable benefits comprise car allowance (the car allowance is £12,000 per annum for the Chief Executive Officer and £10,000 per annum for the Chief Financial Officer) 

and healthcare. Car allowances were subject to a reduction in line with the overall pay reductions. Further details can be found on page 41

2  The pension payment to the Chief Financial Officer is a salary supplement in lieu of pension contributions. The Chief Executive Officer does not receive a pension allowance
3  No bonus was paid for 2020
4  The value for the Chief Executive Officer includes the intrinsic value of the 2020 options granted under the SAYE Scheme on 8 December 2020, being the difference between 
the option price adjusted following the 2021 Placing and Open Offer (51.27 pence) and the average market value of the Company’s shares over the last quarter of the 2020 
financial year (63.73 pence), multiplied by the adjusted number of option shares (35,108 shares). Further details of the SAYE Scheme options are disclosed on page 47

5  No LTIP awards vested in the 2021 financial year. Details of the conditions applicable to their outstanding RSP awards are set out on pages 46 and 47
6  Zoe Morgan was appointed as a Non-Executive Director on 1 January 2020 and Chairman of the Remuneration Committee on 6 April 2020
7  Alison Digges was appointed as a Non-Executive Director on 1 January 2020
8  Alex Gersh was appointed as a Non-Executive Director on 23 February 2021
9  Debbie Hewitt resigned on 31 December 2021 and her remuneration is the amount earned up to that date
10  The aggregate emoluments (being salary/fees, bonus, benefits and cash allowance in lieu of pension) of all Directors for the year ended 2 January 2022 was £2,375,216 

(2020: £1,365,346)

44  The Restaurant Group plc Annual Report 2021

Annual bonus payments for the year ended 2 January 2022 (audited)
The annual bonus for the 2021 financial year for the Chief Executive Officer and Chief Financial Officer was based on Group 
EBITDA1 performance and a strategic measure based on balance sheet progress (including successful Group debt refinancing, 
equity raise and net debt reduction).

A maximum of 70% of the bonus (105% of salary and 84% of salary respectively) was payable for achievement against Group 
EBITDA targets. The table below shows the EBITDA targets and the adjusted profit before tax equivalents:

< Threshold
Threshold (79% of budget, 25% of maximum)2
Target (budget, 50% of maximum)2
Maximum (127% of budget)2
Outcome

Group  
Adjusted  
EBITDA targets1

Adjusted profit 
before tax 
equivalent1

£44.2m
£56.1m
£71.1m
£81.2m

(£22.7m)
(£10.8m)
£4.2m
£16.6m

CEO %  
of salary
0%
26.3%
52.5%
105%
105%

CFO %  
of salary
0%
21%
42%
84%
84%

1  Pre-IFRS 16 and exceptional items
2  Any bonus would be payable on a straight-line basis if achievement is between threshold and target or between target and maximum pay-out

A maximum of 30% of the bonus (45% of salary and 36% of salary respectively) was payable for achievement against a 
strategic measure based on balance sheet progress (including successful Group debt refinancing, equity raise and net debt 
reduction). The Committee reviewed the progress made on the refinancing, successful capital raise and subsequent debt 
reduction and considered that the target for this element of the bonus award had been met in full.

Annual bonus payments
The stretch target for the 2021 bonus was set at an adjusted EBITDA of £71.1m3 (equivalent to adjusted profit before tax of 
£4.2m3). Reflecting the strong trading performance in the second half of the year, the financial targets were exceeded with the 
Group achieving adjusted EBITDA3 of £81.2m (adjusted profit before tax of £16.6m3), which would result in a maximum bonus 
payout on this element on a purely formulaic basis.

Notwithstanding the above bonus potential, in light of the Covid-19 pandemic and the receipt of significant Government support, 
the Remuneration Committee decided to reduce the formulaic outcome of 100% by 40%, to cap the Executive Directors’ 
bonuses at 60% of maximum outturn.

3  Pre-IFRS 16 and exceptional items

O
v
e
r
v
e
w

i

S

i

t
r
a
t
e
g
c
r
e
p
o
r
t

G
o
v
e
r
n
a
n
c
e

i

F
n
a
n
c
a

i

l

s
t
a
t
e
m
e
n
t
s

The Restaurant Group plc Annual Report 2021  45

 
 
 
Directors’ remuneration report continued

Vesting of LTIP awards in 2021 financial year (audited)
No LTIP awards vested to Executive Directors in the year. The 2018 and 2019 schemes have lapsed, with no element of vesting.

Outstanding share awards
The table below sets out details of Executive Directors’ outstanding share awards (which will vest in future years, subject to 
performance and/or continued service).

Name of Director
Andy Hornby

Scheme
2019 LTIP2

Granted
1,467,846

Exercised

Lapsed
– 1,484,3446

Adjusted 
Awards as at  
2 January 
20225
–6

Adjusted 
Exercise price

Date from 
which 
exercisable3 4
– 01.08.2022

Kirk Davis

2020 RSP2
2020 SAYE

1,494,307
34,722

2021 RSP1
2018 LTIP2

496,062
206,203

2019 LTIP2

627,230

2020 RSP2
2021 RSP1

876,048
290,820

–
–

–
–

–

–
–

–
–

1,511,103
35,108

–

–
51.27p 01.02.2024

–
282,3435

496,062
–

–
–
– 19.03.2021

634,2806

–6

– 05.04.2022

–
–

885,894
290,820

–
–

–
–

Expiry date
6 months 
after vesting
–
6 months 
after vesting 
–
6 months 
after vesting
6 months 
after vesting
–
–

1  Details of the conditions applicable to the 2021 RSP awards can be found in the next section of this report
2  Details of the conditions applicable to the 2020 RSP awards can be found on page 56 of last year’s report. Details of the performance conditions for the 2018 and 2019 

LTIP awards can be found in previous years’ reports

3  A two-year post vesting holding period applies to all net of tax shares (other than SAYE) together with a 250% of salary share ownership guideline. The requirement will 
continue to apply for two years post-cessation of employment (with such shares valued at the higher of the share price on departure and subsequently) unless the 
Committee exceptionally determines otherwise. To enforce this requirement, vestings from LTIP and RSP awards will be lodged in escrow until sufficient shares are held
4  Date from which first exercisable and expiration of the exercise period may be impacted if the Directors are prohibited from trading in the Company’s shares at that time
5  For LTIP awards from previous years, consistent with normal practice, the shares subject to outstanding awards granted before 26 November 2018 were adjusted in 

accordance with HMRC’s standard TERPS formula. This reflects the discount to the then prevailing price at which new shares were offered to existing shareholders and 
therefore results in the same economic result for a participant as that of a shareholder participating in the rights issue. Where relevant, the base EPS figure for each award 
has been adjusted on a similar basis. No equivalent adjustment was made in respect of the 2020 private placing however an equivalent adjustment was made to the 2019 
LTIP award, the 2020 RSP award and the 2020 SAYE award following the 2021 Placing and Open Offer

6  The Committee has confirmed that the 2019 LTIPs (which were adjusted following the 2021 Capital Raising to options over 1,484,344 shares for Andy Hornby and 

634,280 for Kirk Davis) have lapsed and are therefore shown as zero as at 2 January 2022

RSP awards granted during the year (audited)
During the year, the following RSP awards were granted to Executive Directors:

Executive
Andy Hornby

Kirk Davis

Type of award
Nil-cost 
Option

Nil-cost 
Option

Basis of  
award  
granted
100% of 
salary of 
£630,000
100% of 
salary of 
£369,342

Average  
share price at 
date of grant1
127p

Number of 
shares over 
which award 
Face value  
of award (£)1
was granted
496,062 £629,998.74

% of face  
value that  
would vest if  
the underpin 
conditions  
are not met

Date of award Date of Vesting2
0% 12.04.2021 12.04.2024

127p

290,820 £369,341.40

0% 12.04.2021 12.04.2024

1  Based on the average share price of 127p during the five dealing days ending immediately before the date of grant
2  Vesting subject to underpin conditions detailed below. A two-year holding period applies to any shares vesting under the RSP awards

46  The Restaurant Group plc Annual Report 2021

Details of the two underpin conditions for the 2021 RSP awards are as follows:

Underpin
The Group’s underlying performance and delivery against its strategy (which may change in response 
to cyclical and structural changes over time) is sufficient to justify the level of vesting having regard to 
such factors as the Committee considers to be appropriate in the round. In normal circumstances, 
such factors will include the Company’s financial performance, balance sheet strength, and 
performance against environmental, social and corporate governance priorities set by the 
Committee from time to time.
EBITDA in FY2023 is at least £100m1 (subject to adjustment for material acquisitions  
and disposals).

1.  Pre-IFRS 16 and exceptional items.

Weighting  
(% of total 
award)
100%

Maximum 
(100% vesting)
100%

50%

£100m

Participation in the SAYE Scheme
The Executive Directors participate in the SAYE Scheme on the same terms as all other employees. Details of the Executive 
Directors’ participation in the SAYE are as follows:

Total SAYE 
awards at  
27 December
2020
34,722
–

Executive Director
Andy Hornby
Kirk Davis

Awards  
granted
–
–

Exercise  
price1
51.27p
–

Awards  
vested  
(number)
–
–

Awards 
exercised 
(number)
–
–

Awards  
lapsed  
(number)
–
–

Total SAYE 
awards at  
2 January 2022

Earliest exercise  
date
35,1081 1 February 2024
–

–

1  For SAYE awards from previous years, consistent with normal practice, the shares subject to outstanding awards granted before 30 March 2021 were adjusted in 

accordance with HMRC’s standard TERPS formula. This reflects the discount to the then prevailing price at which new shares were offered to existing shareholders in 
respect of the 2021 Placing and Open Offer and therefore results in the same economic result for a participant as that of a shareholder participating in the rights issue. 
Where relevant, the exercise price for each award has been adjusted on a similar basis

Payments on cessation of office (audited)
No payments on cessation of office were made in respect of the 2021 financial year.

Payments to former Directors’ (audited)
No payments to former Directors were made in respect of the 2021 financial year.

Statement of Directors’ shareholdings and share interests (audited)

Beneficially 
owned at  
27 December 
20201
–
289,050
465,897
44,755
31,680
4,536
–

Beneficially 
owned at  
2 January  
20221
100,000
374,814
515,897
58,034
51,680
14,536
5,000

Outstanding 
LTIP awards at 
2 January  
20222
–
–
–
–
–
–
–

Outstanding 
RSP awards at 
2 January 
20222
–
2,007,165
1,176,714
–
–
–
–

Maximum 
shares 
receivable 
under SAYE 
options at  
2 January  
2022
–
35,108
–
–
–
–
–

Shareholding % 
of salary at  
2 January  
2022
–
62%
145%
–
–
–
–

Guideline3
n/a
250%
250%
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a

192,763

249,958

–

–

–

–

n/a

Director
Ken Hanna4
Andy Hornby
Kirk Davis
Graham Clemett
Zoe Morgan
Alison Digges
Alex Gersh5
Past Directors
Debbie Hewitt6

1  Beneficial interests include shares held directly or indirectly by connected persons 
2  Further details of outstanding share awards are disclosed on page 46. The Committee has confirmed that the 2019 LTIPs (which were adjusted following the 2021 Capital 

Raising to options over 1,484,344 shares for Andy Hornby and 634,280 for Kirk Davis) have lapsed and are therefore shown as zero as at 2 January 2022

3  Shareholding guideline increased to 250% following approval of the new Directors’ Remuneration Policy on 8 October 2020
4  Appointment date 1 December 2021
5  Appointment date 23 February 2021 
6  As at 31 December 2021, her retirement date

The Restaurant Group plc Annual Report 2021  47

O
v
e
r
v
e
w

i

S

i

t
r
a
t
e
g
c
r
e
p
o
r
t

G
o
v
e
r
n
a
n
c
e

i

F
n
a
n
c
a

i

l

s
t
a
t
e
m
e
n
t
s

 
 
 
 
Directors’ remuneration report continued

The Chief Executive Officer and Chief Financial Officer are each required to build a holding of shares in the Company worth 
250% of salary, over a period of time. For legacy LTIP and RSP awards, Andy Hornby and Kirk Davis must retain no fewer 
than 50% of the shares, net of taxes, vesting under the awards until the required shareholding is achieved. The requirement 
will continue to apply for two years post-cessation of employment (with such shares valued at the higher of the share price 
on departure and subsequently) unless the Committee exceptionally determines otherwise.

On 30 March 2021, Andy Hornby subscribed for 85,764 shares and Kirk Davis 50,000 shares concurrently with the Placing 
and Open Offer of new ordinary shares in the capital of the Company as part of the Company’s capital raising. 

As at the date this report was approved by the Board, there have been no changes in respect of the numbers of shares 
presented in the table above.

Performance graph and Chief Executive Officer pay
The graph below compares the Company’s TSR performance and that of the FTSE Small Cap Index over the past ten 
years, all rebased from 100. This graph shows the value, by 2 January 2022, of £100 invested in The Restaurant Group plc 
on 1 January 2012 compared with the value of £100 invested in the FTSE Small Cap Index. On this basis the value, as at 
2 January 2022, of £100 invested is as follows:

Total shareholder return

400

350

300

250

200

150

100

50

0

)

d
e
s
a
b
e
r
(

)

£

(

l

e
u
a
V

The Restaurant Group

FTSE SmallCap

01 Jan 12

30 Dec 12 29 Dec 13

28 Dec 14

27 Dec 15

01Jan 17
Year-end

Source: Datastream (Thomson Reuters)

31 Dec 17

30 Dec 18 29 Dec 19

27 Dec 20

01 Jan 22

Total remuneration for the Chief Executive Officer for each of the last ten years:

Andrew Page

Danny Breithaupt

Andy McCue

Andy Hornby

2014  
to 
30.08.2014

2014 
from 
01.09.2014

2016  
to 
12.08.2016

19.09.2016 
to 
01.01.2017

2015

2019 
to 
30.06.2019

01.08.2019 
to 
29.12.2019

2017

2018

2020

2021

4,559
75%

913 1,429
75% 69%

387
0%

0%

242 1,116
730
20% 52% 0%

645
0%

5182 1,1982
371
0% 0% 60%

n/a

n/a

0%

0%

n/a

n/a

0%

82% 93% 100%

94% 93%

2012

2013

£’000
Total 
remuneration 3,070
3,840
Annual bonus 1 100% 100%
Annual 
LTIP vesting 1

1  As a percentage of maximum
Impacted by salary waivers
2 

48  The Restaurant Group plc Annual Report 2021

 
 
Percentage change in Directors’ remuneration
The table below shows the percentage change in the Directors’ salary, benefits and annual bonus between the financial year 
ended 2 January 2022 and 27 December 2020.1 The ‘salary change’ figures in the table below include the impact of salary 
waivers, however we have also included ‘normalised’ figures which exclude the effect of salary waivers, as this is considered 
more reflective of the actual increases.

Andy Hornby
Kirk Davis
Ken Hanna4
Graham Clemett
Zoe Morgan
Alison Digges
Alex Gersh
Debbie Hewitt6

Salary  
change2
21%
14%
n/a
34%
26%
19%
n/a
19%

Normalised 
salary (without 
waivers)
2%
2%
n/a
13%5
4%
–
n/a
–

Benefits
 change2
-14%
15%
–
–
–
–
–
–

Bonus  
change3
100%
100%
–
–
–
–
–
–

1  We have not provided a comparison with all employees in the above table. No such comparison is required as the regulations refer to employees of the Parent Company 
which is not a direct employer. Calculating the precise percentage change for all Group employees this year was complicated given the impact of Covid-19. Due to the 
effects of the pandemic and Government restrictions on the hospitality industry, over 95% of colleagues were on furlough for significant periods in 2020 and 2021, during 
which most received 80% of their regular wages and also did not benefit from overtime or tips from customers. As a result, overall their remuneration fell by a similar 
percentage to that indicated above for the Executive Directors. In future years, we intend to include a comparison with all employees

2  Directors’ salaries and fees take into account the voluntary waivers applied during 2020 and 2021. The salary changes from 2020 to 2021 relate mainly to voluntary salary 

waivers applying for 9 months in 2020 and for 3 months in 2021

3  Bonus change is calculated vs the prior year. No bonus was payable for 2020
4  Appointment date 1 December 2021
5  The percentage reflects an increase in fees as a result of his appointment as Senior Independent Director in November 2020
6  Retirement date 31 December 2021

Chief Executive Officer to employee pay ratio
The table below shows how the CEO’s single figure remuneration taking into account the voluntary pay reduction throughout 
2021 (as taken from the single figure remuneration table on page 48) compares to equivalent single figure remuneration for 
full-time equivalent UK employees, ranked at the 25th, 50th and 75th percentile.

Financial year
2020

2021

Method
Option A

Option A

25th percentile 
pay ratio
23:1

Median  
pay ratio
23:1

75th percentile 
pay ratio
20:1

55:1

49:1

42:1

Notes to the CEO to employee pay ratio:
1  The Committee notes the general preference of institutional shareholders for companies to use statutory Method A and prepared the calculations on that basis. For 2020 
and 2021, given the mandatory shutdown of our restaurants and pubs at various times due to Covid-19, Option A includes employees who were placed on furlough under 
the Coronavirus Job Retention Scheme (CJRS) scheme during 2020 and, to a lesser extent, during 2021. The CEO’s remuneration takes into account the CEO’s waiver of 
salary during 2020 (40% from 1 April 2020 to 30 June 2020 and 20% thereafter) and 2021 (20% from 1 January to 31 March 2021)

2  The CEO’s remuneration has been adjusted to reflect the non-payment of the 2020 bonus
3  Employee pay data is based on full time equivalent pay for UK employees as at 2 January 2022. For each employee, total pay is calculated in line with the single 

figure methodology

4  Chief Executive Officer pay is as per the single total figure of remuneration for 2021, as disclosed on page 48
5  No calculation adjustments or assumptions have been made
6  The Committee has considered the pay data for the three individuals identified for 2020 and 2021 and believes that it fairly reflects pay at the relevant quartiles among the 

UK employee population

7  The Committee believes the median pay ratio for 2020 and 2021 to be consistent with the pay, reward and progression policies for the UK employees taken as a whole 

because the majority of our employees are based in our restaurants and pubs and there is a high level of consistency in terms and conditions with structured pay bands. 
During 2020 and (to a lesser extent) 2021, our team members would have been in receipt of furlough payments due to restaurant closures and reduced trading, which will 
impact how the earnings levels compare

8  Any employee who worked less than full time hours was factored up using the full-time contracted hours for the role to calculate their FTE to allow a like-for-like 

comparison and does not take into account the effect of furlough arrangements on the relevant employee’s pay

9  For 2020 and 2021, the CEO ratio does not represent a typical year – our employees will have had periods of furlough and flexible furlough during the course of the year. 

The Chief Executive Officer waived 40% of pay from April to the end of June 2020 and 20% from July 2020 to 31 March 2021

The Restaurant Group plc Annual Report 2021  49

O
v
e
r
v
e
w

i

S

i

t
r
a
t
e
g
c
r
e
p
o
r
t

G
o
v
e
r
n
a
n
c
e

i

F
n
a
n
c
a

i

l

s
t
a
t
e
m
e
n
t
s

 
 
 
Directors’ remuneration report continued

The total pay and benefits and the salary component of total pay and benefits for the employee at each of the 25th percentile, 
the median and the 75th percentile are shown below:

Year
2020
2021

Relative importance of spend on pay

£m
Staff costs1

25th  
percentile
£21,765
£20,707

Salary

Median
£22,389
£22,597

Total pay and benefits

75th  
percentile
£24,960
£25,317

25th  
percentile
£22,318
£21,880

Median
£22,649
£24,411

75th  
percentile
£25,578
£28,491

2020
187.7

2021
245.6

% change
31%

1  Note 6 in the financial statements. 2020 and 2021 figures are shown net of furlough receipts

No dividends were paid in respect of either year.

Additional information
Andy Hornby and Kirk Davis both have a service contract with an indefinite term which is subject to 12 months’ notice by 
either party. In respect of both the Chief Executive Officer and the Chief Financial Officer, in the event of early termination by 
the Company, the Company shall make a payment in lieu of notice equivalent to 12 months of base salary only. There are no 
provisions in respect of change of control within either contract.

Unexpired term of Non-Executive Directors’ service contracts

Ken Hanna
Graham Clemett
Alison Digges
Zoe Morgan
Alex Gersh

Date of  
original appointment
1 December 2021
1 June 2016
1 January 2020
1 January 2020
23 February 2021

Commencement  
date of current term
1 December 2021
1 June 2019
1 January 2020
1 January 2020
23 February 2021

Unexpired term  
as at March 2022
2 years, 9 months
3 months
10 months
10 months
1 year, 11 months

Consideration by the Directors of matters relating to Directors’ remuneration
The Committee is constituted in accordance with the recommendations of the UK Corporate Governance Code and comprises 
three independent Non-Executive Directors in addition to the Company Chairman. The Committee is chaired by Zoe Morgan, 
who became the Committee Chairman from April 2020. None of the Committee members has any personal financial interest 
in the Company (other than as shareholders).

The Committee makes recommendations to the Board. No Director is involved in any decisions about his or her own 
remuneration. In determining the Executive Directors’ remuneration for the year, the Committee consults the Non-Executive 
Chairman about its proposals. In determining the Company Chairman’s fees, the Committee (excluding the Company Chairman) 
consults with the Chief Executive and the Senior Independent Director. The Board (including the Company Chairman but 
excluding the Non-Executive Directors) determines the Non-Executive Directors’ fees.

Where relevant, the Executive Directors and Company Secretary are invited to attend meetings of the Committee, except when 
their own remuneration is being directly discussed. The Committee met eight times during the year.

The Committee has formal terms of reference which can be viewed on the Company’s website.

FIT Remuneration Consultants (‘FIT’) were appointed by the Committee and have acted as its independent advisers since 
December 2018. FIT provide services encompassing all elements of the remuneration packages and did not provide any other 
services to the Group during the year. Total fees paid to FIT in respect of their services in 2021 were £28,394 plus VAT (2020: 
£49,976 plus VAT).

FIT are a signatory to the Remuneration Consultants Group Code of Conduct. The Committee has reviewed the operating 
processes in place at FIT and is satisfied that the advice that it receives is objective and independent and uses its judgement 
when assessing any advice provided.

50  The Restaurant Group plc Annual Report 2021

Statement of shareholder voting
The Directors’ remuneration report received the following votes from shareholders at the last AGM, held on 25 May 2021:

Directors’ remuneration report
Votes cast in favour
Votes cast against
Total votes cast
Votes withheld

488,542,426
121,423,243
609,965,669
48,358,473

80.09%
19.91%
–
–

The new Directors’ Remuneration Policy was last put to shareholders at the General Meeting held on 8 October 2020 on a 
binding basis. The voting outcomes were as follows:

Directors’ remuneration policy
Votes cast in favour
Votes cast against
Total votes cast
Votes withheld

301,883,862
175,972,938
477,856,800
8,310,903

63.17%
36.83%
–
–

Directors’ Remuneration Policy report
This report sets out the main table from the Policy Report approved by shareholders at the General Meeting held on 8 October 
2020. All other information relating to the policy including the various scenario charts are contained in the Notice of EGM dated 
21 September 2020, which is available on our website.

Purpose and link to strategy Operation

Opportunity

Performance metrics

Basic salary

Attract and retain key 
personnel of the right 
calibre. 

Reflects individual 
responsibilities, skills 
and achievement of 
objectives.

Salary levels (and subsequent 
increases) are set based on role, 
experience, performance and 
consideration of the general 
workforce pay review and 
competitor pay levels. 

Salaries are paid monthly. 

Benefits

To provide market 
consistent benefits.

Pensions

Rewards sustained 
contribution.

Normally reviewed annually with any 
changes taking effect from 
1 January or when an individual 
changes position or responsibility.

Benefits packages typically 
comprise a car (or car allowance), 
health insurance, and life assurance 
although other benefits may be 
provided where appropriate, 
including relocation and expatriation 
expenses as outlined on page 44 of 
this report.
Contribution to a personal pension 
plan (no defined benefit schemes 
operate) and/or a salary supplement 
(e.g. where HMRC limits would 
be exceeded). 

Going forwards, new recruits will 
receive no more than the rate from 
time to time applicable to the 
majority of staff.

None

None

None

No prescribed 
maximum annual 
increase. The 
Committee is guided 
by the general 
increase for the 
Company’s general 
workforce, but on 
occasions may need 
to recognise, for 
example, an increase 
in the scale, scope or 
responsibility of 
the role.
No maximum limit.

Up to 20% of base 
salary for incumbents. 
New Executive 
Directors will receive 
no more than the rate 
from time to time 
available to the 
majority of staff.

The Restaurant Group plc Annual Report 2021  51

O
v
e
r
v
e
w

i

S

i

t
r
a
t
e
g
c
r
e
p
o
r
t

G
o
v
e
r
n
a
n
c
e

i

F
n
a
n
c
a

i

l

s
t
a
t
e
m
e
n
t
s

 
 
 
Directors’ remuneration report continued

Purpose and link to strategy Operation

Opportunity

Performance metrics

Annual bonus Rewards the 

achievement of 
annual financial 
targets and other  
key performance 
indicators, depending 
on job responsibilities, 
which are aligned to 
the strategic needs 
of the business.

Bonus level is determined by the 
Committee after the year-end based 
on performance conditions typically 
drawn up at the start of the 
financial year. 

50% of any bonus is payable in cash. 

50% of any bonus is deferred in 
shares or Nil-cost options with 
awards normally vesting after a 
three-year period. Not pensionable. 

A malus and clawback mechanism 
operates. The Committee has  
the authority to apply a malus 
adjustment to all, or a portion of,  
an outstanding award in specific 
circumstances. The Committee  
also has the authority to recover 
(clawback) all, or a portion of, 
amounts already paid in specific 
circumstances and within a defined 
timeframe. These provisions apply  
to both the cash and deferred 
elements of the annual bonus.

Maximum of 150% 
of base salary.

Normally based on a 
one year performance 
period. 

The annual bonus 
is subject to the 
achievement  
of stretching 
performance 
measures. Financial 
measures will 
account for the 
majority, normally 
based on Group 
Adjusted profit before 
tax or an alternative 
profit measure. 

The Committee may 
vary the metrics and 
weightings from year 
to year according to 
Group strategy. 

The Committee 
retains the ability  
to override the 
out-turn to reduce 
such payment if it 
does not consider  
the out-turn to be 
appropriate in all  
the circumstances.

52  The Restaurant Group plc Annual Report 2021

Purpose and link to strategy Operation

Opportunity

Performance metrics

Restricted 
Share Plan 
(RSP)

Promotes 
achievement  
of long-term  
strategic objectives  
of increasing 
shareholder value and 
aligning the interests 
of participants with 
those of long-term 
shareholders.

Annual grant of Conditional Awards 
calculated as a proportion of base 
salary. The 2020 grant will be 
calculated using a share price of 
52.7p (being the prevailing price on 
the date of the last market update 
prior to consulting with shareholders 
on the RSP). Subsequent grants will 
use the price prevailing at or shortly 
prior to grant (typically based on a 
5-day average).

Maximum of 125% 
of salary

A malus and clawback mechanism 
operates. The Committee has the 
authority to apply this mechanism if, 
in the opinion of the Committee, any 
of the following has occurred:

•  a material misstatement of the 

Company’s results;

•  an error is made in any calculation 
or assessment in relation to an 
award;

•  gross misconduct by a participant;
•  any other adverse circumstances 
materially impacting the reputation 
of the Group or

•  an insolvency of the Company.

The level of vesting 
will be dependent 
upon the Committee 
confirming whether 
any underpin has 
been met as at the 
third anniversary 
of grant. 

All awards to 
Executive Directors 
will be subject to the 
underpin that the 
Committee is satisfied 
that the Award should 
vest and may be 
reduced if it feels  
that there has been 
unsatisfactory 
financial, personal  
or other performance 
over the period. 

In addition, grants in 
2020 will be subject 
to the additional 
requirement, in 
respect of 50% of the 
award, that EBITDA  
in 2022 is at least 
£100m (with EBITDA 
assessed by the 
Committee and 
adjusted for 
acquisitions  
and disposals).

O
v
e
r
v
e
w

i

S

i

t
r
a
t
e
g
c
r
e
p
o
r
t

G
o
v
e
r
n
a
n
c
e

i

F
n
a
n
c
a

i

l

s
t
a
t
e
m
e
n
t
s

The Restaurant Group plc Annual Report 2021  53

 
 
 
Directors’ remuneration report continued

Purpose and link to strategy Operation

Opportunity

Performance metrics

Save As You 
Earn scheme 
(SAYE)

Encourages 
employee share 
ownership and 
therefore increases 
alignment with 
shareholders.

Shareholding 
guidelines

Increase alignment 
with shareholders.

Non-Executive 
Directors’ fees

Attract and retain a 
high-calibre Chairman 
and Non-Executive 
Directors by offering 
market-competitive 
fee levels. 

Reflects fees paid by 
similarly sized 
companies. 

Reflects time 
commitments and 
responsibilities of 
each role.

HMRC approved plan under which 
eligible employees are able to 
purchase shares under a three-year 
savings contract at a discount of up 
to 20% of market value at grant. 

Provides tax advantages to UK 
employees.
Executive Directors must build up 
and maintain a shareholding 
equivalent to 250% of base salary.

Requirement to retain no fewer than 
50% of the net of tax shares vesting 
under an RSP (or legacy LTIP) award 
until the required shareholding is 
achieved.

The requirement will continue to 
apply for 2 years post-cessation 
of employment (with such  
shares valued at the higher of  
the share price on departure and 
subsequently) unless the Committee 
exceptionally determines otherwise.

To enforce such requirement, 
vestings from RSP awards will be 
lodged in escrow until sufficient 
shares are held. 
Fees are normally reviewed annually. 
Fees are paid in cash. 

Chairman is paid a single fee. 
Non-Executive Directors are paid a 
base fee. A Committee Chair fee and 
a Senior Independent Director fee 
is payable to reflect additional 
responsibility. 

The Chairman and the Non-
Executive Directors are entitled  
to reimbursement of reasonable 
expenses including any tax due  
on such payments. They may  
also receive limited travel or 
accommodation-related benefits  
in connection with their role as  
a Director.

Prevailing HMRC 
limits.

None.

N/A

None

None

The Group’s Articles 
of Association place a 
limit on the aggregate 
annual fees of the 
Non-Executive 
Directors of 
£650,000.

As per Executive 
Directors, there is no 
prescribed maximum 
annual increase.

The Committee is 
guided by the 
general increase in 
the Non-Executive 
Director market and 
for the broader UK 
employee population 
but on occasion may 
need to recognise, for 
example, an increase 
in the scale, scope or 
responsibility of 
the role.

This report was approved by the Board of Directors and signed on its behalf by:

Zoe Morgan
Chairman of the Remuneration Committee

15 March 2022

54  The Restaurant Group plc Annual Report 2021

Directors’ report

The Directors present their annual report together with the 
audited financial statements of the Company and the Group 
for the year ended 2 January 2022 with comparative 
information for the year ended 27 December 2020.

The Directors’ report comprises these pages 55 and 56  
and the other sections and pages of the Annual Report and 
Accounts cross-referred to below, which are incorporated by 
reference. As permitted by legislation, certain disclosures 
normally included in the Directors’ report have instead been 
integrated into the Strategic report (pages 4 to 23).

Results and dividends
The results for the year are set out in the consolidated income 
statement on page 70. This shows a statutory loss after tax  
of £38.4m (2020: loss after tax of £124.2m). If the impact of 
exceptional items is excluded then the Group adjusted loss 
after tax is £3.7m (2020: loss of £75.5m). 

The closing mid-market price of the ordinary shares on 
31 December 2021 (the last trading day before 2 January 2022) 
was 94.3p and the range during the financial year was 58.9p 
to 139.6p.

The Directors have currently suspended payment of dividends.

For definitions of the Adjusted Performance Metrics used by 
the Group and how these reconcile to statutory measures,  
see the glossary on pages 116 and 117.

Going Concern
The Directors have adopted the going concern basis in 
preparing the Annual Report and Accounts after assessing the 
Group’s principal risks including the risks arising from Covid-19.

The principal risks and uncertainties are disclosed in the Risk 
Committee report. These have been considered by Directors 
in forming their opinion. The Directors have reviewed financial 
projections to 31 March 2023 (the review period), containing 
both a ‘base case’ and a ‘stress case’. In the ‘base case’, the 
business is allowed to trade normally throughout the period 
without further trading restrictions, specifically the Group has 
forecast sales like-for-like performance to be broadly in line with 
the levels seen in the 33 weeks since trading resumed on 
17 May 2021, and cost inflation of c. 5%. However, in the ‘stress 
case’ a further reduction in sales relating to a further variant of 
Covid-19 is expected in Winter 2022, plus sensitivities have 
been included for a 5% reduction in sales, and an additional 1% 
of cost inflation. In addition, the Group has performed a reverse 
stress case which has shown that the Group could withstand 
a further 6% fall in sales compared to the stress case before 
the covenant levels would be exceeded as at 31 March 2023, 
which in the context of the above the Directors consider remote. 

The projections assume that tranches of the Term Loan facility 
will be repaid to improve balance sheet efficiency, subject to 
a governance process managed by the Board to ensure that 
appropriate liquidity is maintained throughout the review period. 

In both base and stress case forecasts, the Group has 
sufficient liquidity and passes all relevant covenants within the 
review period. These covenants consist of a minimum liquidity 
covenant of £40.0m until the end of December 2022, and a 
leverage covenant test in December 2022, and March 2023. 

Further details of the covenants are in Note 23 to the 
financial statements. 

Following a review of the forecasts above, the Board has 
concluded that the going concern basis remains appropriate 
throughout the review period. 

Directors and Directors’ interests
The names of all persons who were Directors of the Company 
during the year can be found on page 26. Directors’ interests 
in the shares of the Company can be found on page 47.

Directors’ and Officers’ liability (‘D&O’) insurance 
and indemnities
The Company maintains Directors’ and Officers’ liability 
insurance. Details of the D&O insurance maintained by the 
Company can be found on page 27. Deeds were executed in 
2019 indemnifying each of the Directors of the Company as a 
supplement to the D&O insurance cover. Similar deeds have 
been executed for Directors who joined since that date and 
for Directors of subsidiary companies. The indemnities, which 
constitute a qualifying third-party indemnity provision as 
defined by section 234 of the Companies Act 2006, were 
in force during the 2021 financial year and remain in force 
for all current and past Directors of the Company from 2019.

Articles
The Company’s Articles may only be amended by special 
resolution and are available on the Company’s website at 
www.trgplc.com/investors/corporate-governance.

Greenhouse gas reporting
The disclosures concerning greenhouse gas emissions are 
included in the Environmental and Social report on pages 
18 and 19.

Relationships with suppliers, customers and other 
business partners
Details of the Company’s approach to suppliers, customers 
and other business partners are included in the Environmental 
and Social report on pages 16 to 23, while the Company’s 
section 172 Statement on pages 14 and 15 sets out how the 
Directors have taken into account the needs of business 
partners and other stakeholders in decision-making.

Disabled employees
The Company’s policy towards disabled employees is 
included in the Environmental and Social report on page 22.

Employee participation
The action taken during the year in relation to employee 
participation and engagement is included in the Environmental 
and Social report on pages 21 to 23 and the Corporate 
Governance report on pages 27 and 28.

Employee benefit trust (EBT) and share awards
Details of the Company’s EBT arrangements can be found 
on page 100 (Note 21). Dividends on shares held by the EBT 
are waived.

The Company has an all employee Save As You Earn scheme, 
a Restricted Share Plan, and a Long-Term Incentive scheme. 
Details of share-based payments during the year can be found 
on pages 98 to 100 (Note 21).

The Restaurant Group plc Annual Report 2021  55

O
v
e
r
v
e
w

i

S

i

t
r
a
t
e
g
c
r
e
p
o
r
t

G
o
v
e
r
n
a
n
c
e

i

F
n
a
n
c
a

i

l

s
t
a
t
e
m
e
n
t
s

 
 
 
Directors’ report continued

Substantial shareholdings
Details of substantial shareholdings can be found on page 31.

Capital risk management
The Group manages its capital to ensure that it will be able  
to continue as a going concern while looking to maximise 
returns to shareholders. The capital structure of the Group 
consists of equity (comprising issued share capital, other 
reserves and retained earnings), borrowings and cash and 
cash equivalents. The Group monitors its capital structure  
on a regular basis through cash flow projections and 
consideration of the cost of financing its capital.

Details of the Company’s share capital structure can be found 
on page 30.

Financial instruments and financial risk management
The Group’s policy on the use of financial instruments is set 
out in Note 23 to the financial statements. The Group’s 
financial instruments, financial risk management, and the  
key terms and covenants of the debt are set out in Note 23  
to the financial statements.

The Group has entered into various contracts, including leases, 
during the course of ordinary business, some of which may be 
terminated in the event of a change of control of the Company.

Corporate governance
The Company’s statement on corporate governance can be 
found in the Corporate Governance report on page 25. The 
Corporate Governance report forms part of this Directors’ 
report and is incorporated into it by cross-reference.

Political donations 
The Company did not make any political donations during the 
year (2020: nil).

Independent Auditor
A resolution for the re-appointment of Ernst & Young LLP as 
Auditor to the Company will be proposed at the AGM. The 
Directors, on the advice of the Audit Committee, recommend 
their re-appointment.

Disclosure of information to the External Auditor
In the case of each of the persons who are Directors at the 
time the report is approved, the following applies:

•  as far as the Director is aware, there is no relevant audit 

information of which the Company’s Auditor is unaware; and

•  the Director has taken all of the steps that he/she ought to 
have taken as a Director in order to make himself/herself 
aware of any relevant audit information and to establish that 
the Company’s Auditor is aware of that information.

Future developments
The development of the business is set out in the Business 
review in the Strategic report on pages 5 to 8.

By order of the Board.

Kirk Davis
Chief Financial Officer

15 March 2022

56  The Restaurant Group plc Annual Report 2021

Senior Management Risk Committee

This report sets out the Company’s approach to risk 
management, together with detail on the principal risks that 
face the Group and the mitigations we have put in place.

Risk Committee
The role of the Risk Committee is to assist the Board in its 
oversight of the current risk exposures of the Company and 
future risk strategy. The Risk Committee is responsible for 
governance over the Company’s risk management processes, 
monitoring and assessing the effectiveness of the internal 
financial controls and risk management systems and 
reporting on risk management and risk exposures to 
the Audit Committee.

The Committee is chaired by the Chief Financial Officer and 
membership comprises not less than three other members 
of the Senior Management team. It currently includes the 
Company Secretary, the Group Finance Director, the Chief 
Information Officer, the Group People Director, the Group 
Purchasing Director, the Group Property Director and Head 
of Technical Safety. In addition, employees from across the 
business attend Committee meetings by invitation in order 
to assist the Committee in discharging its duties. 

Key roles and responsibilities within the 
Company’s risk management framework

Board

Overall responsibility for risk management

The Board has ultimate responsibility for ensuring 
business risks are effectively managed. 

Audit Committee

Delegated responsibility with regular review  
of risk management procedures

The Board has delegated regular review of the risk 
management procedures to the Audit Committee  
and collectively reviews the overall risk 
environment on an annual basis. 

Risk Committee

Responsibility, review and management of individual 
business risks; aggregation of Group risk register

The Risk Committee is responsible for governance over 
the Company’s risk management processes, monitoring 
and assessing the effectiveness of the internal financial 
controls and risk management systems, and reporting 
on risk management and risk exposures. 

The Risk Committee meets at least four times a year. A risk 
report is tabled at the subsequent Audit Committee meeting 
and the Chief Financial Officer reports to the Audit Committee 
on the Committee’s proceedings. The Committee held four 
meetings in 2021.

Risk management process
Each business unit or functional area of the Group is 
responsible for identifying and assessing its risks at least 
quarterly. This process identifies the gross risk, the likelihood 
of occurrence, mitigating controls in place and the potential 
impact on the Group. The Risk Committee formally reviews 
the divisional/functional risk registers to form the consolidated 
view of the Group’s principal risks.

Given that some risks are external and not fully within our 
control, the risk management processes are designed to 
manage risks, so far as commercially possible, which may 
have a material impact on our business, rather than to fully 
mitigate all risks.

Risk appetite
The UK Corporate Governance Code (2018) requires 
companies to determine their risk appetite in terms of the 
nature and extent of the principal risks faced and those they 
are willing to take in achieving strategic objectives. The Board 
regularly assesses the risks faced by the business and 
considers these when setting the business model and 
strategic objectives for the Group to ensure the business 
operates within appropriate risk parameters.

Emerging risk
The Committee also reviews emerging risks, such as the 
conflict in Ukraine, supply chain disruption and labour 
availability, to ensure that appropriate steps are taken  
at the right time.

Principal risk factors
Set out on the following page is a list of what the Directors,  
in conjunction with the Risk Committee, consider to be the 
current principal risks of the Group together with the mitigation 
plans and risk management strategy. This list is not presumed 
to be exhaustive and is, by its very nature, subject to change.

O
v
e
r
v
e
w

i

S

i

t
r
a
t
e
g
c
r
e
p
o
r
t

G
o
v
e
r
n
a
n
c
e

i

F
n
a
n
c
a

i

l

s
t
a
t
e
m
e
n
t
s

The Restaurant Group plc Annual Report 2021  57

 
 
 
Senior Management Risk Committee continued

Principal risks of the Group together with the mitigation plans and risk management strategy 

Risk
Talent attraction and retention
•  Failure to attract, retain, or develop chefs, GMs, and 

Mitigating factors
•  Implementation of a new recruitment process to enhance 

the quality of team selection.

senior managers.

Allergens
•  Risk of guests suffering from the failure to deliver our 
allergens policies and procedures, or inaccurate or 
insufficient information provided to guests 
concerning allergens.

Cybersecurity
•  Risk of cybersecurity failure or incident leading to data 

loss, disruption of services, fines, and trading or 
reputational damage.

Inflation
•  Risk of significant cost increases across food, drink 

and utilities.

Supply chain management
•  Risk of loss of key supplier, jeopardising supply 

and availability.

•  Risk that the distribution network is unable to meet the 

demands of our restaurants.

Leisure portfolio management
•  Risk of losing profitable Leisure sites due to either lease 
break clauses under the CVA or Chiquito sites retained  
out of the administration. 

Covid-19 (risk of further waves)
•  Risk of further disrupted trading due to new Coronavirus 

variants and Government actions impacting the business’s 
ability to trade fully and/or impact consumer confidence.

•  Continued improvement of onboarding and induction 

process focused on the first 90 days of employment to 
improve employee engagement. 

•  Extension of our apprenticeship schemes across the brands 

to further enhance team development with a particular 
focus on back of house roles.

•  Ongoing review of pay rates to ensure the brands are 

competitive within the regions they trade.

•  Clear allergen policies and procedures established across 

all business operations.

•  Detailed database built up by ingredient/supplier and testing 

of database including physical verification.

•  Allergen training refreshed as part of the reopening training 
and is completed on induction by all restaurant employees 
across all businesses.

•  Allergy advice on menus with daily updates to source data.
•  Payment Card Industry Data Security Standard (PCI DSS) 

v3.2 annual compliance certification process.

•  ASV scans and penetration tests with remediation activities 

completed where required.

•  CyberEssentials certification completed in 2021.
•  Strategic purchasing and category management approach 
so that buyers can mitigate increases through negotiation, 
tender or by alternative supplier selection.

•  Streamlined supply base post restructuring in order to drive 

economies of scale and better purchasing power.

•  Rolling programme of securing either longer- or shorter-term 

contracts to mitigate pricing fluctuations. 

•  Utilities hedging in place for 95% of 2022 volume and c.75% 

of volume for 2023 and 2024.

•  All essential products are dual sourced.
•  Regular monitoring of all logistics partners and key suppliers 

to monitor performance.

•  Proactive contractor performance management reviews.
•  Supply contracts in place with all key suppliers for a 

minimum of 24 months.

•  Ongoing dialogue with landlords and closely monitoring 

breaks and lease expiries.

•  Actively progressing lease regear discussions where an 

appropriate commercial deal can be done with the landlord. 

•  Dedicated external advisory support where appropriate.
•  Equity capital raise and refinancing completed in March 

2021 to strengthen the balance sheet.

•  Operational processes established to react to any Covid-19 

infections among team members.

•  Sites adapted to provide Covid-safe environments with 

enhanced cleaning procedures.

•  High-level plans in place should local or national closure 

be required.

•  Significant increase in delivery trade across Wagamama  
and Leisure brands provides some support for the loss of 
dine-in trade.

58  The Restaurant Group plc Annual Report 2021

Directors’ responsibility statements

Financial statements and accounting records
The Directors are responsible for preparing the Annual 
Report and Accounts in accordance with applicable law  
and regulations. Company law requires the Directors to 
prepare the Group financial statements in accordance with 
international accounting standards in conformity with the 
requirements of the Companies Act 2006, and the Parent 
Company financial statements in accordance with United 
Kingdom Generally Accepted Accounting Practice (United 
Kingdom Accounting Standards and applicable law), including 
Financial Reporting Standard 101 Reduced Disclosure 
Framework (‘FRS 101’). Under company law the Directors 
must not approve the accounts unless they are satisfied 
that they give a true and fair view of the state of affairs of 
the Company and of the profit or loss of the Company for 
that period.

In preparing the Group financial statements, International 
Accounting Standard 1 requires that Directors:

•  properly select and apply accounting policies;

•  present information, including accounting policies, in a 

manner that provides relevant, reliable, comparable and 
understandable information;

•  provide additional disclosures when compliance with the 
specific requirements in international financial reporting 
standards (IFRSs) adopted pursuant to Regulation (EC) 
No 1606/2002 as it applies in the European Union are 
insufficient to enable users to understand the impact of 
particular transactions, other events and conditions on the 
entity’s financial position and financial performance; and

•  make an assessment of the Group’s ability to continue 

as a going concern.

In preparing the Parent Company financial statements, 
the Directors are required to:

•  select suitable accounting policies and then apply 

them consistently;

•  make judgements and accounting estimates that are 

reasonable and prudent;

•  state whether applicable UK Accounting Standards have 

been followed; and

•  prepare the financial statements on the going concern basis 
unless it is inappropriate to presume that the Company will 
continue in business.

The Directors are responsible for keeping adequate 
accounting records that are sufficient to show and explain 
the Company’s transactions and disclose with reasonable 
accuracy at any time the financial position of the Company, 
and enable them to ensure that the financial statements 
comply with the Companies Act 2006. They are also 
responsible for safeguarding the assets of the Company 
and hence for taking reasonable steps for the prevention 
and detection of fraud and other irregularities.

The Directors are responsible for the maintenance and 
integrity of the corporate and financial information included 
on the Company’s website. Legislation in the UK governing 
the preparation and dissemination of financial statements 
may differ from legislation in other jurisdictions.

Disclosure and Transparency Rules
The Board confirms that to the best of its knowledge:

•  the financial statements, prepared in accordance with the 
IFRSs as adopted by the European Union, give a true and 
fair view of the assets, liabilities, financial position and profit 
or loss of the Company and the undertakings included in 
the consolidation taken as a whole; and

•  the Strategic report includes a fair review of the 

development and performance of the business and the 
position of the Company and the undertakings included 
in the consolidation taken as a whole, together with a 
description of the principal risks and uncertainties that 
they face.

UK Corporate Governance Code
The Annual Report and Accounts, taken as a whole, are fair, 
balanced and understandable and provide the necessary 
information for shareholders to assess the Company’s 
performance, business model and strategy.

For and on behalf of the Board.

Andy Hornby 
Chief Executive Officer 

Kirk Davis
Chief Financial Officer

15 March 2022 

15 March 2022

O
v
e
r
v
e
w

i

S

i

t
r
a
t
e
g
c
r
e
p
o
r
t

G
o
v
e
r
n
a
n
c
e

i

F
n
a
n
c
a

i

l

s
t
a
t
e
m
e
n
t
s

The Restaurant Group plc Annual Report 2021  59

 
 
 
Independent Auditor’s report
to the members of The Restaurant Group plc

Opinion
In our opinion:

•  The Restaurant Group plc’s group financial statements and Parent Company financial statements (the “financial statements”) 

give a true and fair view of the state of the Group’s and of the Parent Company’s affairs as at 2 January 2022 and of the 
Group’s loss for the year then ended;

•  the Group financial statements have been properly prepared in accordance with International Accounting Standards in 
conformity with the requirements of the Companies Act 2006 and International Financial Reporting Standards adopted 
pursuant to Regulation (EC) No. 1606/2002 as it applies in the European Union; 

•  the Parent Company financial statements have been properly prepared in accordance with United Kingdom Generally 

Accepted Accounting Practice; and

•  the financial statements have been prepared in accordance with the requirements of the Companies Act 2006.

We have audited the financial statements of The Restaurant Group plc (the ‘Parent Company’) and its subsidiaries (the ‘Group’) 
for the year ended 2 January 2022 which comprise:

Group
Consolidated balance sheet as at 2 January 2022
Consolidated income statement for the year then ended
Consolidated statement of changes in equity for the year 
then ended
Consolidated statement of cash flows for the year 
then ended
Related Notes 1 to 26 to the financial statements, including 
a summary of significant accounting policies

Parent Company
Balance sheet as at 2 January 2022
Statement of changes in equity for the year then ended
Related Notes 1 to 7 to the financial statements including 
a summary of significant accounting policies

The financial reporting framework that has been applied in the preparation of the Group financial statements is applicable law 
and International Accounting Standards in conformity with the requirements of the Companies Act 2006 and International 
Financial Reporting Standards adopted pursuant to Regulation (EC) No. 1606/2002 as it applies in the European Union. The 
financial reporting framework that has been applied in the preparation of the Parent Company financial statements is applicable 
law and United Kingdom Accounting Standards, including FRS 101 “Reduced Disclosure Framework” (United Kingdom 
Generally Accepted Accounting Practice).

Basis for opinion 
We conducted our audit in accordance with International Standards on Auditing (UK) (ISAs (UK)) and applicable law. 
Our responsibilities under those standards are further described in the Auditor’s responsibilities for the audit of the financial 
statements section of our report. We believe that the audit evidence we have obtained is sufficient and appropriate to provide 
a basis for our opinion

Independence
We are independent of the Group and parent in accordance with the ethical requirements that are relevant to our audit of the 
financial statements in the UK, including the FRC’s Ethical Standard as applied to listed public interest entities, and we have 
fulfilled our other ethical responsibilities in accordance with these requirements. 

The non-audit services prohibited by the FRC’s Ethical Standard were not provided to the Group or the Parent Company and 
we remain independent of the Group and the Parent Company in conducting the audit. 

60  The Restaurant Group plc Annual Report 2021

Conclusions relating to going concern
In auditing the financial statements, we have concluded that the Directors’ use of the going concern basis of accounting in the 
preparation of the financial statements is appropriate. Our evaluation of the Directors’ assessment of the Group and Parent 
Company’s ability to continue to adopt the going concern basis of accounting included the following:

•  We confirmed our understanding of the Group’s going concern assessment process and Management’s related Board 

memoranda.

•  We assessed the appropriateness of the duration of the going concern review period to the end of March 2023 and 

considered whether there are any known events or conditions that will occur beyond the period.

•  We obtained cash flow forecast models used by the Board in its assessment, checked their arithmetical accuracy.

•  We agreed the debt facilities included in the model to executed debt agreements and confirmed the calculation of covenants 

against the terms of these agreements.

•  We understood the Board level governance process to maintain sufficient headroom should these debt facilities be partially 

early repaid in the review period, and confirmed appropriate disclosure around this.

•  We challenged whether the assumptions included within the base and stress cases are appropriate, including those relating 
to Covid-19 trading recovery affecting revenue and inflation, by comparing them to internal Board approved budgets and 
external sources such as industry benchmarks.

•  We challenged the adequacy of liquidity and covenant headroom in the base and stress case forecasts and applied additional 

sensitivity analysis on revenue and cost inflation as these are the most sensitive assumptions, in order to understand the 
Group’s resilience to a range of downside scenarios.

•  We confirmed the calculation of the reverse stress test scenario and considered the likelihood of occurrence as remote.

•  We read the Board minutes to identify any matters that may impact the going concern assessment. 

•  We assessed the appropriateness of the going concern disclosures in describing the risks associated with the Group’s ability 

to continue as a going concern for the review period to the end of March 2023.

The material uncertainty related to going concern which existed in the financial statements for the period ended 27 December 
2020 has been resolved as a result of the capital issue receiving shareholder approval on 29 March 2021. 

We reported to the Audit Committee that the assessment of going concern was based on the repayment profile of the term loan 
as projected in the forecasts and that therefore any variations from this assumption in the review period are assumed to be 
managed by the Board in a manner so as to maintain appropriate levels of headroom. 

Based on the work we have performed, we have not identified any material uncertainties relating to events or conditions that, 
individually or collectively, may cast significant doubt on the Group or the Parent Company’s ability to continue as a going 
concern for the review period to the end of March 2023. 

In relation to the Group and Parent Company’s reporting on how they have applied the UK Corporate Governance Code, we 
have nothing material to add or draw attention to in relation to the Directors’ statement in the financial statements about whether 
the Directors considered it appropriate to adopt the going concern basis of accounting.

Our responsibilities and the responsibilities of the Directors with respect to going concern are described in the relevant sections 
of this report. However, because not all future events or conditions can be predicted, this statement is not a guarantee as to the 
Group’s ability to continue as a going concern.

O
v
e
r
v
e
w

i

S

i

t
r
a
t
e
g
c
r
e
p
o
r
t

G
o
v
e
r
n
a
n
c
e

i

F
n
a
n
c

i

a

l

s
t
a
t
e
m
e
n
t
s

The Restaurant Group plc Annual Report 2021  61

 
 
 
Independent Auditor’s report continued

Overview of our audit approach

Audit scope

•  We performed an audit of the complete financial information of the 2 components. 
•  The components that we performed full audit procedures accounted for 100% 
of EBITDA before exceptional items, 100% of revenue and 100% of total assets 
of the Group.

Key audit matters

•  Impairment of property, plant and equipment and right of use asset
•  Management override in the recognition of revenue

Materiality

•  Overall Group materiality of £2.7m which represents 2.4% of EBITDA before 

exceptional items.

An overview of the scope of the Parent Company and Group audits 
Tailoring the scope
Our assessment of audit risk, our evaluation of materiality and our allocation of performance materiality determine our audit 
scope for each company within the Group. Taken together, this enables us to form an opinion on the consolidated financial 
statements. We take into account size, risk profile, the organisation of the Group and effectiveness of group-wide controls, 
changes in the business environment and other factors when assessing the level of work to be performed at each component.

The Group’s operations are almost entirely based within the United Kingdom, with a small franchise operation (and JV interest) 
outside of the UK but all accounted for within the UK.

We performed an audit of the complete financial information of the Group’s two components (2020: two components):

1. Wagamama; and 

2. Leisure restaurants, Concessions and Pub operations. 

Both components are accounted for in its London offices. 

Our full scope procedures covered 100% of EBITDA before exceptional items, 100% of revenue and 100% of total assets of 
the Group (2020: same coverage). We obtained an understanding of the entity-level controls of the Group which assisted us 
in identifying and assessing risks of material misstatement due to fraud or error, as well as assisting us in determining the most 
appropriate audit strategy. 

Climate change 
There has been increasing interest from stakeholders as to how climate change will impact companies. The Group has set out 
its environmental agenda in the Environmental and social report section of the Annual report, including its ambition to achieve 
a net zero emissions carbon target by 2035, which forms part of the “Other information,” rather than the audited financial 
statements. Our procedures on these disclosures therefore consisted solely of considering whether they are materially 
inconsistent with the financial statements and our knowledge obtained in the course of the audit or otherwise appear to be 
materially misstated. 

As explained in the Basis of Preparation (Note 1(c) in the financial statements), governmental and consumer responses to 
climate change risks are still developing, and are interdependent upon each other, and consequently financial statements 
cannot capture all possible future outcomes as these are not yet known. The degree of certainty of these changes may also 
mean that they cannot be taken into account when determining asset and liability valuations and the timing of future cash flows 
under the requirements of the IFRS financial accounting framework upon which the financial statements are based. However, at 
this point the Company’s assessment is that there is not a material impact on the financial statements from climate change.

62  The Restaurant Group plc Annual Report 2021

Our audit effort in considering climate change was focused on ensuring that the company’s assertion that there was no material 
impact on the financial statements was consistent with our audit work, particularly in relation to asset values and associated 
disclosures where values are determined through modelling future cash flows, such as impairment of Property, plant & 
equipment and right of use assets, and in the determination of asset lives for indefinite life intangible assets. We also challenged 
the Directors’ considerations of climate change in their assessment of going concern and viability and associated disclosures. 

Whilst the Company has stated its commitment to achieve net zero emissions by 2035, the Company is currently unable 
to determine the full future economic impact on their business model, operational plans and customers to achieve this 
and therefore as set out above the potential impacts are not fully incorporated in these financial statements.

Key audit matters 
Key audit matters are those matters that, in our professional judgement, were of most significance in our audit of the financial 
statements of the current period and include the most significant assessed risks of material misstatement (whether or not due to 
fraud) that we identified. These matters included those which had the greatest effect on: the overall audit strategy, the allocation of 
resources in the audit; and directing the efforts of the engagement team. These matters were addressed in the context of our audit 
of the financial statements as a whole, and in our opinion thereon, and we do not provide a separate opinion on these matters.

Key observations communicated 
to the Audit Committee 

Based on our audit 
procedures we have 
concluded the impairment 
charge and reversal credit are 
appropriately determined. We 
highlighted that a reasonably 
possible change in certain key 
assumptions including sales 
forecasts and risk adjustment 
factors could lead to material 
additional impairment charges 
or reversals in the future. 
We concluded appropriate 
disclosures had been 
included by Management 
for the above assumptions.

Risk

Our response to the risk

Impairment of property, plant and 
equipment and right-of-use asset 
(2021: £574.5m net book value and 
£25.9m net impairment charge; 
2020: £669.2m net book value and 
£142.9m net impairment charge)

Refer to the Audit Committee report 
(page 34; Accounting policies (page 79); 
and Note 14 of the Consolidated 
Financial Statements (page 93)

At 2 January 2022 TRG operated c.400 
sites (2020: c.400) which comprise the 
majority of the Group’s property, plant 
and equipment (PPE) and right of use 
asset balance. As at 2 January 2022 the 
carrying value of PPE is £285.1m (2020: 
£300.3m) and right-of-use asset is 
£289.4m (2020: £368.9m). 

Management assessed for impairment 
indicators across all the Group’s 
cash-generating units (CGUs), 
considering a range of indicators 
including a CGU’s performance against 
budget and forecast EBITDA.

Impairment for tangible assets is tested 
on the basis of each individual cash 
generating unit (CGU) – an individual 
restaurant or pub site or multiple sites 
that are in close proximity such as 
airports where trading is interdependent.

We gained an understanding through a walkthrough 
of the process and controls management has in 
place over the impairment process.

We validated that the methodology of the 
impairment exercise continues to be consistent with 
the requirements of IAS 36 Impairment of Assets, 
including appropriate identification of cash 
generating units for value in use calculations.

We confirmed the mathematical accuracy of 
the models. 

Below we summarise the procedures performed 
in relation to the key judgements for the tangible 
(PP&E and ROUA) assets impairment review:

We analysed Management’s forecasts underlying 
the impairment review against past and current 
performance and external future economic forecasts 
incorporating the impact of future Covid variants on 
the hospitality sector in the UK. 

We critically challenged and assessed the 
reasonableness of Management’s recovery 
assumptions.

We re-performed sensitivity analysis based on 
reasonable possible changes to key assumptions 
determined by Management being revenue, 
discount rate and long-term growth rate.

O
v
e
r
v
e
w

i

S

i

t
r
a
t
e
g
c
r
e
p
o
r
t

G
o
v
e
r
n
a
n
c
e

i

F
n
a
n
c

i

a

l

s
t
a
t
e
m
e
n
t
s

The Restaurant Group plc Annual Report 2021  63

 
 
 
Independent Auditor’s report continued

Risk

Our response to the risk

Key observations communicated 
to the Audit Committee 

Impairment of property, plant and 
equipment and right of use asset 
continued

This is a significant risk due to the level of 
Management judgement required in the 
assumptions determining the impairment 
assessment. There were indicators of 
impairment across the Group following 
Covid-19 national lockdowns and 
restrictions in the UK, and indicators of 
impairment reversals at certain sites 
which have improved trading prospects 
as a result of the complete reopening of 
the hospitality sector and the gradual 
improvement in international travel levels, 
hence the actual trading performing has 
been better that the budget in previous 
impairment assessments. 

The main assumptions are revenue 
recovery post Covid-19, related cost 
profile, discount rate, the long-term 
growth rate, cash flow forecasts and the 
risk factors for the impairment reversal.

The impairment charge is treated as 
exceptional in the Income Statement.

We performed sensitivity analysis on three further 
scenarios – another Covid wave forecast in Winter 
2022 having a similar impact to the recent Omicron 
wave, general sales sensitivity of 5% decline for 
months not impacted by the wave and 1% increase 
in cost inflation. Considering these sensitivity 
parameters, along with the repayment of term loan 
during the going concern review period, the forecast 
shows sufficient headroom in terms of liquidity in 
both, base case and downside scenarios. 

We engaged our EY internal specialists to 
independently calculate the appropriate discount 
rate range and compare it to the discount rate 
applied in the models by Management. 

We assessed if there were indicators of impairment 
reversal given the restructure of the rent base and 
the change in plans for some sites; and assessed 
Management’s estimate of the reversal value, 
challenging whether the risk factor adjustments 
applied to the calculation reasonably reflected the 
considerable uncertainties surrounding the 
prospects for the relevant sites.

We assessed the disclosures in notes to the 
financial statements against the requirements 
of IAS 36 Impairment of Assets, in particular the 
requirement to disclose further sensitivities for 
CGUs where a reasonably possible change in a key 
assumption would cause an impairment. We also 
assessed the related exceptional item accounting 
treatment by reference to the Company’s 
accounting policy, industry practice and the 
FRC guidance.

Scope of our procedures
We performed full scope audit procedures on 
the impairment exercise carried out on all of the 
Group’s restaurant and pub portfolio.

64  The Restaurant Group plc Annual Report 2021

Key observations communicated 
to the Audit Committee 

We concluded that revenue 
was reasonably stated.

We did not identify any 
instances of Management 
override in relation to 
revenue.

Risk

Our response to the risk

Management override in the 
recognition of revenue (2021: 
£636.3m; 2020: £459.8m)

Refer to the Accounting policies (page 
74); and Note 4 of the Consolidated 
Financial Statements (page 83)

There is a presumption within auditing 
standards that revenue recognition is a 
significant risk and a fraud risk. TRG’s 
revenue is typically comprised of a large 
number of low value and non-complex 
transactions, with no judgement applied 
over the amount recorded. 

Thus, we consider the prime risk relating 
to revenue to be around Management 
override of controls and topside journals 
to revenue across the two components, 
resulting in revenue being overstated or 
not recorded.

We gained an understanding through a walkthrough 
of the process and controls that Management has in 
place over the recording of revenue, including the 
recording of top side journal adjustments. 

We applied correlation data analysis over the 
Group’s entire revenue journal population to identify 
how much of the Group’s revenue is converted to 
cash postings and to isolate non-standard revenue 
transactions for further analysis, focusing our 
testing on higher risk transactions identified. We 
selected the higher risk journal entries and other 
adjustments for testing throughout the period and 
paid special attention to the adjustments made at 
or near the end of the reporting period, post-closing 
adjustments and other adjustments made to record 
transactions outside the normal course of business 
and performed substantive procedures to obtain 
sufficient appropriate audit evidence that those 
entries were properly supported and approved.

We searched for any topside journals to revenue. 

We performed cut-off testing procedures including 
review of post period end cash receipts and 
journals, and an analytical review of significant 
variances to the prior year, to assess for 
completeness.

Scope of our procedures
We performed full scope audit procedures over all 
of the Group’s revenue, as performed by the 
integrated Group audit team.

In the prior year, our Auditor’s report included key audit matters in relation to going concern and the adoption of IFRS 16 Leases, 
both of which had heightened risk at the time but have a lower risk in 2021 due to the successful equity issue followed by 
a £500m refinancing in March 2021 and IFRS 16 has now been adopted by the Group. 

Our application of materiality
We apply the concept of materiality in planning and performing the audit, in evaluating the effect of identified misstatements on 
the audit and in forming our audit opinion. 

O
v
e
r
v
e
w

i

S

i

t
r
a
t
e
g
c
r
e
p
o
r
t

G
o
v
e
r
n
a
n
c
e

i

F
n
a
n
c

i

a

l

s
t
a
t
e
m
e
n
t
s

The Restaurant Group plc Annual Report 2021  65

 
 
 
Independent Auditor’s report continued

Materiality
The magnitude of an omission or misstatement that, individually or in the aggregate, could reasonably be expected to influence 
the economic decisions of the users of the financial statements. Materiality provides a basis for determining the nature and 
extent of our audit procedures. 

We determined materiality for the Group to be £2.7m (2020: £2.8m), which is 2.4% of EBITDA before exceptional items (2020: 
5% of normalised profit before taxation and exceptional items). We have assessed that EBITDA before exceptional items is an 
appropriate materiality basis for 2021 due its prominence in financial reporting to the Group’s equity and debt stakeholders in 
the context of the Group which remains loss-making at the pre-tax level and has not returned to a normalised level of profits yet.

Starting  
basis

•  EBITDA – £118.1m

Adjustments

•  Exceptional items before tax – £2.9m

•  EBITDA before exceptional items – £115.2m (materiality basis)

Materiality

•  Materiality of £2.7m (2.4% of materiality basis)

We determined materiality for the Parent Company to be £6.8m (2020: £5.0m, which is 2% (2020: 2%) of net assets. 

During the course of our audit, we reassessed initial materiality to ensure it is updated appropriately to take into account the 
most appropriate metrics for the users of the financial statements. 

Performance materiality
The application of materiality at the individual account or balance level. It is set at an amount to reduce to an appropriately low 
level the probability that the aggregate of uncorrected and undetected misstatements exceeds materiality.

On the basis of our risk assessments, together with our assessment of the Group’s overall control environment, our judgement 
was that performance materiality was 50% (2020: 50%) of our planning materiality, namely £1.4m (2020: £1.4m). We have set 
performance materiality at this percentage reflecting the incidence of audit differences identified in the previous year.

Audit work at component locations for the purpose of obtaining audit coverage over significant financial statement accounts 
is undertaken based on a percentage of total performance materiality. The performance materiality set for each component 
is based on the relative scale and risk of the component to the Group as a whole and our assessment of the risk of 
misstatement at that component. In the current year, the performance materiality allocated to components was £1.0m. 

Reporting threshold
An amount below which identified misstatements are considered as being clearly trivial.

We agreed with the Audit Committee that we would report to them all uncorrected audit differences in excess of £0.14m 
(2020: £0.14m), which is set at 5% of planning materiality, as well as differences below that threshold that, in our view, 
warranted reporting on qualitative grounds. 

We evaluate any uncorrected misstatements against both the quantitative measures of materiality discussed above and in light 
of other relevant qualitative considerations in forming our opinion.

66  The Restaurant Group plc Annual Report 2021

Other information 
The other information comprises the information included in the Annual report set out on pages 1 to 69 other than the financial 
statements and our Auditor’s report thereon. The Directors are responsible for the other information contained within the 
Annual report. 

Our opinion on the financial statements does not cover the other information and, except to the extent otherwise explicitly 
stated in this report, we do not express any form of assurance conclusion thereon. 

Our responsibility is to read the other information and, in doing so, consider whether the other information is materially 
inconsistent with the financial statements or our knowledge obtained in the course of the audit or otherwise appears to be 
materially misstated. If we identify such material inconsistencies or apparent material misstatements, we are required to 
determine whether there is a material misstatement in the financial statements themselves. If, based on the work we have 
performed, we conclude that there is a material misstatement of the other information, we are required to report that fact.

We have nothing to report in this regard.

Opinions on other matters prescribed by the Companies Act 2006
In our opinion, the part of the Directors’ remuneration report to be audited has been properly prepared in accordance with the 
Companies Act 2006.

In our opinion, based on the work undertaken in the course of the audit:

•  the information given in the Strategic report and the Directors’ report for the financial year for which the financial statements 

are prepared is consistent with the financial statements; and 

•  the Strategic report and the Directors’ report have been prepared in accordance with applicable legal requirements.

Matters on which we are required to report by exception
In the light of the knowledge and understanding of the Group and the Parent Company and its environment obtained in the 
course of the audit, we have not identified material misstatements in the Strategic report or the Directors’ report.

We have nothing to report in respect of the following matters in relation to which the Companies Act 2006 requires us to report 
to you if, in our opinion:

•  adequate accounting records have not been kept by the Parent Company, or returns adequate for our audit have not been 

received from branches not visited by us; or

•  the Parent Company financial statements and the part of the Directors’ remuneration report to be audited are not in 

agreement with the accounting records and returns; or

•  certain disclosures of Directors’ remuneration specified by law are not made; or

•  we have not received all the information and explanations we require for our audit

Corporate Governance Statement
The Listing Rules require us to review the Directors’ statement in relation to going concern, longer-term viability and that part of 
the Corporate Governance Statement relating to the Group and Company’s compliance with the provisions of the UK Corporate 
Governance Code specified for our review.

Based on the work undertaken as part of our audit, we have concluded that each of the following elements of the Corporate 
Governance Statement is materially consistent with the financial statements or our knowledge obtained during the audit:

•  Directors’ statement with regards to the appropriateness of adopting the going concern basis of accounting and any material 

uncertainties identified set out on page 55;

•  Directors’ explanation as to its assessment of the Company’s prospects, the period this assessment covers and why the 

period is appropriate set out on page 55;

•  Directors’ statement on fair, balanced and understandable set out on page 59;

•  Board’s confirmation that it has carried out a robust assessment of the emerging and principal risks set out on page 58;

•  The section of the annual report that describes the review of effectiveness of risk management and internal control systems 

set out on page 30 and;

•  The section describing the work of the Audit Committee set out on page 34

O
v
e
r
v
e
w

i

S

i

t
r
a
t
e
g
c
r
e
p
o
r
t

G
o
v
e
r
n
a
n
c
e

i

F
n
a
n
c

i

a

l

s
t
a
t
e
m
e
n
t
s

The Restaurant Group plc Annual Report 2021  67

 
 
 
Independent Auditor’s report continued

Responsibilities of Directors
As explained more fully in the Directors’ responsibilities statement set out on page 59, the Directors are responsible for the 
preparation of the financial statements and for being satisfied that they give a true and fair view, and for such internal control as 
the Directors determine is necessary to enable the preparation of financial statements that are free from material misstatement, 
whether due to fraud or error. 

In preparing the financial statements, the Directors are responsible for assessing the Group and Parent Company’s ability to 
continue as a going concern, disclosing, as applicable, matters related to going concern and using the going concern basis 
of accounting unless the Directors either intend to liquidate the Group or the Parent Company or to cease operations, or have 
no realistic alternative but to do so.

Auditor’s responsibilities for the audit of the financial statements 
Our objectives are to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements as a whole are free from material 
misstatement, whether due to fraud or error, and to issue an Auditor’s report that includes our opinion. Reasonable assurance 
is a high level of assurance, but is not a guarantee that an audit conducted in accordance with ISAs (UK) will always detect a 
material misstatement when it exists. Misstatements can arise from fraud or error and are considered material if, individually or 
in the aggregate, they could reasonably be expected to influence the economic decisions of users taken on the basis of these 
financial statements.

Explanation as to what extent the audit was considered capable of detecting irregularities, including fraud 
Irregularities, including fraud, are instances of non-compliance with laws and regulations. We design procedures in line with 
our responsibilities, outlined above, to detect irregularities, including fraud. The risk of not detecting a material misstatement 
due to fraud is higher than the risk of not detecting one resulting from error, as fraud may involve deliberate concealment by, 
for example, forgery or intentional misrepresentations, or through collusion. The extent to which our procedures are capable 
of detecting irregularities, including fraud is detailed below.

However, the primary responsibility for the prevention and detection of fraud rests with both those charged with governance 
of the Company and Management.

•  We obtained an understanding of the legal and regulatory frameworks that are applicable to the Group and determined that 
the most significant are Companies Act 2006, Health & Safety and food hygiene laws, Minimum Wage regulations and the 
UK Corporate Governance Code 2018.

•  We understood how The Restaurant Group plc is complying with those frameworks by making enquires of Management 

and those responsible for legal and compliance procedures, including the Company Secretary. We corroborated our enquires 
through our review of board minutes, papers provided to the Audit and Risk Committees and correspondence received from 
regulatory bodies. 

•  We assessed the susceptibility of the Group’s financial statements to material misstatement, including how fraud might 
occur by meeting with Management within various part of the business to understand where they considered there was 
susceptibility to fraud. We also considered performance targets and their influence on efforts made by Management to 
manage earnings or influence the perception of analysts. Where the risk was considered to be higher, we performed audit 
procedures to address each identified fraud risk. These procedures included testing manual journals and were designed to 
provide reasonable assurance that the financial statements were free from material fraud or error.

•  Based on this understanding we designed our audit procedures to identify non-compliance with such laws and regulations 

that could create a material error in the financial statements. Forensic specialists assisted us in designing our audit approach 
and verified our identified risks. Our procedures included a review of Board minutes to identify noncompliance with laws and 
regulations, a review of the reporting to the Audit Committee on compliance and regulations, enquires of the Company 
Secretary and Management, and journal entry review.

A further description of our responsibilities for the audit of the financial statements is located on the Financial Reporting 
Council’s website at https://www.frc.org.uk/auditorsresponsibilities. This description forms part of our Auditor’s report.

68  The Restaurant Group plc Annual Report 2021

Other matters we are required to address 
•  Following the recommendation from the Audit Committee we were appointed by the Company on 25 May 2021 to audit the 

financial statements for the year ending 2 January 2022 and subsequent financial periods.

•  The period of total uninterrupted engagement including previous renewals and reappointments is four years, covering the 

years ending 30 December 2018 to 2 January 2022.

•  We obtained approval from the FRC to provide non-audit services to the Group or the Parent Company that exceed the 70% 

fee cap. 

•  The audit opinion is consistent with the additional report to the Audit Committee

Use of our report
This report is made solely to the Company’s members, as a body, in accordance with Chapter 3 of Part 16 of the Companies 
Act 2006. Our audit work has been undertaken so that we might state to the Company’s members those matters we are 
required to state to them in an auditor’s report and for no other purpose. To the fullest extent permitted by law, we do not accept 
or assume responsibility to anyone other than the Company and the Company’s members as a body, for our audit work, for this 
report, or for the opinions we have formed.

Bob Forsyth (Senior Statutory Auditor)
for and on behalf of Ernst & Young LLP, Statutory Auditor

London 
15 March 2022

O
v
e
r
v
e
w

i

S

i

t
r
a
t
e
g
c
r
e
p
o
r
t

G
o
v
e
r
n
a
n
c
e

i

F
n
a
n
c

i

a

l

s
t
a
t
e
m
e
n
t
s

The Restaurant Group plc Annual Report 2021  69

 
 
 
Consolidated income statement

Revenue

Cost of sales
Gross profit/(loss)

Share of results of associate
Administration costs

Operating profit/(loss)

Interest payable
Interest receivable
Loss on ordinary activities before tax

Tax on profit/(loss) from ordinary 
activities

Note

5

8
8

9

53 weeks ended 2 January 2022

52 weeks ended 27 December 2020

Trading
business
£m
636.6

(548.2)
88.4

(0.3)
(51.0)

Exceptional 
items
(Note 7)
£m
–

(21.4)
(21.4)

–
(1.6)

Total
£m
636.6

(569.6)
67.0

(0.3)
(52.6)

Trading 
business
£m
459.8

(470.6)
(10.8)

(0.6)
(38.3)

Exceptional 
items* 
(Note 7) 
£m
–

(37.8)
(37.8)

–
(7.6)

Total 
£m
459.8

(508.4)
(48.6)

(0.6)
(45.9)

37.1

(23.0)

14.1

(49.7)

(45.4)

(95.1)

(45.7)
0.6
(8.0)

(1.9)
–
(24.9)

(47.6)
0.6
(32.9)

(38.2)
0.4
(87.5)

–
–
(45.4)

(38.2)
0.4
(132.9)

4.3

(9.8)

(5.5)

12.0

(3.3)

8.7

Loss for the year

(3.7)

(34.7)

(38.4)

(75.5)

(48.7)

(124.2)

Other comprehensive income
Foreign exchange differences arising on 
consolidation
Total comprehensive loss
Loss per share (pence)
Rights adjusted basic*
Rights adjusted diluted*

10
10

*  Restated – refer to Note 2

EBITDA
Depreciation, amortisation and 
impairment

0.1
(3.6)

(0.5)
(0.5)

–
(34.7)

–
–

0.1
(38.3)

(5.3)
(5.3)

0.1
(75.4)

(13.4)
(13.4)

–
(48.7)

–
–

0.1
(124.1)

(22.1)
(22.1)

115.2

2.9

118.1

53.4

97.5

150.9

(78.1)

(25.9)

(104.0)

(103.1)

(142.9)

(246.0)

Operating profit/(loss) for the year

37.1

(23.0)

14.1

(49.7)

(45.4)

(95.1)

70  The Restaurant Group plc Annual Report 2021

 
Consolidated balance sheet

Non-current assets
Intangible assets
Right of use assets
Property, plant and equipment
Derivative financial instruments
Trade and other receivables

Current assets
Inventory
Trade and other receivables
Prepayments
Corporation tax debtor
Cash and cash equivalents

Total assets

Current liabilities
Trade and other payables
Provisions
Lease liabilities

Net current liabilities

Long-term borrowings
Other payables 
Deferred tax liabilities
Provisions
Lease liabilities

Total liabilities
Net assets

Equity
Share capital
Share premium
Other reserves
Retained earnings
Total equity

*  Restated – refer to Note 2

Note

11
12
13
23
15, 18

15, 18

23

16
17
18

23

19
17
18

20

At  
2 January  
2022
£m

At  
27 December 
2020*
£m

599.9
289.4
285.1
2.1
4.7
1,181.2

6.0
13.9
6.1
–
146.5
172.5
1,353.7

(128.3)
(6.0)
(73.1)
(207.4)
(34.9)

(318.1)
–
(41.9)
(9.3)
(337.3)
(706.6)
(914.0)
439.7

215.2
394.1
0.1
(169.7)
439.7

599.5
368.9
300.3
–
3.0
1,271.7

5.1
16.1
8.8
0.1
40.7
70.8
1,342.5

(116.7)
(4.3)
(91.5)
(212.5)
(141.7)

(381.1)
(1.3)
(39.7)
(8.3)
(392.3)
(822.7)
(1,035.2)
307.3

165.9
276.6
(3.9)
(131.3)
307.3

The financial statements of The Restaurant Group plc (company registration number: SC030343) on pages 70 to 106 were 
approved by the Board of Directors and authorised for issue on 15 March 2022 and were signed on its behalf by:

Andy Hornby (CEO) 

Kirk Davis (CFO)

The Restaurant Group plc Annual Report 2021  71

O
v
e
r
v
e
w

i

S

i

t
r
a
t
e
g
c
r
e
p
o
r
t

G
o
v
e
r
n
a
n
c
e

i

F
n
a
n
c

i

a

l

s
t
a
t
e
m
e
n
t
s

 
 
 
Consolidated statement of changes in equity

Balance at 29 December 2019
Adjustment for IFRS 16 transition
Balance at 30 December 2019 (revised)
Loss for the year*
Other comprehensive income
Total comprehensive income/(loss)

Gross proceeds from share issue
Share issue transaction costs
Share-based payments 
Deferred tax on share-based payments taken 
directly to other reserves

Balance at 27 December 2020
Loss for the year
Other comprehensive income
Total comprehensive income/(loss)

Gross proceeds from share issue
Share issue transaction costs
Share-based payments 
Deferred tax on share-based payments taken 
directly to other reserves

Share
capital
£m
138.2
–
138.2
–
–
–

27.7
–
–

–

165.9
–
–
–

49.3
–
–

–

Share
premium
£m
249.7
–
249.7
–
–
–

29.3
(2.4)
–

–

276.6
–
–
–

125.9
(8.4)
–

–

Note

19

19

Balance at 2 January 2022

215.2

394.1

*  Restated – refer to Note 2

Other
reserves
£m
(5.9)
–
(5.9)
–
0.1
0.1

–
–
2.0

(0.1)

(3.9)
–
0.1
0.1

–
–
3.4

0.5

0.1

Retained
earnings
£m
19.9
(27.0)
(7.1)
(124.2)
–
(124.2)

–
–
–

–

(131.3)
(38.4)
–
(38.4)

–
–
–

–

Total
£m
401.9
(27.0)
374.9
(124.2)
0.1
(124.1)

57.0
(2.4)
2.0

(0.1)

307.3
(38.4)
0.1
(38.3)

175.2
(8.4)
3.4

0.5

(169.7)

439.7

Other reserves represents the Group’s share-based payment transactions, foreign currency translation reserve, shares held by 
the employee benefit trust.

72  The Restaurant Group plc Annual Report 2021

Consolidated cash flow statement

Operating activities
Cash generated from operations
Interest received
Interest paid
Corporation tax (paid)/repayment
Payment against provisions
Payment of exceptional costs
Net cash flows from operating activities

Investing activities
Purchase of property, plant and equipment
Purchase of intangible assets
Proceeds from disposal of property, plant and equipment
Investment in associate
Net cash flows from investing activities

Financing activities
Net proceeds from issue of ordinary share capital
Repayment of obligations under leases
Repayment of overdraft
Repayment of borrowings
Drawdown of borrowings
Upfront loan facility fee paid
Derivative financial instruments fees paid
Net cash flows used in financing activities

Net increase/(decrease) in cash and cash equivalents

Cash and cash equivalents at the beginning of the year

Cash and cash equivalents at the end of the year

53 Weeks 
ended  
2 January 
2022
£m

52 weeks 
ended  
27 December 
2020
£m

128.1
–
(20.6)
(2.6)
(5.9)
(7.4)
91.6

(31.1)
(2.7)
–
(0.3)
(34.1)

166.8
(48.7)
–
(383.6)
330.0
(14.6)
(1.6)
48.3

3.2
0.2
(15.7)
5.1
–
(34.9)
(42.1)

(37.3)
(1.9)
3.3
(0.6)
(36.5)

54.6
(30.8)
(10.0)
(24.0)
80.6
(0.9)
–
69.5

105.8

(9.1)

40.7

146.5

49.8

40.7

Note

22

17
7

13
11

20
18
23
23
23
23
23

23

23

O
v
e
r
v
e
w

i

S

i

t
r
a
t
e
g
c
r
e
p
o
r
t

G
o
v
e
r
n
a
n
c
e

i

F
n
a
n
c

i

a

l

s
t
a
t
e
m
e
n
t
s

The Restaurant Group plc Annual Report 2021  73

 
 
 
Notes to the consolidated accounts
53 Weeks ended 2 January 2022

1 Accounting policies for the consolidated accounts

Significant accounting policies
The Restaurant Group plc (the ‘Company’) is a public listed Company incorporated and registered in Scotland. The consolidated 
financial statements of the Group for the year ended 2 January 2022 comprise the Company and its subsidiaries (together referred 
to as the ‘Group’). The principal activity of the Group during the period continued to be the operation of pubs and restaurants. 

(a) Statement of compliance
The consolidated financial statements have been prepared in accordance with International Accounting Standards in conformity 
with the requirements of the Companies Act 2006 and International Financial Reporting Standards adopted pursuant to 
Regulation (EC) No. 1606/2002 as it applies in the European Union (“IFRS”).

(b) Going concern basis
The Directors have adopted the going concern basis in preparing the Annual Report and Accounts after assessing the Group’s 
principal risks including the risks arising from Covid-19.

The principal risks and uncertainties are disclosed in the Risk Committee Report. These have been considered by Directors in 
forming their opinion. The Directors have reviewed financial projections to 31 March 2023 (the review period), containing both 
a ‘base case’ and a ‘stress case’. In the ‘base case’, the business is allowed to trade normally throughout the period without 
further trading restrictions, specifically the Group has forecast sales like-for-like performance to be broadly in line with the levels 
seen in the 33 weeks since trading resumed on the 17 May 2021, and cost inflation of c. 5%. However, in the ‘stress case’ 
a further reduction in sales relating to a further variant of Covid-19 is expected in Winter 2022, plus sensitivities have been 
included for a 5% reduction in sales, and an additional 1% of cost inflation. In addition, the Group has performed a reverse 
stress case which has shown that the Group could withstand a further 6% fall in sales compared to the stress case before 
the covenant levels would be exceeded on 31 March 2023, which in the context of the above the Directors consider remote.

The projections assume that tranches of the Term Loan facility will be repaid to improve balance sheet efficiency, subject to 
a governance process managed by the Board to ensure that appropriate liquidity is maintained throughout the review period. 

In both base and stress case forecasts, the Group has sufficient liquidity and passes all relevant covenants within the review 
period. These covenants consist of a minimum liquidity covenant of £40.0m until the end of December 2022, and a leverage 
covenant test in December 2022, and March 2023. Further details of the covenants are in Note 23 to the Financial Statements. 

Following a review of the forecasts above, the Board has concluded that the going concern basis remains appropriate 
throughout the review period.

(c) Basis of preparation
The financial year runs to a Sunday within seven days of 31 December each year which will be a 52 or 53 week period. The 
year ended 2 January 2022 was a 53 week period, with the comparative year to 27 December 2020 being a 52 week period.

The consolidated financial statements are presented in pounds sterling and all values are rounded to the nearest hundred 
thousand except when otherwise indicated. They have been prepared on the historical cost basis, with the exception of 
derivative financial assets which are held at fair value. 

The preparation of financial statements in conformity with International Accounting Standards and in conformity with the 
requirements of the Companies Act 2006 and International Financial Reporting Standards adopted pursuant to Regulation (EC) 
No. 1606/2002 as it applies in the European Union, requires management to make judgements, estimates and assumptions 
that affect the application of policies and reported amounts of assets and liabilities, income and expenses The estimates and 
associated assumptions are based on historical experience and various other factors that are believed to be reasonable under 
the circumstances, the results of which form the basis of making the judgements about carrying values of assets and liabilities 
that are not readily apparent from other sources. Actual results may differ from these estimates.

74  The Restaurant Group plc Annual Report 2021

1 Accounting policies for the consolidated accounts continued

The estimates and underlying assumptions are reviewed on an ongoing basis. Revisions to accounting estimates are recognised 
in the period in which the estimate is revised if the revision affects only that period, or in the period of the revision and future 
periods if the revision affects both current and future periods.

Through the Company’s risk assessment process a number of material risks to the business were identified through 2021 with 
mitigating plans established to manage the risk in accordance with our risk appetite. Climate related risks were not identified as 
a material risk for the Group either for the Going Concern period or the period covering the Viability statement. Therefore the 
Group does not believe that there is a material impact on the financial statements from climate change. As the risk assessment 
process is iterative and the impact of any risk can change over time, the Group will continue to assess whether climate change 
has had or will have a material impact on the business, its operations and financial statements.

In addition, climate change consciousness is starting to change the behaviour of certain consumers and driving government 
action that may impose further requirements and cost on companies in the future. However, current financial statements cannot 
capture such possible future outcomes as they are not yet known. The Group will continue to assess climate change risks and 
its financial impact and update all stakeholders accordingly.

Future accounting policies
At the date of authorisation of these financial statements, there is expected to be no material impact to the Group’s financial 
statements from IFRSs, IFRICs or other standards or interpretations that have been issued but which are not yet effective.

New standards and interpretations not yet adopted
At the date of authorisation off these financial statements, the Group has not applied the following new and revised IFRSs 
that have been issued but are not yet effective and had not yet been adopted by the UK Endorsement Board:

•  IBOR Phase 2 (effective date 1 January 2021)

•  Property, Plant and Equipment: Proceeds before intended use – Amendments to IAS 16 (effective date 1 January 2022)

•  Disclosure of Accounting Policies (Amendments to IAS 1 and IFRS Practice Statement 2) (effective date 1 January 2023)

•  Definition of Accounting Estimates (Amendments to IAS 8) (effective date 1 January 2023)

•  Classification of Liabilities as Current or Non-Current (Amendments to IAS 1) and Deferral of Effective Date Amendment 

(effective date 1 January 2023)

The Directors do not expect that the adoption of the standards listed above will have a material impact on the financial 
statements of the Group in future years and will adopt the new and revised IFRSs as and when they become effective. 

Changes in accounting policies
During the year, the Group has adopted the following new standards and interpretations. These have not had a material impact 
on the financial statements. 

•  Amendments to IFRS 3 (effective date 1 January 2020)

•  Amendments to IAS 1 and IAS 8 (effective date 1 January 2020)

•  Revised Conceptual Framework for Financial Reporting (effective date 1 January 2020) 

(d) Basis of consolidation
(i) Subsidiaries
Subsidiaries are entities controlled by the Company. Control exists when the Company possess power over the investee, has 
exposure to variable returns from its involvement with the entity and has the ability to use its power over the investee to affect its 
returns. The financial statements of subsidiaries are included in the consolidated financial statements from the date that control 
commences until the date that control ceases.

(ii) Transactions eliminated on consolidation
Intragroup balances and any gains and losses or income and expenses arising from intragroup transactions are eliminated 
in preparing the consolidated financial statements.

O
v
e
r
v
e
w

i

S

i

t
r
a
t
e
g
c
r
e
p
o
r
t

G
o
v
e
r
n
a
n
c
e

i

F
n
a
n
c

i

a

l

s
t
a
t
e
m
e
n
t
s

The Restaurant Group plc Annual Report 2021  75

 
 
 
Notes to the consolidated accounts continued

1 Accounting policies for the consolidated accounts continued

(e) Foreign currency – transactions and balances
Assets and liabilities in foreign currencies are translated into sterling at the rates of exchange ruling at the date of the balance 
sheet. Transactions in foreign currencies are translated into sterling at the rate of exchange at the date of the transaction. The 
resulting exchange differences are recognised in the consolidated income statement. Exchange differences arising from the 
retranslation of the net equity in associates is recognised in Other Comprehensive Income.

(f) Property, plant and equipment and intangible assets
Items of property, plant and equipment are stated at cost less accumulated depreciation (see below) and net impairment losses 
(see accounting policy l). Cost is the amount of cash or cash equivalents paid or the fair value of the other consideration given 
to acquire an asset at the time of its acquisition or construction.

Pre-opening costs
Pre-opening costs are deferred until the site opens. On opening of the site, an analysis is performed on all costs held on 
the balance sheet for the site and split into capital and non-capital expenditure. All non-capital expenditure is recognised in 
the income statement from the date of opening. Capital expenditure is held in property, plant and equipment and depreciated 
over the useful life. 

For sites which have incurred depreciation on an associated right of use asset, where the site is under construction, the 
depreciation charge is capitalised up to the date of opening.

Subsequent costs
The Group recognises in the carrying amount of an item of property, plant and equipment the cost of replacing part of such an 
item when that cost is incurred if it is probable that enhanced future economic benefits embodied with the item will flow to the 
Group and the cost of the item can be measured reliably. All other costs are recognised in the income statement as an expense 
as incurred. 

Depreciation
Depreciation is charged to the income statement on a straight-line basis to the residual value over the estimated useful lives of 
each part of an item of property, plant and equipment. The estimated useful lives are as follows:

Freehold land 

Freehold buildings  

Indefinite

50 years

Leasehold improvements 

Term of lease or 50 years, whichever is lower

Fixtures and equipment  

Computer equipment  

3-10 years

3-5 years

The estimated useful lives and residual values applied are reviewed at each reporting date with any changes in estimates being 
applied prospectively.

Intangible assets – Goodwill
All business combinations are accounted for by applying the acquisition method. Goodwill represents amounts arising on 
acquisition of subsidiaries. In respect of business acquisitions that have occurred since 1 January 2004, goodwill represents 
the difference between the cost of the acquisition and the fair value of the net identifiable assets acquired.

Goodwill is stated at cost less any accumulated impairment losses. Goodwill is allocated to groups of CGUs encompassing all 
sites operating under that brand, including any additional new sites. Goodwill is not subject to amortisation but is formally tested 
for impairment at least annually or when an impairment trigger has arisen (see accounting policy l).

Intangible assets – Trademarks
Trademarks are recognised at fair value less any accumulated impairment losses. Trademarks are allocated to groups of CGUs 
defined by the original acquisition group. Trademarks assessed to have an indefinite useful life are formally tested for impairment 
at least annually or when an impairment trigger has arisen (see accounting policy l).

76  The Restaurant Group plc Annual Report 2021

1 Accounting policies for the consolidated accounts continued

Intangible assets – Franchise agreements
Franchise agreements are stated at fair value less any accumulated amortisation and accumulated impairment losses. Franchise 
agreements are amortised to the income statement using the straight-line method over 15 years, which is the shorter of their 
estimated useful lives and periods of contractual rights. 

Software and IT development
Software and IT development are stated at cost less any accumulated amortisation and accumulated impairment losses. 
Software and IT development are amortised to the income statement using the straight-line method over three to five years.

(g) Leases
i) Right of use assets
Right of use assets are initially measured at the value of the corresponding lease liability and subsequently adjusted for depreciation 
and for any remeasurement of the lease liability. Right of use assets are assessed for impairment where required by IAS 36. 

The right of use asset is subsequently depreciated using the straight-line method from the commencement date to the earlier 
of the end of the useful life of the right of use asset or the end of the lease term. 

ii) Lease liabilities
Lease liabilities under IFRS 16 are initially recorded at the present value of future lease payments (discounted using the Group’s 
incremental borrowing rate, which we estimate with reference to our debt facilities and observed bond yields). 

Lease liabilities include the net present value of fixed payments (including in-substance fixed payments), less any lease 
incentives receivable and variable payments.

Lease liabilities may be recalculated in some situations as stipulated by IFRS 16, including where the terms of a lease are 
modified, which can also result in a separate lease being recognised. It is remeasured when there is a change in future lease 
payments arising from a change in an index or rate, if there is a change in the Group’s estimate of the amount expected to be 
payable under a residual value guarantee, or if the Group changes its assessment of whether it will exercise a purchase, 
extension or termination option. Such changes to the amount of the lease liability will be also reflected in the corresponding 
right of use asset, except where a reduction in the asset would result in a negative outcome, in which case the asset’s value 
is reduced to £Nil and the residual credit recorded in profit or loss.

In determining the lease term and assessing the length of the non-cancellable period of a lease, an entity shall apply the 
definition of a contract and determine the period for which the contract is enforceable. A lease is no longer enforceable when 
the lessee and lessor each has the right to terminate the lease without permission from the other party with no more than an 
insignificant penalty.

iii) Short-term leases and leases of low-value assets
The Group has elected not to recognise right of use assets and lease liabilities for short-term leases that have a lease term of 
12 months or less and leases of low-value assets, including IT equipment. The Group recognises the lease payments associated 
with these leases as an expense on a straight-line basis over the lease term.

Group as lessor
The Group has a number of contractual headlease agreements in place with its landlords, giving the Group the option to 
sub-lease these properties to licensees. Where the sublease transfers substantially all the risks and rewards of ownership of the 
underlying asset, the head lease right of use asset has been derecognised and a net investment in the sublease is recognised. 
Where the sublease does not transfer substantially all the risks and rewards of ownership of the underlying asset, the headlease 
has been recognised as a right of use asset and liability on the consolidated balance sheet, while any subleases are recognised 
as operating leases. This operating lease recognition is based on the substance of the transaction, as the sublease has a 
shorter tenure than the headlease and once the sublease ends, the use and benefit of the property returns to the Group.

Rental income from operating leases is recognised on a straight-line basis over the term of the relevant lease. 

(h) Financial assets
– Classification 
The classification of financial assets depends on the purpose for which the financial assets were acquired. Management 
determines the classification of its financial assets at initial recognition. 

O
v
e
r
v
e
w

i

S

i

t
r
a
t
e
g
c
r
e
p
o
r
t

G
o
v
e
r
n
a
n
c
e

i

F
n
a
n
c

i

a

l

s
t
a
t
e
m
e
n
t
s

The Restaurant Group plc Annual Report 2021  77

 
 
 
Notes to the consolidated accounts continued

1 Accounting policies for the consolidated accounts continued 

Loans and receivables
Loans and receivables are non-derivative financial assets with fixed or determinable payments that are not quoted in an active 
market. They are included in current assets and non-current assets. The Group’s loans and receivables comprise ‘cash and 
cash equivalents’ and ‘other receivables’ in the balance sheet. 

Other receivables are amounts due from suppliers or sub tenants in the ordinary course of business. Other receivables are 
recognised initially at fair value and subsequently measured at amortised cost using the effective interest method, less expected 
credit loss.

Fair value through profit and loss 
Financial assets classified as fair value through profit and loss relate to a interest rate cap that the Group has entered into 
during the year.

– Recognition and measurement
Loans and receivables
Financial assets are recognised when the Group becomes party to the contractual provisions of the instrument and are 
subsequently carried at amortised cost using the effective interest rate method, less provisions for impairment. Impairment 
of financial assets is based on management’s estimate of future cash inflows.

Fair value through profit and loss
Financial assets at fair value through profit or loss are carried in the statement of financial position at fair value with net changes 
in fair value recognised in the statement of profit or loss.

(i) Financial liabilities – Borrowings
Borrowings are recognised initially at fair value, net of transaction costs incurred. Borrowings are subsequently carried at 
amortised cost; any difference between the proceeds (net of transaction costs) and the redemption value is recognised 
in the income statement over the period of the borrowings using the effective interest method.

Fees paid on the establishment of loan facilities are recognised as transaction costs of the loan to the extent that it is probable 
that some or all of the facility will be drawn down. This is also applicable to fees for amendments to the loan facilities. In this 
case, the fee is deferred until the drawdown occurs. To the extent there is no evidence that it is probable that some or all of 
the facility will be drawn down, the fee is capitalised as a pre-payment for liquidity services and amortised over the period of 
the facility to which it relates.

(j) Inventory
Inventory is stated at the lower of cost and net realisable value. Cost is determined in accordance with the weighted average 
inventory costing model, including applicable commercial discounts. Net realisable value is the estimated selling price in the 
ordinary course of business, less the estimated costs of completion and selling expenses.

(k) Cash and cash equivalents
Cash and cash equivalents comprise bank balances, cash balances on hand and in restaurants, and cash-in-transit for credit 
card transactions made within 72 working hours, providing there is no risk of cash return. Bank overdrafts that are repayable on 
demand and form an integral part of the Group’s cash management are included as a component of cash and cash equivalents 
for the purpose of the statement of cash flows.

Offsetting of overdrafts is only permitted (and, in fact, required) when: 

•  there is a legally enforceable right to set off recognised amounts; and 

•  an entity intends to settle on a net basis, or to realise the asset and settle the financial liability simultaneously. 

Cash at bank earns interest at floating rates based on daily bank deposit rates. Short term deposits are made for varying 
periods of between one day and six months, depending on the immediate cash requirements of the Group, and earn interest 
at the respective short term deposit rates.

78  The Restaurant Group plc Annual Report 2021

1 Accounting policies for the consolidated accounts continued 

(l) Impairment
The Group formally determines whether the carrying amount of property, plant and equipment and right of use assets (‘RoUA’) 
are impaired by considering indicators of impairment annually. Impairment for tangible assets is tested on the basis of each 
individual cash generating unit (CGU) – an individual restaurant or pub site or multiple sites that are in close proximity, such as 
airports where trading is interdependent. For intangible assets, the testing is performed at the level of the relevant group of 
CGUs that benefit from the goodwill or other intangible asset. An impairment loss is recognised whenever the carrying amount 
of an asset or its CGU exceeds its recoverable amount. This requires the Group to determine the lowest level of assets which 
generate largely independent cash flows and to determine their recoverable amount, based on estimating the value-in-use or 
the fair value less cost of disposal of these assets or CGUs; and compare these to their carrying value. Impairment losses for 
property, plant and equipment are recognised in the income statement.

Impairment losses recognised in prior periods for property, plant and equipment and RoUA shall be reversed where there is an 
indication that the impairment no longer exists. Where an impairment reversal is recognised, the carrying amount of the asset 
will be increased to its recoverable amount with the increase being recognised in the income statement. This increased amount 
cannot exceed the carrying amount that would have been determined, net of depreciation, had no impairment loss been 
recognised for the asset in prior years.

For goodwill and assets that have an indefinite useful life, the recoverable amount is estimated annually. Goodwill impairment 
losses are recognised in the income statement and are not subsequently reversed. For the purpose of impairment testing, 
goodwill is allocated to each of the Group’s cash generating units expected to benefit from the synergies of the combination.

(m) Share-based payment transactions
The Group operates a number of share-based payment schemes. These schemes allow Group employees to acquire shares 
of the Company and all options are equity-settled. The fair value of options granted is recognised as an employee expense 
with a corresponding increase in equity. The fair value is measured at grant date and spread over the period during which the 
employees become unconditionally entitled to the options. The Black-Scholes model is used to measure the fair value of the 
options granted. At the end of each reporting period, the Group revises its estimates of the number of options that are expected 
to vest based on the non-market vesting conditions and service conditions. It recognises the impact of the revision to original 
estimates, if any, in the income statement, with a corresponding adjustment to equity.

(n) Provisions
A provision is recognised in the balance sheet when the Group has a present legal or constructive obligation as a result of 
a past event, and it is probable that an outflow of economic benefits will be required to settle the obligation. Provisions are 
determined by discounting the expected future cash flows at a pre-tax rate that reflects current market assessments of the 
time value of money. 

(o) Onerous property costs
The Group has a number of site related contractual commitments that are onerous and not included in the scope of IFRS 16. 
Where these exist, typically for closed sites, the Group provides for its estimate of the minimum cost of exiting the contracted 
commitments, such as rates, services and dilapidations where these are included in the contracts with landlords.

Estimates have been made with respect to the time to exit, sublet or cover the fixed cost base, along with other associated 
contracted costs as well as an evaluation of the cost of void period prior to sublet and the value of lease incentive which may 
be required to be paid as part of the sublet process. The amounts of future expenditures for site closure costs are reviewed 
semi-annually and are based on readily available information at the reporting date as well as management’s historical experience 
of similar transactions. 

(p) Deferred and current tax
Corporation tax payable is provided on the taxable profit at the current rate. Deferred tax is recognised in respect of all 
temporary differences that have originated but not reversed at the balance sheet date, except to the extent that the deferred tax 
arises from the initial recognition of goodwill. Temporary differences are differences between the carrying amount of the Group’s 
assets and liabilities and their tax base.

Deferred tax is measured at the tax rates that are expected to apply in the periods in which the temporary differences are 
expected to reverse based on tax rates and laws that are enacted, or substantively enacted, by the balance sheet date. 
Deferred tax is measured on a non-discounted basis.

(q) Pensions
The Group makes contributions for eligible workers into defined contribution pension plans and these contributions are charged 
to the income statement as they are accrued. The Group does not operate any defined benefit plans.

O
v
e
r
v
e
w

i

S

i

t
r
a
t
e
g
c
r
e
p
o
r
t

G
o
v
e
r
n
a
n
c
e

i

F
n
a
n
c

i

a

l

s
t
a
t
e
m
e
n
t
s

The Restaurant Group plc Annual Report 2021  79

 
 
 
Notes to the consolidated accounts continued

1 Accounting policies for the consolidated accounts continued 

(r) Revenue
Revenue represents sales from restaurants, pubs and concession sites, including food and beverages and both dine-in and 
delivery sales (excluding value added tax and voluntary gratuities left by customers for the benefit of employees), and is recognised 
at the point of completion of a transaction with a customer. Commission payable on delivery is recognised in cost of sales.

Where the Group operates a concession unit under a franchise agreement, it acts as principal in this trading arrangement. 
All revenue from franchise arrangements is recognised by the Group at the point of sale, and licensing fees are recognised 
in cost of sales as the goods are sold.

Where the Group acts as a franchisor in a trading relationship, licencing fees are recognised in cost of sales based on the turnover 
of the franchise site. Royalty revenue is accrued in line with reported sales performance once revenue can be reliably measured. 

(s) Other income – rental income
Rental income is derived from sites where the Group is the lessor. Rental income is recognised in the income statement 
as earned. Provisions are made for any expected credit losses. Where any lease incentives are provided to the lessee 
(such as rent-free periods), such incentives are accounted for as a reduction in lease income over the lease term. 

(t) Government grants
Government grants are recognised where there is reasonable assurance that the grant will be received, and all attached 
conditions will be complied with. When the grant relates to an expense item, it is recognised as income on a systematic basis 
over the periods that the related costs, for which it is intended to compensate, are expensed.

During the period, the Group benefited from receipts from the UK Government under the Coronavirus Job Retention Scheme 
(CJRS). In accordance with IAS 20, amounts received were presented as a deduction to the employment costs upon which 
CJRS claims had been based. 

The Group also benefitted from Business Rates Relief and the £50.0m Coronavirus Large Business Interruption Loan Scheme 
(CLBILS), which was repaid in 2021.

(u) Expenses
– Borrowing costs
Debt is stated net of borrowing costs which are spread over the term of the loan. All other borrowings costs are recognised 
in the income statement in the period in which they are incurred.

– Commercial discounts
Commercial discounts represent a reduction in cost of goods and services in accordance with negotiated supplier contracts, 
the majority of which are based on purchase volumes. Commercial discounts are recognised in the period in which they are 
earned and to the extent that any variable targets have been achieved in that financial period. 

– Exceptional items
In order to illustrate the trading performance of the Group, presentation has been made of performance measures excluding 
those exceptional items which it is considered would distort the comparability of the Group’s results. Exceptional items are 
defined as those items that, by virtue of their unusual nature or size, warrant separate additional disclosure in the financial 
statements in order to fully understand the performance of the Group. 

The Group’s income statement provides a reconciliation of the adjusted profitability measures, excluding exceptional items 
to the equivalent unadjusted IFRS measures. Exceptional items are then further detailed in Note 7. 

(v) Dividends
In accordance with IAS 10 Events after the Balance Sheet Date, dividends declared after the balance sheet date are not 
recognised as a liability at that balance sheet date, and are recognised in the financial statements when they have received 
approval by shareholders.

(w) Associates
An associate is an entity over which the Group has significant influence and that is neither a subsidiary nor an interest in a joint 
venture. Significant influence is the power to participate in the financial and operating policy decisions of the investee but is not 
control or joint control over those policies.

80  The Restaurant Group plc Annual Report 2021

1 Accounting policies for the consolidated accounts continued

Associates are accounted for using the equity method of accounting. Under the equity method, an investment in an associate 
is accounted for using the equity method from the date on which the investee becomes an associate. If after reassessment the 
Group’s share of the net fair value of the identifiable assets and liabilities are in excess of the cost of the investment, this is 
recognised immediately in profit or loss in the period in which the investment is acquired.

The carrying amount of equity accounted investments is tested for impairment in accordance with the policy described 
in Note 14.

When the Group‘s share of losses exceeds its interest in an equity-accounted investee, the carrying amount of the Group‘s 
investment is reduced to £Nil.

Critical accounting judgements and estimates
In the application of the Group’s accounting policies, the Directors are required to make judgements, estimates and 
assumptions. The estimates and associated assumptions are based on historical experience and other factors that are 
considered to be relevant. Actual results may differ from these estimates. The estimates and underlying assumptions are 
reviewed on an ongoing basis. Revisions to accounting estimates are recognised in the period in which the estimate is revised, 
as noted in the (c) Basis of Preparation in Significant accounting policies, if the revision affects only that period or in the period 
of the revision and future periods if the revision affects both current and future periods. The most significant of these are below:

Estimates
i) Impairment of non-current assets
As disclosed in Note 14, the impairment reviews of non-current assets require several estimates to determine the value-in-use 
of each CGU. The key estimates are in relation to the discount rate, the calculation of the future cash flows and the longer term 
growth rate. These have been disclosed with sensitivities in Note 14.

Given the uncertainties inherent in the pandemic relating to legal and social restrictions, the availability of Government support 
and customer demand in the current trading environment, the range of possible cashflow outcomes is wider than normal as 
disclosed in the sensitivity analysis. The future cash flows have been forecast taking into account using the ‘base case’ and 
‘stress case’ scenarios as outlined in the Going Concern section of this note and in the Financial Review which allow for a range 
of possible trading scenarios when making estimates about the recovery following Covid-19. In addition to these forecasts, to 
recognise the increased uncertainty of cash flows at a CGU level, Management has applied a judgemental and appropriate risk 
adjustment to the forecast cash flows as appropriate to reflect the level of risk in differing groups of CGUs, particularly those that 
are subject to significant uncertainty as to timing or conditionality of opening, and the profile of lease cost revisions, many of 
which have been stayed for a two year period under the CVA.

An assessment is made at each reporting date as to whether there is any indication that previously recognised impairment 
losses may no longer exist or may have decreased. If such an indication exists, the CGU’s recoverable amount is estimated. 
A previously recognised impairment loss is reversed only if there has been a change in the estimated future cash flows used 
to determine the asset’s recoverable amount since the last impairment loss was recognised. If that is the case, the carrying 
amount of the asset is increased to its recoverable amount. That increased amount cannot exceed the carrying amount that 
would have been determined, net of depreciation, had no impairment loss been recognised for the asset in prior years. Such a 
reversal is recognised in the consolidated income statement. After such a reversal, the depreciation charge is adjusted in future 
periods to allocate the asset’s carrying amount, less any residual value, on a straight-line basis over its remaining useful life.

ii) Forecast business cashflows
For purposes of the going concern assessment and as an input into the impairment assessment, the Group make estimates 
of likely future cash flows which are based on assumptions given the uncertainties involved. The assumptions include the extent 
of Government restrictions and support, the recovery of the revenues through and beyond the pandemic, cost of labour and 
supplies and working capital movements. These assumptions are made by management based on recent performance, 
external forecasts and management’s knowledge and expertise of the cashflow drivers.

iii) Provisions for property costs
As disclosed in Note 17, the Group has made a provision for the contracted property-related costs of vacant sites for the period 
that a sublet or assignment of the lease is not expected to be possible. The Group measures these provisions using the expected 
value method. The Group has made an estimate of the length of time that will be required to meet those obligations as it is 
expected that the landlords will take possession back of these sites over time or that a sublet agreement could be reached. 

O
v
e
r
v
e
w

i

S

i

t
r
a
t
e
g
c
r
e
p
o
r
t

G
o
v
e
r
n
a
n
c
e

i

F
n
a
n
c

i

a

l

s
t
a
t
e
m
e
n
t
s

The Restaurant Group plc Annual Report 2021  81

 
 
 
Notes to the consolidated accounts continued

1 Accounting policies for the consolidated accounts continued

iv) Lease discount rate
The Group is required to make an assessment to ensure the discount rate assumptions appropriately reflected current market 
assessments of the incremental borrowing rate, to value the lease liabilities and right of use assets disclosed.

Critical accounting judgements
The following are the critical judgements, apart from those involving estimations (which are dealt with separately below), that the 
Directors have made in the process of applying the Group’s accounting policies and that have the most significant effect on the 
amounts recognised in the financial statements.

i) Lease term
IFRS 16 defines lease term as the non-cancellable period of a lease together with options to renew or break a lease, if the lessee 
is reasonably certain to exercise that option. The assessment of lease term is a significant judgement. Where leases include an 
option to extend or reduce the lease term, the Group makes a lease-by-lease assessment as to whether it is reasonably certain 
that the option will be exercised. This assessment considers the length of the time before any renewal or break option is 
exercisable, plus current and forecast site trading. 

ii) Indefinite useful life of trademarks
When trademarks are acquired, the Company is required to assess the useful economic life of that trademark. The Group has 
assessed that all trademarks have an indefinite useful life and are not amortising these assets.

This assessment is based on an annual review of the current strength of the trademark using a set of agreed criteria which include 
LFL sales growth versus the market, Net Promoter Score (NPS) and staff retention. All of these indicate that the brand remains 
relevant and demonstrates Wagamama’s relative strength in the market. In addition, the Group has committed to invest to maintain 
the brand’s market-leading position, and following the refinancing, have the required funding to deliver on that commitment.

iii) Segmental Analysis
Management has determined the operating segments based on the information provided to the Chief Operating Decision 
Maker. The Group concluded that it has four operating segments as defined by IFRS 8 (Wagamama, Pubs, Leisure and 
Concessions). The Concessions business has a temporary difference from the other segments as the sales are temporarily 
depressed by the impact of travel restrictions following Covid-19. Management’s expectation based on internal metrics and 
external forecasts is that the business will return to pre-pandemic levels in 12- 24 months. It is the Directors’ judgement that 
all of the segments meet the requirements for aggregation under IFRS 8. 

iv) Russia/Ukraine situation
Management acknowledge the current Russia/Ukraine situation and the potential impacts that this will have around the globe, 
and also on TRG, with respect to any increase in food and energy inflation, and possible reductions in consumer spending. The 
impacts of these are uncertain at this point and management feel that the sales and inflation assumptions used are appropriate 
but also acknowledge that this is an evolving situation and the impact on the Group may be larger than currently envisaged.

2 Restatement of comparatives

As a result of an FRC review of the 2020 Annual Report, the Directors reconsidered the accounting for capitalised right of use asset 
depreciation of £9.4m that arose during the fit-out period for four new Concessions sites. Part of that amount (£5.3m pre-tax) should 
have been considered as abnormal wastage and expensed in the prior year income statement as an exceptional item given that it 
related to a period during which the fit-out was interrupted by the pandemic. The impact of correcting this error is shown below.

Consolidated income statement for the 52 weeks ended 27 December 2020
Exceptional cost of sales 
Exceptional tax on profit/(loss) from ordinary activities
Exceptional loss for the year
Loss for the year

Consolidated balance sheet as at 27 December 2020
Property, plant and equipment 
Deferred tax liabilities
Retained earnings 

As originally 
disclosed
£m

Adjustment
£m

As restated
£m

(32.5)
(4.3)
(44.4)
(119.9)

305.6
(40.7)
(127.0)

(5.3)
1.0
(4.3)
(4.3)

(5.3)
1.0
(4.3)

(37.8)
(3.3)
(48.7)
(124.2)

300.3
(39.7)
(131.3)

The above restatement has no effect on the 2020 pre-exceptional measures of Loss for the year (before or after tax) and EBITDA.

82  The Restaurant Group plc Annual Report 2021

3 Segmental analysis

IFRS 8 Operating Segments requires operating segments to be based on the Group’s internal reporting to its Chief Operating 
Decision Maker (CODM). The CODM is regarded as the combined Executive team of the Chief Executive Officer and the Chief 
Financial Officer.

The Group has four operating segments of:

•  Wagamama

•  Pubs

•  Leisure

•  Concessions

The economic characteristics of these businesses, including Gross Margin, Net Margin, EBITDA and Sales trajectory, have been 
reviewed by the Directors along with the non-financial criteria of IFRS 8. It is the Directors’ judgment that all of the segments 
meet the requirements for aggregation under IFRS 8. 

Geographical Segments
The Group trades primarily within the United Kingdom and generates revenue from the operation of restaurants, with 
substantially all revenue generated within the United Kingdom. The Group generates some revenue from franchise royalties 
primarily in Europe and the Middle East. The segmentation between geographical location does not meet the quantitative 
thresholds and so has not been disclosed.

4 Reconciliation to underlying profit

The results used by the Directors to monitor and review the performance of the Group continue to reflect the IAS 17 approach to 
accounting and a number of the key metrics used in this report are prepared on that basis. A reconciliation is provided below of 
the key differences between results under IFRS 16 and the basis used for management reporting. 

Revenue
Cost of sales
Gross profit/(loss)

Share of result of associate
Administration costs

Operating profit/(loss)
Interest payable
Interest receivable

2021
Trading
IAS 17
£m
636.6 
(542.5)
94.1 

(0.3)
(51.0)

 42.8
(26.7)
0.5 

Adjustments
for IFRS 16
£m
– 
(5.7)
(5.7)

– 
– 

(5.7)
(19.0)
0.1 

2021
Trading
IFRS 16
£m
636.6 
(548.2)
88.4 

(0.3)
(51.0)

37.1 
(45.7)
0.6 

Exceptional
items
(Note 7)
£m
– 
(21.4)
(21.4)

– 
(1.6)

(23.0)
(1.9) 
– 

2021
Total
IFRS 16
£m
636.6 
(569.6)
67.0 

(0.3)
(52.6)

14.1 
(47.6)
0.6 

2020
Total
IFRS 16*
£m
459.8 
(508.4)
(48.6)

(0.6)
(45.9)

(95.1)
(38.2)
0.4 

Profit/(loss) before tax

16.6 

(24.6)

(8.0)

(24.9)

(32.9)

(132.9)

EBITDA
Depreciation, amortisation and impairment

81.2
(38.4)

34.0
(39.7)

115.2 
(78.1)

2.9 
(25.9)

118.1
(104.0)

150.9 
(246.0)

Operating profit/(loss)

42.8 

(5.7)

37.1 

(23.0)

14.1 

(95.1)

* Restated – refer to Note 2

The “Adjustments for IFRS 16” summarised above can be seen in the below reconciliation of trading profit before tax (excluding 
exceptional items) from the ‘Underlying’ basis to the IFRS 16 basis of accounting:

O
v
e
r
v
e
w

i

S

i

t
r
a
t
e
g
c
r
e
p
o
r
t

G
o
v
e
r
n
a
n
c
e

i

F
n
a
n
c

i

a

l

s
t
a
t
e
m
e
n
t
s

The Restaurant Group plc Annual Report 2021  83

 
 
 
Notes to the consolidated accounts continued

4 Reconciliation to underlying profit continued

Underlying Trading profit/(loss) before tax
Removal of rent expense
Net change in depreciation
Net change in net interest payable
Interest receivable on net investments in subleases
Trading loss before tax under IFRS 16

5 Profit for the year

Profit for the year after exceptional items has been arrived at after charging/(crediting):
Amortisation (Note 11)
Depreciation on right of use asset (Note 12)
Depreciation on property, plant and equipment (Note 13)
Loss on sale of property, plant and equipment
Impairment of property, plant and equipment and software (Note 13)
Impairment of right of use asset (Note 12)
Impairment on net investments in subleases
Purchases of food, beverages and consumables
Inventory write downs
Staff costs (Note 6)
Covid-19 Government grants

Variable rents
Rental income
Net rental costs

Auditor’s remuneration:
Fees payable to the Company's Auditor for the audit of the Group's annual accounts
Fees payable to the Company’s Auditor for the audit of the Subsidiaries’ annual accounts
Total audit fees

Audit-related assurance services
Anticipated corporate activity
Other assurance services
Total non-audit fees

Total Auditor’s remuneration

Non-audit: Audit Ratio

2021
£m
16.6 
34.0 
(39.7)
(19.0)
0.1 
(8.0)

2021
£m

2.3
39.9
35.9
2.4
12.6
13.3
0.1
121.0
0.5
248.3
10.9

17.6
(0.2)
17.4

2021
£m

0.4
0.1
0.5

0.1
–
0.6
0.7

1.2

2020
£m
(47.9)
44.7 
(63.9)
(20.6)
0.2 
(87.5)

2020
£m

2.5
64.1
36.5
–
21.2
121.7
6.6
99.5
3.6
202.9
–

3.3
(0.7)
2.6

2020
£m

0.4
0.1
0.5

0.1
0.6
–
0.7

1.2

 1.4 

 1.4 

During the period, Auditor’s remuneration of £0.6m was offset against the proceeds from issuance of shares, the remaining 
£0.6m was expensed as administration costs. In 2020 all Auditor’s remuneration was expensed as administration costs.

The maximum non-audit fees that the statutory auditor of a public interest entity can bill in any one year is set at 70% of the 
average of the audit fees billed over the last three year period to the entity, it’s Parent and its subsidiaries. Approval was obtained 
from the FRC to carry out Non-Audit services for a capital raise in March 2021 in excess of the 70% threshold. Please see the 
Audit Report for further details.

84  The Restaurant Group plc Annual Report 2021

6 Staff costs

a) Average staff numbers during the year (including Directors)
Restaurant staff
Administration staff

b) Staff costs (including Directors) comprise*:
Wages and salaries
Social security costs
Share-based payments
Pension costs and salary supplements

c) Exceptional staff costs:
Severance pay

d) Directors’ remuneration
Emoluments
Salary supplements

Charge in respect of share-based payments

2021

2020

14,415
356
14,771

2021
£m

220.5
17.9
3.4
3.8
245.6

2021
£m

2.7

2021
£m

2.3
0.1
2.4
0.9
3.3

15,843
425
16,268

2020
£m

163.5
17.8
2.0
4.4
187.7

2020
£m

15.2

2020
£m

1.3
0.1
1.4
0.5
1.9

* 

This is a net amount after Coronavirus Job Retention Scheme payments of £43.2m (2020: £123.5m)

Further details of the Directors’ emoluments and the executive pension schemes are given in the Directors’ remuneration report 
on pages 41 to 54.

O
v
e
r
v
e
w

i

S

i

t
r
a
t
e
g
c
r
e
p
o
r
t

G
o
v
e
r
n
a
n
c
e

i

F
n
a
n
c

i

a

l

s
t
a
t
e
m
e
n
t
s

The Restaurant Group plc Annual Report 2021  85

 
 
 
Notes to the consolidated accounts continued

7 Exceptional items

Included within cost of sales:
– Impairment charges relating to trading sites
– Abnormal wastage (Note 2) 
– Estate closure
– Disposal of assets in administration
– Estate restructuring
– Remeasurement of other provision

Included within administration costs:
– Integration costs
– Professional fees
– Disposal of US operation

Included within interest payable:
– Refinancing costs 
Exceptional items before tax

Impact of tax rate change
Tax effect of exceptional Items

Net exceptional items for the year

*  Restated – refer to Note 2

2021
£m

19.6
–
0.6
–
1.2
–
21.4

–
1.6
–
1.6

1.9
24.9

12.2
(2.4)

2020*
£m

37.0
5.3
5.5
9.9
(19.0)
(0.9)
37.8

3.2
3.2
1.2
7.6

–
45.4

4.8
(1.5)

34.7

48.7

Impairment of assets
An impairment charge has been recorded against certain assets to reflect forecast results at several trading sites. This £19.6m 
charge comprises of an impairment of right of use assets of £9.5m (Note 12) and an impairment of property, plant and 
equipment of £10.1m (Note 13). 

Further details on the impairment of non-current assets are given in Note 14.

Estate restructuring
The Group has permanently closed a significant number of sites, following the impact of the coronavirus pandemic. As a result 
of these closures, the Group has recognised a number of material and non-recurring charges and credits amounting to £1.2m. 

The key elements are onerous property cost provisions of £8.6m, payments to exit sites of £2.7m, staff redundancies of £2.7m, 
Impairment of non-trading sites of £6.3m and other costs of £0.9m.

This has been partially offset by lease liabilities exited amounting to a net credit of £4.9m, as well as rent concessions achieved 
of £15.1m. 

86  The Restaurant Group plc Annual Report 2021

 
Professional fees
During the year, the Group incurred material one-off costs relating to corporate financing and restructuring activity. Since 
these costs are material, irregular and unrelated to underlying or ongoing trading, they are presented as exceptional items. 

Refinancing costs
An exceptional charge of £1.9m has been recognised during the year as a result of the write off of capitalised loan fees on the 
previous facilities.

Tax rate change
The 2021 Budget in March 2021 announced an increase in the UK corporation tax rate to 25% with effect from 1 April 2023. 
This was substantively enacted on 24 May 2021. The total impact of the increase in tax rate on deferred tax was £12.2m, of 
which £14.8m related to the deferred tax asset associated with intangibles on the Wagamama trademark. This has been 
recognised as an exceptional item in the tax charge for the year as it is unrelated to underlying trading.

8 Net Interest payable

Bank interest payable
Unwinding of discount on lease liabilities
Amortisation of facility fees
Other interest payable
Trading interest payable
Exceptional refinancing cost (Note 7) 
Total interest payable

Unwinding of discounts on investments in subleases
Gain on derivative financial instrument
Other interest receivable
Total interest receivable

2021
£m
22.3
19.6
3.3
0.5
45.7
1.9
47.6

(0.1)
(0.5)
–
(0.6)

2020
£m
15.6
21.0
1.6
–
38.2
–
38.2

(0.2)
–
(0.2)
(0.4)

Total net finance charges 

47.0

37.8

O
v
e
r
v
e
w

i

S

i

t
r
a
t
e
g
c
r
e
p
o
r
t

G
o
v
e
r
n
a
n
c
e

i

F
n
a
n
c

i

a

l

s
t
a
t
e
m
e
n
t
s

The Restaurant Group plc Annual Report 2021  87

 
 
 
Notes to the consolidated accounts continued

9 Tax

a) The tax charge comprises:

Current tax

UK corporation tax
Adjustments in respect of previous years

Deferred tax

Current year
Origination and reversal of temporary differences
Adjustments in respect of previous years
Charge in respect of rate change on deferred tax liability
Charge in respect of fixed asset impairment

Total tax (credit)/charge for the year

Trading
2021
£m

Exceptional
2021
£m

(0.7)
–
(0.7)

(1.9)
–
0.2
12.2
–
10.5

0.7
2.8
3.5

(2.6)
–
(5.2)
–
–
(7.8)

(4.3)

Total
2021
£m

–
2.8
2.8

(4.5)
–
(5.0)
12.2
–
2.7

Total
2020*
£m

(9.5)
0.7
(8.8)

(1.0)
(5.4)
(0.9)
4.5
2.9
0.1

(8.7)

9.8

5.5

b) Factors affecting the tax charge for the year
The tax charged for the year varies from the standard UK corporation tax rate of 19% (2020: 19%) due to the following factors:

Loss on ordinary activities before tax

Loss on ordinary activities before tax multiplied  
by the standard UK corporation tax rate of 19% (2020: 19%)
Effects of:
Depreciation/impairment on non-qualifying assets
Expenses not deductible for tax purposes
Movement on unrecognised deferred tax asset
Charge in respect of rate change on deferred tax liability
Effect of overseas tax rates
Adjustment in respect of previous years
Balances eliminated on entering administration
Share options
Movement in capital loss
Total tax (credit)/charge for the year

*  Restated – refer to Note 2

Trading
2021
£m
(8.0)

Exceptional
2021
£m
(24.9)

Total
2021
£m
(32.9)

Total
2020*
£m
(132.9)

(1.5)

1.3
0.5
(2.2)
–
–
(2.4)
–
–
–
(4.3)

(4.7)

(6.2)

(25.3)

0.6
1.0
0.6
12.2
(0.1)
0.2
–
–
–
9.8

1.9
1.5
(1.6)
12.2
(0.1)
(2.2)
–
–
–
5.5

4.9
0.7
2.4
4.6
–
(0.2)
3.9
0.4
(0.1)
(8.7)

The 2021 Budget in March this year announced an increase in the UK corporation tax rate to 25% with effect from 1 April 2023. 
This was substantively enacted on 24 May 2021.

88  The Restaurant Group plc Annual Report 2021

10 Earnings per share

Weighted average ordinary shares for the purposes of basic earnings per share
Effect of dilution – share options
Diluted weighted average number of shares

Loss for the year after tax
Effect of exceptional items on earnings for the year
Adjusted loss for the year after tax

Basic loss per share for the year
Effect of exceptional items on earnings for the year per share
Adjusted loss per share

Diluted earnings per share on loss for the year
Diluted earnings per share on adjusted loss for the year

2021

2020*
722,182,407 562,652,429
–
–
722,182,407 562,652,429

2021
£m
(38.4)
34.7
(3.7)

2021
pence
(5.3)
4.8
(0.5)

(5.3)
(0.5)

2020*
£m
(124.2)
48.7
(75.5)

2020*
pence
(22.1)
 8.7 
(13.4)

(22.1)
(13.4)

Diluted earnings per share information is based on adjusting the weighted average number of shares for the purpose of basic 
earnings per share in respect of notional share awards made to employees in regards of share option schemes and the share 
held by the employee benefit trust. 

The diluted earnings per share figures allow for the dilutive effect of the conversion into ordinary shares of the weighted average 
number of options outstanding during the year. Anti-dilutive shares that reduce the loss per share have been excluded from this 
calculation. There are 267,076 (2020: 84,176) share options excluded from the diluted earnings per share calculation because 
they would be anti-dilutive.

*   The adjusted diluted earnings per share for the 52 weeks ended 27 December 2020 has been re-presented to take account of a correction in the calculation of dilutive 

shares for that period and a change in the presented loss after tax (refer to Note 2). No other measures have been affected

O
v
e
r
v
e
w

i

S

i

t
r
a
t
e
g
c
r
e
p
o
r
t

G
o
v
e
r
n
a
n
c
e

i

F
n
a
n
c

i

a

l

s
t
a
t
e
m
e
n
t
s

The Restaurant Group plc Annual Report 2021  89

 
 
 
Notes to the consolidated accounts continued

 11 Intan    gible assets

Cost
At 29 December 2019
Additions
Disposals
Reclassifications
At 27 December 2020

Accumulated amortisation and impairment
At 29 December 2019
Charged during the year
Reclassifications
Disposals
At 27 December 2020

Cost
At 27 December 2020
Additions
Disposals
At 2 January 2022

Accumulated amortisation and impairment
At 27 December 2020
Charged during the year
Disposals
At 2 January 2022

Net book value as at 27 December 2020
Net book value as at 2 January 2022

Trademarks  
and
licences
£m

Franchise
agreements
£m

Software  
and IT
development
£m

Goodwill
£m

357.1
–
(14.5)
–
342.6

236.0
–
–
–
236.0

–
–
–
–
–

–
–
–
–
–

342.6
–
–
342.6

236.0
–
–
236.0

–
–
–
–

–
–
–
–

342.6
342.6

236.0
236.0

21.9
–
–
–
21.9

1.5
1.4
–
–
2.9

21.9
–
–
21.9

2.9
1.5
–
4.4

19.0
17.5

4.8
1.9
(0.3)
(1.1)
5.3

1.5
1.1
1.1
(0.3)
3.4

5.3
2.7
(0.2)
7.8

3.4
0.8
(0.2)
4.0

1.9
3.8

Total
£m

619.8
1.9
(14.8)
(1.1)
605.8

3.0
2.5
1.1
(0.3)
6.3

605.8
2.7
(0.2)
608.3

6.3
2.3
(0.2)
8.4

599.5
599.9

The recoverable amount of the goodwill and trademark CGUs is £1,337.6m as at 2 January 2022 (£1,589.0m as at 
27 December 2020). The recoverable amount has been based on value in use estimates using forecasts approved by the 
Board. The projected cash flows have been discounted using a rate based on the Group’s pre-tax weighted average cost of 
capital of 10.6% (2020: 8.7%) that reflects the risk of these assets. Cash flows are extrapolated in perpetuity with an annual 
growth rate of 2-3% (2020: 2-3%). It was concluded that the value in use for each CGU is higher than its carrying value and 
therefore did not require impairment.

The carrying amount of goodwill and indefinite life intangible assets allocated to groups of CGUs is presented below along  
with the group of CGU’s recoverable amounts.

90  The Restaurant Group plc Annual Report 2021

11 Intangible assets continued

Wagamama
Brunning & Price
Blubeckers
Ribble Valley Inns

Trademarks & 
licences 
£m
236.0
–
–
–
236.0

Goodwill
£m
315.5
15.2
11.3
0.6
342.6

Total 
intangibles
£m
551.5
15.2
11.3
0.6
578.6

Recoverable 
amount
£m
1,079.7
213.5
42.6
1.8
1,337.6

The Group has conducted a sensitivity analysis taking into consideration the impact on key impairment test assumptions 
arising from a range of possible trading and economic scenarios as outlined in the stress case scenario at Note 1 as well as risk 
weightings applied to cash flows, discount rates used and terminal growth rates as outlined in Note 14. The sensitivity analysis 
show that no reasonably possible movements in these assumptions would lead to an impairment.

The Company has assessed that the Wagamama trademark of £236.0m (2020: £236.0m) has an indefinite useful life, and 
therefore is not amortising this asset. If the trademark was amortised on a straight line basis over a period of 25 years, an 
additional £9.4m (2020: £9.4m) of depreciation would be recognised.

12 Right of use assets

Set out below are the right of use assets recognised in the Group’s balance sheet and movements therein during the year. 
All assets relate to access to and use of property and there is, therefore, no analysis of assets into different classes of use.

Right of use assets at beginning of year
Additions
Disposals
Depreciation
Remeasurements
Impairment (Note 7)
Right of use assets at reporting date

2021
£m
368.9 
18.4 
(4.6)
(39.9)
(40.1)
(13.3)
289.4 

2020
£m
819.5 
18.0 
(167.8)
(73.5)
(105.6)
(121.7)
368.9 

When indicators of impairment exist, right of use assets are assessed for impairment. As described in Note 14, all non-current 
assets were assessed at the end of 2021.

O
v
e
r
v
e
w

i

S

i

t
r
a
t
e
g
c
r
e
p
o
r
t

G
o
v
e
r
n
a
n
c
e

i

F
n
a
n
c

i

a

l

s
t
a
t
e
m
e
n
t
s

The Restaurant Group plc Annual Report 2021  91

 
 
 
Notes to the consolidated accounts continued

13 Property, plant and equipment

Cost
At 29 December 2019
Adjustment on transition to IFRS 16
At 30 December 2019 (Restated)
Additions*
Disposals
Reclassifications
At 27 December 2020*

Accumulated depreciation and impairment
At 29 December 2019
Adjustment on transition to IFRS 16
At 30 December 2019 (Restated)
Provided during the year
Impairment
Impairment reversals 
Disposals
Reclassifications
At 27 December 2020

Cost
At 27 December 2020
Additions
Disposals
At 2 January 2022

Accumulated depreciation and impairment
At 27 December 2020
Provided during the year
Impairment (Note 7)
Impairment reversals (Note 7)
Disposals
At 2 January 2022
Net book value as at 27 December 2020
Net book value as at 2 January 2022

*  Restated – refer to Note 2

Land and 
buildings
£m

Fixtures,
equipment 
and vehicles
£m

647.3
(3.2)
644.1
22.6
(96.3)
–
570.4

380.7
(1.3)
379.4
16.4
23.0
(7.7)
(81.7)
–
329.4

570.4
19.3
(41.0)
548.7

329.4
14.1
13.0
(3.7)
(39.5)
313.1
241.0
235.4

265.3
–
265.3
17.9
(46.6)
1.1
237.7

196.2
–
196.2
20.1
8.1
(2.2)
(42.7)
(1.1)
178.4

237.7
16.4
(82.3)
171.8

178.4
21.8
11.1
(7.8)
(81.4)
122.1
59.3
49.7

Total
£m

912.6
(3.2)
909.4
40.5
(142.9)
1.1
808.1

576.9
(1.3)
575.6
36.5
31.1
(9.9)
(124.4)
(1.1)
507.8

808.1
35.7
(123.3)
720.5

507.8
35.9
24.1
(11.5)
(120.9)
435.4
300.3
285.1

The Group has carried out impairment testing of property, plant and equipment as described in Note 14.

92  The Restaurant Group plc Annual Report 2021

13 Property, plant and equipment continued

The difference between the purchase of property plant and equipment in the cash flow statement and the additions to property 
plant and equipment in Note 13 relates entirely to fixed asset accruals.

Net book value of land and buildings:
Freehold
Long leasehold (leasehold improvements)
Short leasehold (leasehold improvements)

Capital commitments
At 2 January 2022, the Group had commitments of £Nil (2020: £Nil).

14 Impairment reviews

2021
£m

103.2
3.7
128.5
235.4

2020
£m

98.8
3.7
138.5
241.0

The significant trading disruption in the period is judged to be an indicator of potential impairment of assets and, accordingly, the 
Directors have chosen to assess all non-financial assets for impairment in accordance with IAS 36.

Approach and assumptions
Our approach to impairment reviews is unchanged from that applied in previous periods and relies primarily upon “value in use” 
tests, although for freehold sites an independent estimate of market value by site has also been obtained as at 27 December 
2020 and, where this is higher than the value in use, we rely on freehold values in our impairment reviews. These valuations are 
not expected to have materially moved in the period and therefore have been used for the 2021 impairment calculation.

Discount rates used in the value in use calculations are estimated with reference to our Group weighted average cost of capital. 
For 2021, we have applied the discount rate of 10.6% to all assets (2020: 8.7%). The higher discount rate used in 2021, reflects 
that a greater proportion of the capital structure is equity following the capital raise which requires a higher rate of return.

For the current period, value in use estimates have been prepared on the basis of the forecast described above in Note 1 under 
the heading “Going concern basis”. The most significant assumptions and estimates relate to revenue recovery forecast on 
site-by-site cash flows. It is assumed that our businesses, with the exception of Concessions, maintain a steady recovery in 
revenues, with Wagamama being the quickest to recover. Concessions is assumed to recover more slowly, however passenger 
numbers are forecast to return to 2019 levels in 2024. 

Results of impairment review
Impairment has been recorded in a number of specific CGUs, as well as impairment reversals. A net impairment charge of £25.9m 
(2020: £142.9m) has been recognised, of which £12.6m was recorded against Property, Plant & Equipment (“PPE”) and a further 
£13.3m against right of use assets. This is a gross impairment charge of £49.2m offset by impairment reversals of £23.3m.

No impairment was recorded against the Group’s intangible assets (including goodwill).

Sensitivity to further impairment charges
The key assumptions used in the recoverable amount estimates are the discount rates applied and the forecast cash flows. The 
key assumptions used in the recoverable amount estimates are the discount rates applied and the forecast cash flows. The Group 
has conducted a sensitivity analysis taking into consideration the impact on key impairment test assumptions arising from a range 
of possible trading and economic scenarios as well as discount rates used as outlined the going concern basis in Note 1(b). 

The sensitivity analysis of forecast cash flows with a 5% reduction in sales would give rise to an additional Group impairment 
of approximately £44.6m across PPE and right of use assets, made up of an increase in impairment of £33.5m and a reduction 
in impairment reversals of £11.1m. Furthermore, this reduction in sales would also give rise to an impairment to the Goodwill in 
Blubeckers Limited and Ribble Valley Inns Limited of £10.1m, and £1.6m respectively. An increase in inflation rate of 2% would 
give rise to additional impairment of £27.9m, made up of an increase in the impairment expense of £20.6m and a reduction in 
the impairment reversals of £7.3m. A decrease in inflation rate of 2% would give rise to a reduction in impairment of £19.1m, 
made up of a reduction in the impairment expense of £11.3m and a increase in the impairment reversals of £7.8m. An increase 
in discount rate of 1% would give rise to additional impairment of approximately £2.5m, made up of an increase in the 
impairment expense of £1.6m and a reduction in the impairment reversals of £0.9m. 

Additionally, we have conducted sensitivity assessments on terminal growth rate, freehold valuations, and risk factors but 
a reasonably possible change was not material to the impairment charge.

The Restaurant Group plc Annual Report 2021  93

O
v
e
r
v
e
w

i

S

i

t
r
a
t
e
g
c
r
e
p
o
r
t

G
o
v
e
r
n
a
n
c
e

i

F
n
a
n
c

i

a

l

s
t
a
t
e
m
e
n
t
s

 
 
 
Notes to the consolidated accounts continued

15 Trade and other receivables

Amounts falling due within one year:

Net investment in subleases
Trade and other receivables

Amounts falling due after one year:

Net investment in subleases
Long term receivables 

2021
£m

0.5
13.4
13.9

2.3
2.4
4.7

2020
£m

0.6
15.5
16.1

3.0
–
3.0

The Group applies a simplified approach to expected credit losses, recognising a loss allowance based on historic losses and 
economic factors relating to specific customers. The expected credit loss included in other receivables is immaterial. 

The £2.4m in long term receivables relates to a $3.3m USD loan arrangement the Group has with a US based restaurant 
business. The loan has an annual interest rate of LIBOR +10% and a maturity of April 2024.

16 Trade and other payables

Amounts falling due within one year:

Trade payables
Other tax and social security
Other payables
Accruals

2021
£m

21.7
12.9
21.2
72.5
128.3

2020
£m

40.1
18.0
16.3
42.3
116.7

Contingent liabilities
The Group has assigned a number of leases to third parties that were originally completed prior to 1 January 1996 and are 
therefore unaffected by the Landlord and Tenant (Covenants) Act 1995 and also a number of leases completed after this date that 
were the subject of an Authorised Guarantee Agreement. Consequently, should the current tenant default, the landlord has a right 
of recourse to The Restaurant Group plc, or its subsidiaries, for future rental payments. As and when any liability arises, the Group 
will take whatever steps necessary to mitigate the costs. The Group has assessed the risk of this happening as remote.

94  The Restaurant Group plc Annual Report 2021

17 Provisions

Property cost provisions
Other provisions
Balance at the end of the year
Analysed as:

Amount due for settlement within one year
Amount due for settlement after one year

At 27 December 2020
Remeasurement
Amounts utilised
Unwinding of discount
At 2 January 2022

2021
£m
12.9
2.4
15.3

6.0
9.3
15.3

Property cost 
provisions
£m
11.3
6.2
(4.6)
–
12.9

Other 
provisions
£m
1.3
2.4
(1.3)
–
2.4

2020
£m
11.3
1.3
12.6

4.3
8.3
12.6

Total
£m
12.6
8.6
(5.9)
–
15.3

Property cost provisions
A provision is made for property-related costs for the period that a sublet or assignment of the lease is not expected to be 
possible. The amount and timing of the cash outflows are subject to uncertainty. The average period over which the provision 
is expected to be utilised is 2.3 years which is a key assumption in the valuation of the provision. An increase of one year in the 
expected period over which a sublet or assignment is not expected to be possible would result in an increase in the provision 
of £3.4m, whilst a decrease would result in a reduction on the provision of £3.5m.

Onerous contract and other property provisions are discounted using a discount rate of 1.0% (2020: 1.0%) based on an 
approximation for the time value of money.

Other provisions
Other provisions includes a best estimate of the liability in respect of a constructive obligation to meet certain lease payments 
of a restaurant operated by an associate, the liability for which is considered probable on the closure of that restaurant, most 
likely within a year.

18 Lease liabilities and net investments in subleases

The Group is both a lessee and lessor of property.

(a) Group as lessee
Set out below are the movements in the carrying amount of lease liabilities during the period. All leases relate to access to and 
use of property.

At 27 December 2020
Additions
Unwinding of discount on lease liabilities
Cash payments made
Liabilities extinguished in disposals
Remeasurements
At 2 January 2022
Analysed as:

Amount due for settlement within one year
Amount due for settlement after one year

2021
£m
483.8
18.4
19.6
(48.7)
(9.5)
(53.2)
410.4

73.1
337.3
410.4

2020
£m
933.4
18.0
21.0
(30.8)
(335.7)
(122.1)
483.8

91.5
392.3
483.8

The Restaurant Group plc Annual Report 2021  95

O
v
e
r
v
e
w

i

S

i

t
r
a
t
e
g
c
r
e
p
o
r
t

G
o
v
e
r
n
a
n
c
e

i

F
n
a
n
c

i

a

l

s
t
a
t
e
m
e
n
t
s

 
 
 
Notes to the consolidated accounts continued

18 Lease liabilities and net investments in subleases continued

The Group leases various buildings which are used for the purpose of operating pubs and restaurants. The leases are non-
cancellable operating leases with varying terms and renewal rights, and include variable payments that are not fixed in amount 
but based upon a percentage of sales. 

The total value of expense relating to low value leases in 2021 was £7,793 (2020: £61,588).

In addition to the unwinding of discount on lease liabilities noted in the above table and depreciation on right of use assets, 
the Group is exposed to leases where future cash outflows are not reflected in the lease liabilities because the agreements are 
based on variable lease payments in the form of turnover rent. The Group also incurred £0.6m (2020: £2.3m) of costs relating 
to short term leases.

As at 2 January 2022, the Group was not committed to any leases with future cash outflows which had not yet commenced.

Sensitivity to changes in assumptions
Termination Options
Some leases contain termination options exercisable by group before the end of the non-cancellable period. These 
extension and termination options held are exercisable only by the group and not by the lessors. The group assesses at 
lease commencement whether it is reasonably certain to exercise the extension or termination options. The group reassesses 
whether it is reasonably certain to exercise the options if there is a significant event or significant change in circumstances 
within its control.

The group has estimated that the potential future lease payments, should it exercise the termination options, would result in 
a decrease in cash outflows of £105.0m.

Discount Rate
Lease liabilities under IFRS 16 are initially recorded at the present value of future lease payments discounted using the Group’s 
incremental borrowing rate, which we estimate with reference to our debt facilities and observed bond yields, calculated on a 
lease by lease basis. Lease liabilities are subsequently unwound using the same discount rate and included in finance expense 
in the Group Profit and Loss. Increasing the discount rate by 1% would lead to an increased interest expense of £0.5m, while 
decreasing by 1% would lead to a decrease of £0.6m.

(b) Group as lessor
All income relates to fixed rental receipts. Movements in the net investment in lease assets included income of £0.9m and 
an expected credit loss provision of £2.8m. There was no income from leases classified as operating leases.

Finance leases
Undiscounted lease receipts relating to finance leases for future years are set out in the table below. The total in the table for 
Finance Leases is greater than the balance sheet amount due to the effects of discounting and provisions for expected credit 
losses. There is no undiscounted unguaranteed residual value within the amounts recognised.

Amounts receivable in the next year
Amounts receivable in 1-2 years
Amounts receivable in 2-3 years
Amounts receivable in 3-4 years
Amounts receivable in 4-5 years
Amounts receivable after 5 years from the balance sheet date
Total

2021
£m
1.1
0.9
0.9
0.9
0.8
6.5
11.1

2020
£m
 0.8 
 0.6 
 0.4 
 0.4 
 0.4 
 4.0 
 6.6 

96  The Restaurant Group plc Annual Report 2021

18 Lease liabilities and net investments in subleases continued

Operating leases

Amounts receivable in the next year
Amounts receivable in 1-2 years
Amounts receivable in 2-3 years
Amounts receivable in 3-4 years
Amounts receivable in 4-5 years
Amounts receivable after 5 years from the balance sheet date
Total

19 Deferred taxation

As at 27 December 2020
Movement in deferred tax 
balances (net of exceptional credit)
Adjustments in respect of  
previous years
Deferred tax taken directly to 
the income statement (Note 9)

Tax on share-based payments
Deferred tax taken  
through equity
As at 2 January 2022

Capital 
allowances
£m
0.7

Intangible 
assets
£m
48.7

Share  
options
£m
(0.3)

(0.7)

(0.2)

(0.9)

–

–
(0.2)

14.8

(0.1)

14.7

–

–
63.4

(0.7)

–

(0.7)

(0.5)

(0.5)
(1.5)

Losses*
£m
(4.9)

(3.5)

(6.3)

(9.8)

–

–
(14.7)

Other
£m
(4.5)

(2.2)

1.6

(0.6)

–

–
(5.1)

Deferred tax consists of:

Capital allowances in advance of depreciation
Intangible assets
Share options
Tax losses
Other temporary differences

*  Restated – refer to Note 2

2021
£m
0.4
0.4
0.3
0.3
0.3
3.9
5.6

2021
Total
£m
39.7

7.7

(5.0)

2.7

(0.5)

(0.5)
41.9

2021
£m

(0.2)
63.4
(1.5)
(14.7)
(5.1)
41.9

2020
£m
 0.4 
 0.3 
 0.2 
 0.1 
 0.1 
 0.8 
 1.9 

2020*
Total
£m
39.5

1.0

(0.9)

0.1

0.1

0.1
39.7

2020*
£m

0.7
48.7
(0.3)
(4.9)
(4.5)
39.7

During the year the Group recognised a deferred tax asset of £2.4m (2020: £Nil) relating to corporate interest restrictions. 
At 2 January 2022 the Group had an unrecognised deferred tax asset of £0.5m (2020: £2.9m) relating to losses. 

O
v
e
r
v
e
w

i

S

i

t
r
a
t
e
g
c
r
e
p
o
r
t

G
o
v
e
r
n
a
n
c
e

i

F
n
a
n
c

i

a

l

s
t
a
t
e
m
e
n
t
s

The Restaurant Group plc Annual Report 2021  97

 
 
 
Notes to the consolidated accounts continued

20 Share capital

Authorised, issued and fully paid
At 27 December 2020
Shares issued in the year
At 2 January 2022

Number

£m

589,795,475
175,251,125
765,046,600

165.9
49.3
215.2

The shares have a par value of 28.125p each (2020: 28.125p).

On 10 March 2021, the Company issued 175,241,238 shares for an offer price of 100.0p, generating gross proceeds of £175.2m. 
Expenses of £8.4m were incurred and have been offset in the share premium account leaving net proceeds of £166.8m.

Treasury shares
At 27 December 2020
Shares transferred in the period
At 2 January 2022

Number

66,955
(50,588)
16,367

£m

0.2
(0.1)
0.1

The Treasury shares are held to satisfy the Group’s long term deferred bonus incentive scheme.

21 Share-based payment schemes

The Group operates a number of share-based payment schemes, details of which are provided in the Directors’ 
remuneration report. 

A charge has been recorded in the income statement of the Group in respect of share-based payments of £3.4m (2020: £2.0m).

The other reserves account in the balance sheet reflects the credit to equity made in respect of the charge for share-based 
payments made through the income statement and the purchase of shares in the market by the EBT in order to satisfy the 
vesting of existing and future share awards under the Long-Term Incentive Plan.

Restricted Share Plan
The Group has issued a Restricted Share Plan to certain employees and Directors as described in the Directors’ remuneration 
report. Instruments granted under this plan represent deferred shares, of which certain are subject to performance conditions. 
No exercise price is payable on these instruments.

Year ended 2 January 2022
Period during 
which options 
are exercisable
2023
2024

Type of award
Restricted Share Plan
Restricted Share Plan

Year ended 27 December 2020
Period during 
which options 
are exercisable
2023

Type of award
Restricted Share Plan

Outstanding at 
the beginning 
of the year
6,569,564
 – 

Fair value
54.0p
127.0p

Outstanding at 
the beginning 
of the year
 – 

Fair value
54.0p

Granted
6,643,375
 2,174,660 

Exercised
 –
 – 

Lapsed
(6,569,564)
 –

Outstanding at 
the end of  
the year
6,643,375
 2,174,660 

Exercisable at 
the end of  
the year
 –
 – 

Granted
 6,589,488 

Exercised
 – 

Lapsed
(19,924)

Outstanding at 
the end of  
the year
 6,569,564 

Exercisable at 
the end of  
the year
 – 

Owing to the terms of the instruments, their fair value is estimated to match the market value of shares at the date of grant.

Vesting of share options under the Restricted Share Plan is dependent on continuing employment as set out in the scheme rules.

In exceptional circumstances, employees may be permitted to exercise options before the normal vesting date.

98  The Restaurant Group plc Annual Report 2021

21 Share-based payment schemes continued

Save As You Earn
Under the Save As You Earn (SAYE) scheme, the Board may grant options over shares in The Restaurant Group plc to UK-
based employees of the Group. Options are granted with a fixed exercise price equal to 80% of the average market price of the 
shares for the five days prior to invitation. Employees pay a fixed amount from their salary into a savings account each month for 
the three year savings period. At the end of the savings period, employees have six months in which to exercise their options 
using the funds saved. If employees decide not to exercise their options, they may withdraw their funds saved and the options 
expire. Exercise of options is subject to continued employment within the Group. In exceptional circumstances, employees may 
be permitted to exercise these options before the end of the three year savings period. Options were valued using the Black-
Scholes pricing model.

Year ended 2 January 2022

Outstanding at 
the beginning 
Period during which 
of the year
options are exercisable Exercise price
 85,395 
243.8p
2020-2021
 114,428 
239.5p
2021-2022
112.7p
2022-2023
 462,991 
52.0p  6,461,939 
2023-2024
 – 
2024-2025
88.0p
Total number
 7,124,753 
Weighted average 
exercise price

 61.3p 

Granted
 – 
 – 
 – 
 – 
 1,550,073 
 1,550,073 

Forfeited
 – 
(60,482) 
(186,869) 
(743,006) 
(44,996) 
(1,035,353) 

Exercised
 – 
 – 
(4,036) 
(5,851) 
 – 
(9,887) 

Outstanding at 
the end of  
the year
 – 
 42,298 
 240,469 
 5,683,825 
 1,505,077 
 7,471,669 

Lapsed
(85,395) 
(11,648) 
(31,617) 
(29,257) 
 – 
(157,917) 

Exercisable at 
the end of  
the year
 – 
 – 
 – 
 – 
 – 
 – 

 88.0p 

 75.5p 

 76.8p 

 181.7p 

 62.3p 

 – 

The weighted average remaining contractual life for the shares outstanding at the end of the period is 2.08 years (2020: 2.80 years).

Year ended 27 December 2020

Period during which 
options are exercisable
2019-2020
2020-2021
2021-2022
2022-2023
2023-2024
Total number
Weighted average 
exercise price

Exercise price
307.0p
243.8p
239.5p
112.7p
52.0p

Outstanding at 
the beginning 
of the year
 332,387 
 367,364 
 302,685 
 2,712,152 
 – 
 3,714,588 

Granted
 – 
 – 
 – 
 – 
 6,493,189 
 6,493,189 

Forfeited
(332,387)
(265,796)
(186,200)
(2,249,161)
(31,250)
(3,064,794)

Exercised
 – 
 – 
 – 
 – 
 – 
 – 

Outstanding at 
the end of  
the year
 – 
 85,395 
 114,428 
 462,991 
 6,461,939 
 7,124,753 

Lapsed
 – 
(16,173)
(2,057)
– 
 – 
(18,230) 

Exercisable at 
the end of  
the year
 – 
 – 
 – 
 – 
–
 – 

 153.4p 

 52.0p 

 133.4p 

 – 

 243.3p 

 61.3p 

 – 

O
v
e
r
v
e
w

i

S

i

t
r
a
t
e
g
c
r
e
p
o
r
t

G
o
v
e
r
n
a
n
c
e

i

F
n
a
n
c

i

a

l

s
t
a
t
e
m
e
n
t
s

The Restaurant Group plc Annual Report 2021  99

 
 
 
Notes to the consolidated accounts continued

21 Share-based payment schemes continued

Long-Term Incentive Plan
The Group operates the 2005 Long-Term Incentive Plan (LTIP), details of which are provided in the Directors’ remuneration 
report. Awards under the LTIP are granted to Executive Directors and Senior Management in the form of nil cost options. 

Year ended 2 January 2022

Period during 
which options  
are exercisable
2021
2021
2021
2021
2022
2022
2022
2022
Total number

Type of award
Conditional – TSR element
Conditional – EPS element
Conditional – TSR element
Conditional – EPS element
Conditional – TSR element
Conditional – EPS element
Conditional – TSR element
Conditional – EPS element

Year ended 27 December 2020

Period during 
which options  
are exercisable
2020
2020
2021
2021
2021
2021
2022
2022
2022
2022
Total number

Type of award
Conditional – TSR element
Conditional – EPS element
Conditional – TSR element
Conditional – EPS element
Conditional – TSR element
Conditional – EPS element
Conditional – TSR element
Conditional – EPS element
Conditional – TSR element
Conditional – EPS element

Outstanding 
at the 
beginning  
Granted
of the year
Fair value
 – 
 412,536 
128.0p
 – 
 412,536 
226.0p
 – 
 12,564
149.0p
276.6p
 – 
 12,564 
44.6p  1,708,606   1,727,803 
112.4p  1,708,606   1,727,803 
 771,959 
 763,378 
69.7p
 771,959 
 763,378 
149.7p
 5,794,168   4,999,524

Lapsed
(412,536) 
(412,536) 
(12,564) 
(12,564) 

Outstanding 
at the end  
of the year
Exercised
 – 
 – 
 – 
 – 
 – 
 – 
 – 
 – 
 –  (1,708,606)   1,727,803 
 –  (1,708,606)   1,727,803 
 771,959 
 – 
 – 
 771,959 
 –  (5,794,168)  4,999,524

(763,378) 
(763,378) 

Exercisable 
at the end of  
the year
 – 
 – 
 – 
 – 
 – 
 – 
 – 
 – 
 – 

Outstanding 
at the 
beginning of 
the year
Fair value
 226,717 
201.7p
 226,717 
333.2p
 514,931 
128.0p
 514,931 
226.0p
 12,564 
149.0p
276.6p
 12,564 
44.6p  2,158,618 
112.4p  2,158,618 
 817,632 
69.7p
 817,632 
149.7p
 7,460,924 

Lapsed
(226,717) 
(226,717) 
(102,395) 
(102,395) 
 – 
 – 

Outstanding 
at the end of 
the year
Exercised
 –
 – 
 –
 – 
 412,536 
 – 
 412,536 
 – 
 12,564 
 – 
 12,564 
 – 
(450,012)  1,708,606 
 – 
(450,012)  1,708,606 
 – 
 763,378 
(54,254) 
 – 
 – 
 763,378 
(54,254) 
 – (1,666,756)  5,794,168

Exercisable 
at the end  
of the year
 – 
 – 
 – 
 – 
 – 
 – 
 – 
 – 
 – 
 – 
 – 

Granted
 – 
 – 
 – 
 – 
 – 
 – 
 – 
 – 
 – 
 – 
 – 

Assumptions used in valuation of share-based payments granted in the year ended 2 January 2022:
Scheme
Grant date

 2021 SAYE
01/12/2021

2021 RSP
01/04/2021

2020 RSP
08/10/2020

2020 SAYE
08/12/2020

Share price at grant date
Exercise price
No. of options originally granted
Minimum vesting period
Expected volatility1
Contractual life
Risk free rate
Expected dividend yield
Expected forfeitures
Fair value per option

127.0p
N/A
2,174,660
3 years
N/A
3 years
N/A
N/A
12.0%
127.0p

85.8p
88.0p
1,550,073
3 years
81.5%
3 years
0.57%
1.25%
9.0%
45.0p

54.0p
N/A
6,589,488
3 years
N/A
3 years
N/A
N/A
23.0%
67.5p

70.0p
51.3p
6,493,189
3 years
80.7%
3 years
0.06%
0.00%
27.0%
36.8p

1  Expected volatility is the measure of the amount by which the share price is expected to fluctuate during a period. In order to calculate volatility, the movement in share 

price over a period prior to the grant date has been calculated. For the discount for the SAYE scheme, the calculated volatility based on the movement in share price over 
a period of 3.25 years prior to the grant has been used

Employee Benefit Trust
An employee benefit trust (EBT) was established in 2007 in order to satisfy the exercise or vesting of existing and future share 
awards under the Long-Term Incentive Plan. The EBT purchases shares in the market, using funds provided by the Company, 
based on expectations of future requirements. Dividends are waived by the EBT. At 2 January 2022, the Trustees, Estera Trust 
(Jersey) Limited, held 572,565 shares in the Company (27 December 2020: 591,480 shares).

100 The Restaurant Group plc Annual Report 2021

22 Reconciliation of profit before tax to cash generated from operations

Loss on ordinary activities before tax
Net interest payable
Exceptional items (Note 7)* 
Share of result of associate
Share-based payments
Depreciation and amortisation
(Increase)/decrease in inventory
Decrease in receivables
Increase/(decrease) in creditors
Cash generated from operations

*   Restated – refer to Note 2

2021
£m
(32.9)
45.1
24.9
0.3
3.4
78.1
(0.9)
5.1
5.0
128.1

2020
£m
(132.9)
37.8
45.4
0.6
2.0
103.1
3.6
15.9
(72.3)
3.2

Of the cash and cash equivalents at 2 January 2022, £40.0m is maintained in support of minimum liquidity requirements under 
borrowing covenants.

Reconciliation of net cash from operations to free cash flow
Net cash flows from operating activities
Payment on exceptionals
Payment of obligations under leases
Refurbishment and maintenance expenditure
Payment against provisions
Free cash flow

23 Financial instruments and derivatives

2021
£m

91.6
7.4
(48.7)
(19.0)
13.4
44.7

Financial assets
The financial assets of the Group, which are classified at amortised cost and fair value through profit and loss, comprise:

Cash and cash equivalents
Other receivables
Financial assets at amortised cost
Derivative financial instrument
Financial assets at fair value through profit and loss
Total financial assets

*   Restated to include long term other receivables

2021
£m
146.5
18.6
165.1
2.1
2.1
167.2

2020
£m

(42.1)
34.9
(30.8)
(21.9)
9.3
(50.6)

2020*
£m
40.7
19.1
59.8
–
–
59.8

Cash and cash equivalents are comprised of cash at bank and cash floats held on site. The cash and cash equivalents balance 
includes £5.4m (2020: £0.7m) of credit card receipts that were cleared post year end.

Cash and cash equivalents also include £0.9m (2020: £0.8m) held on account in respect of deposits paid by tenants under the 
terms of their rental agreement.

During the period, the Group entered into a derivative in the form of an interest rate cap which is measured at fair value through 
the profit and loss. The interest rate cap has an effective date of November 2022 to November 2025, for a value of £100.0m. 
The strike price of the interest rate cap is 0.75%. Net gains or losses associated to the movement in the fair value of the interest 
rate cap do not include any interest paid relating to the interest rate cap. 

The Restaurant Group plc Annual Report 2021 101

O
v
e
r
v
e
w

i

S

i

t
r
a
t
e
g
c
r
e
p
o
r
t

G
o
v
e
r
n
a
n
c
e

i

F
n
a
n
c

i

a

l

s
t
a
t
e
m
e
n
t
s

 
 
 
Notes to the consolidated accounts continued

23 Financial instruments and derivatives continued

Financial liabilities
The financial liabilities of the Group, all of which are classified as other financial liabilities at amortised cost, comprise:

Trade and other payables
Lease liabilities
Short-term financial liabilities
Long-term borrowings – at fixed interest rates
Long-term borrowings – at floating interest rates1
Bank fees
Lease liabilities
Other payables
Long-term financial liabilities
Total financial liabilities

2021
£m
128.3
73.1
201.4
–
330.0
(11.9)
337.3
–
655.4
856.8

2020
£m
116.7
91.5
208.2
225.0
158.6
(2.5)
392.3
1.3
774.7
982.9

¹   Total financial liabilities attracting interest were £330.0m (2020: £383.6m). Interest is payable at floating interest rates which fluctuate and are dependent on LIBOR and 

base rate. The average rate of interest charged during the year on the Group’s debt was 5.70% (2020: 3.50%)

On 2021 results, net interest was covered 2.5 times (2020: 1.4 times) by earnings before interest, tax, depreciation and 
exceptional items. Based on year-end debt and earnings for 2021, a 1% rise in interest rates would reduce interest cover 
to 2.3 times (2020: 1.4 times).

At 2 January 2022, the interest rate on the Term Loan is 6.5% above LIBOR. A commitment fee of 1.2% is charged on the 
undrawn Revolving Credit Facility. The maturity dates on the Group’s debt facilities are as follows: May 2026 for the Term Loan; 
and May 2025 for the Revolving Credit Facility.

Capital risk management 
The Group manages its capital to ensure that it will be able to continue as a going concern while looking to maximise returns to 
shareholders. The capital structure of the Group consists of equity (comprising issued share capital, other reserves and retained 
earnings), borrowings and cash and cash equivalents. The Group monitors its capital structure on a regular basis through cash 
flow projections and consideration of the cost of financing its capital.

The Group is subject to externally imposed capital requirements in respect of the Term Loan and Revolving Credit Facility. 
The Group is required to maintain a net debt to EBITDA ratio and a minimum liquidity requirement of £40.0m. The leverage 
covenants do not take effect until December 2022, subject to maintaining the £40.0m minimum liquidity requirement.

102 The Restaurant Group plc Annual Report 2021

23 Financial instruments and derivatives continued

Secured liabilities and assets pledged as security

The Group has pledged certain assets in order to fulfil the collateral requirements of the Term Loan and Revolving Credit Facility. 

The Term Loan and Revolving Credit Facility are secured by a fixed charge over the shares and intellectual property of TRG 
(Holdings) Limited, The Restaurant Group (UK) Limited, Blubeckers Limited, Brunning and Price Limited, TRG Concessions 
Limited, Wagamama Limited and Wagamama Group Limited, as well as a floating charge on all present and future assets, 
property, business, undertaking and uncalled capital.

The maturity profile of anticipated gross future cash flows, including interest, relating to the Group’s non-derivative financial 
liabilities, on an undiscounted basis, are set out below:

At 2 January 2022
Within one year
Within one to two years
Within two to three years
Within three to four years
Within four to five years
After five years

At 27 December 2020
Within one year
Within one to two years
Within two to three years
Within three to four years
Within four to five years
After five years

Trade and 
other
payables
excluding tax
£m
128.3
–
–
–
–
–
128.3

Trade and 
other
payables
excluding tax
£m
116.7
–
–
–
–
–
116.7

Fixed
rate loan
£m
–
–
–
–
–
–
–

Fixed
rate loan
£m
9.6
4.6
225.2
–
–
–
239.4

Floating
rate loan
£m
24.6
24.6
24.6
23.7
353.1
–
450.6

Floating
rate loan
£m
14.0
144.6
–
–
–
–
158.6

Lease
liability debt
£m
74.6
58.4
53.4
47.8
40.2
262.7
537.1

Lease
liability debt
£m
94.1
65.0
61.1
56.1
52.0
289.9
618.2

Total
£m
227.5
83.0
78.0
71.5
393.3
262.7
1,116.0

Total
£m
234.4
214.2
286.3
56.1
52.0
289.9
1,132.9

O
v
e
r
v
e
w

i

S

i

t
r
a
t
e
g
c
r
e
p
o
r
t

G
o
v
e
r
n
a
n
c
e

i

F
n
a
n
c

i

a

l

s
t
a
t
e
m
e
n
t
s

The Restaurant Group plc Annual Report 2021 103

 
 
 
Notes to the consolidated accounts continued

23 Financial instruments and derivatives continued

Fair value of financial assets and liabilities
Financial assets at fair value
There were no transfers between Levels 1, 2 and 3 fair value measurements during the current or prior period. The Group has no 
financial assets or liabilities that require measurement using Level 2 or Level 3 measurement techniques as defined by IFRS 13.

Long-term borrowings

High yield bond
Term loan
Revolving credit facilities
CLBILS*
Total banking facilities
Unamortised loan fees
Long-term borrowings

Cash and cash equivalents
Pre-lease liability net debt
Lease liabilities
Net debt
Cash headroom

Total  
facility
£m
225.0 
– 
195.0 
50.0 
470.0

At 2 January 2022

At 27 December 2020

Drawn
£m
–
330.0
–
–
330.0
(11.9)
318.1

146.5
171.6
410.4
582.0

Available 
facility
£m
–
–
111.6
–
111.6

146.5

258.1

Total  
facility
£m
–
330.0
120.0
–
450.0

Drawn
£m
225.0 
– 
108.6 
50.0 
383.6 
(2.5)
381.1 

40.7 
340.4 
483.8 
824.2 

Available  
facility
£m
– 
– 
78.0 
– 
78.0

40.7 

118.7 

The Group has covenants over both the term loan and the revolving credit facilities (RCF). Until 31 December 2022, both facilities 
require a minimum liquidity level of £40.0m which is measured as the total of cash and undrawn facilities. On the term loan, from 
31 December 2022, the covenant requires total net debt to be no more than 5.0x EBITDA, reducing to 4.5x at June 2023. On the 
RCF, the Group is required to maintain total net debt to EBITDA below 5.5x at 31 December 2022, and 4.75x at 30 June 2023. 
In addition, the ratio of RCF debt to EBITDA can be no more than 1.5x from June 2022, when the RCF is drawn. 

The available revolving credit facilities are reduced from the total facility by £8.4m of letters of credit issued to external suppliers.

*  CLBILS was fully paid on 17 May 2021

Net Debt

Balance as at 29 December 2019
Adjustment on transition to IFRS 16
Opening balance as at 30 December 2019

Net drawdown of borrowings
Repayment of overdraft
Upfront loan facility fee paid
Repayment of obligations under leases
Non-cash movements in the year
Net cash outflow

Balance as at 27 December 2020
Net repayments of borrowings
Upfront loan facility fee paid
Repayment of obligations under leases
Non-cash movements in the year
Net cash inflow

Balance as at 2 January 2022

Cash and cash 
equivalents
£m
49.8
–
49.8
56.6
(10.0)
(0.9)
(30.8)
–
(24.0)
40.7
(53.6)
(14.6)
(48.7)
–
222.7
146.5

Bank loans 
falling due 
after one year
£m
(323.8)
–
(323.8)
(56.6)
–
0.9
–
(1.6)
–
(381.1)
53.6
14.6
–
(5.2)
–
(318.1)

Overdraft
£m
(10.0)
–
(10.0)
–
10.0
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–

Finance  
leases
£m
(2.6)
2.6
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–

Lease 
liabilities
£m
–
(933.4)
(933.4)
–
–
–
30.8
418.8
–
(483.8)
–
–
48.7
24.7
–
(410.4)

Total
£m
(286.6)
(930.8)
(1,217.4)
–
–
–
–
417.2
(24.0)
(824.2)
–
–
–
19.5
222.7
(582.0)

The non-cash movements in lease liabilities are in relation to the de-recognition and remeasurement of lease liabilities, while the 
non-cash movement in bank loans are in relation to amortisation of prepaid facility costs.

104 The Restaurant Group plc Annual Report 2021

24 Financial risk management

The Group finances its operations through equity and borrowings.

Management pay rigorous attention to treasury management requirements and continue to:

•  ensure sufficient committed loan facilities are in place to support anticipated business requirements;

•  ensure the Group’s debt service will be supported by anticipated cash flows and that covenants will be complied with; and

•  manage interest rate exposure with a combination of floating rate debt and interest rate swaps when deemed appropriate.

The Board closely monitors the Group’s treasury strategy and the management of treasury risk.

Further details on the business risk factors that are considered to affect the Group are included in the Senior Management Risk 
Committee Report and more specific financial risk management (including sensitivity to increases in interest rates) are included 
in the Directors’ Report.

(a) Credit risk 
Credit risk refers to the risk that a counterparty will default on its contractual obligations resulting in financial losses to the Group. 
Counterparties for cash balances are large established financial institutions. The Group is exposed to credit related losses in the 
event of non-performance by the financial institutions but does not expect them to fail to meet their obligations. 

As a retail business with trading receipts settled either by cash or credit and debit cards, there is very limited exposure from 
customer transactions. The Group is exposed to credit risk in respect of commercial discounts receivable. The Directors make 
regular assessments of the recoverability of commercial discount receivables based on their knowledge of the customer, historic 
payments and relevant macroeconomic factors. An appropriate provision will be made if it is considered the amounts will not be 
recovered, either partially or in full. This is consistent with the previous period. Receivables that are neither past due nor impaired 
are expected to be fully recoverable. 

The carrying amount of financial assets recorded in the financial statements, net of any allowances for losses, represent the 
Group’s maximum exposure to credit.

Subleases
The credit risk in relation to net investment in subleases is subject to the Groups policy and procedures relating to credit risk. 
As at 2 January 2022, the Group has 13 subleases with a rent receivable balance of £2.7m. 

As at 2 January 2022, £0.1m of sublease receivables that were written off during the reporting period.

The impairment analysis is performed at each reporting date. The credit quality of each tenant is assessed individually 
to estimate the probability of default for the expected credit loss calculation. The assessment is based on forward looking 
information of each tenant such as individual financial performance as well as wider economic conditions and monitoring 
the days past due with respect to outstanding rent. The exposure at default is considered to be the carrying value of the 
outstanding rent for the remainder of the sublease agreement.

O
v
e
r
v
e
w

i

S

i

t
r
a
t
e
g
c
r
e
p
o
r
t

G
o
v
e
r
n
a
n
c
e

i

F
n
a
n
c

i

a

l

s
t
a
t
e
m
e
n
t
s

The Restaurant Group plc Annual Report 2021 105

 
 
 
Notes to the consolidated accounts continued

24 Financial risk management continued

Franchisees
The credit risk in relation to franchisee debtors is subject to the Groups policy and procedures relating to credit risk. As at 
2 January 2022, the Group has 32 franchisee debtors in relation to Wagamama, with a receivable balance of £1.3 million. 
The impairment analysis is performed at each reporting date for franchisees also. The ECL relating to franchisees as at 
2 January 2022 was £0.6m.

Stage 1
£m

Stage 2
£m

Stage 3
£m

Total
£m

Gross carrying 
amount

Expected  
credit loss

Gross carrying 
amount

Expected  
credit loss

Gross carrying 
amount

Expected  
credit loss

Gross carrying 
amount

Expected  
credit loss

As at 
27 December 2020
Transfers to stage 1
Transfers to stage 2
Transfers to stage 3
Receipts
Additions
Recoveries
Charge for the year
Write offs
As at 2 January 2022

1.2
3.9
(1.0)
–
(1.1)
0.2
–
–
–
3.2

0.8
0.3
(0.9)
–
–
–
(0.4)
0.7
–
0.5

6.1
(3.9)
1.0
(1.3)
(0.2)
0.6
–
–
–
2.3

2.6
(0.3)
0.9
(1.9)
–
–
(0.1)
0.5
–
1.7

2.8
–
–
1.3
–
–
–
–
–
4.1

2.6
–
–
1.9
–
–
(0.6)
0.1
–
4.0

 10.1 
 – 
 – 
 – 
(1.3)
0.8 
 – 
 – 
 – 
9.6 

6.0
 –
 –
 –
 –
 –
(1.1)
1.3
 –
6.2

(b) Liquidity risk
The Group has built an appropriate mechanism to manage liquidity risk of the short, medium and long-term funding and liquidity 
management requirements. Liquidity risk is managed through the maintenance of adequate cash reserves and bank facility by 
monitoring forecast and actual cash flows and matching the maturity profiles of financial assets and liabilities. The Group’s Term 
Loan matures in May 2026 (as set out above) and the Revolving Credit Facility matures in May 2025. The Group facilities along 
with covenant waivers (as detailed in the Directors Report) ensures continuity of funding.

(c) Interest rate risk 
Interest rate risk is the risk that the fair value or future cash flows of a financial instrument will fluctuate because of changes in 
market interest rates. The Group’s exposure to the risk of changes in market interest rates relates primarily to the Group’s 
long-term debt obligations and has been controlled historically through the use of fixed and floating rate debt.

In the year, to manage the risk of interest rate changes on borrowings, the Group entered into an interest rate cap. The interest 
rate cap has an effective date of November 2022 to November 2025, for a value of £100.0m. The strike price of the interest rate 
cap is 0.75% and a total premium of £1.6m was paid. 

As a result, a 1% rise or fall in interest rate will have a £1.5m impact on interest expense (as set out above). Based on EBITDA 
after exceptionals for 2021, the Group has enough coverage for interest rate risk.

Foreign Currency Movement
During the year, the Group made a £0.1m foreign currency gain (2020: £0.1m gain) on translation of foreign subsidiaries.

25 Related party transactions

There were no related party transactions in the 53 weeks ended 2 January 2022 other than those relating to key management 
personnel.

Remuneration in respect of key management personnel, defined as the Directors for this purpose, is disclosed in Note 6.  
Further information concerning the Directors’ remuneration is provided in the Directors’ remuneration report.

26 Subsequent Events

There are no subsequent events which would have a material impact on the financial statements at the balance sheet date.

106 The Restaurant Group plc Annual Report 2021

Company balance sheet

At 2 January 
2022
£m

Note

At  
27 December 
2020 
(Restated – 
Note 2)
£m

Non-current assets
Investments in subsidiary undertakings
Loans to subsidiary undertakings
Derivatives measured at fair value through profit & loss

4
5
6

123.2
751.7
2.1
877.0

122.0
122.0

119.8
497.3
–
617.1

16.9
16.9

999.0

634.0

(0.3)
(0.9)
(3.7)
(4.9)

(0.5)
–
(1.3)
(1.8)

117.1

15.1

994.1

632.2

6
7

(318.1)
(1.2)

(148.6)
(2.5)

674.8

481.1

215.2
394.1
0.1
65.4
674.8

165.9
276.6
(3.3)
41.9
481.1

O
v
e
r
v
e
w

i

S

i

t
r
a
t
e
g
c
r
e
p
o
r
t

G
o
v
e
r
n
a
n
c
e

i

F
n
a
n
c

i

a

l

s
t
a
t
e
m
e
n
t
s

Current assets
Cash and cash equivalents

Total assets

Current liabilities
Lease liability
Amounts falling due within one year to Group undertakings
Accruals

Net current assets

Total assets less current liabilities

Long-term borrowings
Lease liability

Net assets

Capital and reserves
Share capital
Share premium account
Other reserves
Profit and loss account
Shareholders’ funds

The Company’s profit for the year was £28.4m (2020: restated loss of £51.3m).

The financial statements of The Restaurant Group plc (company registration number SC030343) on pages 107 to 114 were 
approved by the Board of Directors and authorised for issue on 15 March 2022 and were signed on its behalf by:

Andy Hornby (CEO) 

Kirk Davis (CFO)

The Restaurant Group plc Annual Report 2021 107

 
 
 
Statement of changes in equity

Balance at 29 December 2019
Issue of shares
Employee share-based payment schemes
Total comprehensive loss*
Balance at 27 December 2020*

Balance at 27 December 2020
Issue of shares
Employee share-based payment schemes
Total comprehensive income
Balance at 2 January 2022

*  Restated – see Note 2

Share  
capital
£m

Share  
premium
£m

Other  
reserves
£m

Profit and  
loss account
£m

138.2
27.7
–
–
165.9

165.9
49.3
–
–
215.2

249.7
26.9
–
–
276.6

276.6
117.5
–
–
394.1

(5.3)
–
2.0
–
(3.3)

(3.3)
–
3.4
–
0.1

93.2
–
–
(51.3)
41.9

41.9
–
–
23.5
65.4

Total
£m

475.8
54.6
2.0
(51.3)
481.1

481.1
166.8
3.4
23.5
674.8

Other reserves represent the Company’s share-based payment transactions and the shares held by the Employee Benefit Trust.

108 The Restaurant Group plc Annual Report 2021

Notes to the Company accounts

1 Accounting policies and basis of preparation

Basis of preparation
The Company accounts have been prepared under the historical cost convention and in accordance with UK Accounting 
Standards. These financial statements were prepared in accordance with Financial Reporting Standard 101 Reduced 
Disclosure Framework. As permitted under FRS 101, the Company has taken advantage of the disclosure exemptions available 
under that standard in relation to share-based payments, business combinations, financial instruments, fair values, presentation 
of a cash flow statement and certain related party transactions.

Where required, equivalent disclosures are given in the consolidated financial statements.

The financial statements are presented in pounds sterling and all values are rounded to the nearest hundred thousand except 
when otherwise indicated.

Going concern basis
The financial statements have been prepared on a going concern basis. For further details of the basis of this going concern 
assessment, please refer to Note 1 of the consolidated financial statements.

Investments
Investments are valued at cost less any provision for impairment.

Financial liabilities – Borrowings
Borrowings are recognised initially at fair value, net of transaction costs incurred. Borrowings are subsequently carried at 
amortised cost; any difference between the proceeds (net of transaction costs) and the redemption value is recognised in the 
income statement over the period of the borrowings using the effective interest method.

Fees paid on the establishment of loan facilities are recognised as transaction costs of the loan to the extent that it is probable 
that some or all of the facility will be drawn down. This is also applicable to fees for amendments to the loan facilities. In this 
case, the fee is deferred until the draw-down occurs. To the extent there is no evidence that it is probable that some or all of 
the facility will be drawn down, the fee is capitalised as a pre-payment for liquidity services and amortised over the period 
of the facility to which it relates.

Share-based payment transactions
The Group operates a share option programme which allows employees of the Group to acquire shares in the Company.  
The fair value of options granted is recognised as an employee expense in the Company in which the employees are employed 
with a corresponding increase in capital contribution. The Company recognises an increase in the investment held by the 
Company in the subsidiary in which the employees are employed.

The fair value of the options is measured at grant date and spread over the period during which the employees become 
unconditionally entitled to the options. The Black-Scholes valuation model is used to measure the fair value of the options 
granted, taking into account the terms and conditions upon which the options were granted. The amount recognised as an 
expense is adjusted to reflect the actual number of share options that vest except where forfeiture is only due to market based 
conditions not achieving the threshold for vesting. Refer to Note 21 in the consolidated financial statements for further details. 

Cash and cash equivalents
Cash and cash equivalents comprise bank balances, cash balances on hand and in restaurants, and cash-in-transit for credit 
card transactions made within 72 working hours, providing there is no risk of cash return. Bank overdrafts that are repayable 
on demand and form an integral part of the Company’s cash management are included as a component of cash and cash 
equivalents for the purpose of the statement of cash flows.

Offsetting of overdrafts is only permitted (and, in fact, required) when: 

•  there is a legally enforceable right to set off recognised amounts; and 

•  an entity intends to settle on a net basis, or to realise the asset and settle the financial liability simultaneously.

Cash at bank earns interest at floating rates based on daily bank deposit rates. Short term deposits are made for varying 
periods of between one day and six months, depending on the immediate cash requirements of the Company, and earn interest 
at the respective short term deposit rates.

O
v
e
r
v
e
w

i

S

i

t
r
a
t
e
g
c
r
e
p
o
r
t

G
o
v
e
r
n
a
n
c
e

i

F
n
a
n
c

i

a

l

s
t
a
t
e
m
e
n
t
s

The Restaurant Group plc Annual Report 2021 109

 
 
 
Notes to the Company accounts continued

1 Accounting policies and basis of preparation continued

Leases
i) Right of use assets
Right of use assets are initially measured at the value of the corresponding lease liability and subsequently adjusted for 
depreciation and for any remeasurement of the lease liability. Right of use assets are assessed for impairment where required 
by IAS 36. 

The right of use asset is subsequently depreciated using the straight-line method from the commencement date to the earlier 
of the end of the useful life of the right of use asset or the end of the lease term. 

ii) Lease liabilities
Lease liabilities under IFRS 16 are initially recorded at the present value of future lease payments (discounted using the Group’s 
incremental borrowing rate, which we estimate with reference to our debt facilities and observed bond yields). 

Lease liabilities include the net present value of fixed payments (including in-substance fixed payments), less any lease 
incentives receivable and variable payments.

Lease liabilities may be recalculated in some situations as stipulated by IFRS 16, including where the terms of a lease are 
modified, which can also result in a separate lease being recognised. It is remeasured when there is a change in future lease 
payments arising from a change in an index or rate, if there is a change in the Company’s estimate of the amount expected to 
be payable under a residual value guarantee, or if the Company changes its assessment of whether it will exercise a purchase, 
extension or termination option. Such changes to the amount of the lease liability will be also reflected in the corresponding right 
of use asset, except where a reduction in the asset would result in a negative outcome, in which case the asset’s value is 
reduced to £Nil and the residual credit recorded in profit or loss.

In determining the lease term and assessing the length of the non-cancellable period of a lease, an entity shall apply the 
definition of a contract and determine the period for which the contract is enforceable. A lease is no longer enforceable when 
the lessee and lessor each has the right to terminate the lease without permission from the other party with no more than an 
insignificant penalty.

Impairment
The Company formally determines whether the carrying amount of right of use assets (‘RoUA’) are impaired by considering 
indicators of impairment annually. Impairment for tangible assets is tested on the basis of each individual cash generating unit 
(CGU) – an individual restaurant or pub site. 

For intangible assets including investments, the testing is performed at the level of the relevant group of CGUs that benefit from 
the intangible asset or investment. An impairment loss is recognised whenever the carrying amount of an asset or its CGU 
exceeds its recoverable amount. This requires the Company to determine the lowest level of assets which generate largely 
independent cash flows and to determine their recoverable amount, based on estimating the value-in-use or the fair value less 
cost of disposal of these assets or CGUs; and compare these to their carrying value. Impairment losses for property, plant and 
equipment are recognised in the income statement.

Impairment losses recognised in prior periods for property, plant and equipment and RoUA shall be reversed where there is an 
indication that the impairment no longer exists. Where an impairment reversal is recognised, the carrying amount of the asset 
will be increased to its recoverable amount with the increase being recognised in the income statement. This increased amount 
cannot exceed the carrying amount that would have been determined, net of depreciation, had no impairment loss been 
recognised for the asset in prior years.

For assets that have an indefinite useful life, the recoverable amount is estimated annually. Impairment losses are recognised 
in the income statement and are not subsequently reversed.

110  The Restaurant Group plc Annual Report 2021

1 Accounting policies and basis of preparation continued

Onerous property costs
The Company has a number of site related contractual commitments that are onerous and not included in the scope of IFRS 16. 
Where these exist, typically for closed sites, the Company provides for its estimate of the minimum cost of exiting the contracted 
commitments, such as rates, services and dilapidations where these are included in the contracts with landlords.

Estimates have been made with respect to the time to exit, sublet or cover the fixed cost base, along with other associated exit 
costs as well as an evaluation of the cost of void period prior to sublet and the value of lease incentive which may be required to 
be paid as part of the sublet process. The amounts of future expenditures for site closure costs are reviewed on a semi-annual 
basis and are based on readily available information at the reporting date as well as management’s historical experience of 
similar transactions. 

Critical accounting judgements and estimates
i) Impairment of non-current assets
Impairment reviews are conducted in line with the Group process as disclosed in Note 14 of the Group financial statements. 

The impairment reviews of investments require several estimates to determine the value-in-use including forecasts as described 
in Note 1 of the Group financial statements. The key estimates are in relation to the calculation of the future cash flows and 
discount rate. A reduction in sales of 5% has no impact on the impairment outcome. A 1% increase in the discount rate applied 
has no impact on the impairment outcome. 

ii) Forecast business cash flows
For purposes of the going concern assessment and as an input into the impairment assessment, the Group make estimates 
of likely future cash flows which are based on assumptions given the uncertainties involved. The assumptions include the extent 
of Government restrictions and support, the recovery of the revenues through and beyond the pandemic, cost of labour and 
supplies and working capital movements. These assumptions are made by management based on recent performance, 
external forecasts and management’s knowledge and expertise of the cash flow drivers.

2 Restatement of comparatives

During the year, management have identified errors relating to seven sites, the lease liability for which defaulted to the Company 
under the Chiquito administration or an Authorised Guarantee Agreement, but were not recognised in the Company’s accounts 
as they should have been at 27 December 2020. As a result, the Company has incurred amounts payable to its subsidiaries in 
order to compensate them for the costs paid on behalf of the Company. The impact of correcting for this error is shown below.

Consolidated income statement for the 52 weeks ended 27 December 2020
Loss after tax

Consolidated balance sheet as at 27 December 2020
Loans to subsidiary undertakings
Accruals
Lease liabilities
Profit and loss account

As originally 
disclosed
£m

Adjustment
£m

As restated
£m

(41.8)

(9.5)

(51.3)

503.6
(1.1)
–
51.4

(6.3)
(0.2)
(3.0)
(9.5)

497.3
(1.3)
(3.0)
41.9

O
v
e
r
v
e
w

i

S

i

t
r
a
t
e
g
c
r
e
p
o
r
t

G
o
v
e
r
n
a
n
c
e

i

F
n
a
n
c

i

a

l

s
t
a
t
e
m
e
n
t
s

The Restaurant Group plc Annual Report 2021  111

 
 
 
Notes to the Company accounts continued

3 Profit attributable to members of the Company

As permitted by section 408 of the Companies Act 2006, a separate profit and loss account has not been presented for 
the Company. 

Remuneration of the Auditor is borne by a subsidiary undertaking (refer to Note 5 in the consolidated financial statements).

During the year, the Company made a gain of £0.5m relating to derivatives held at fair value through the profit and loss (refer 
to Note 23 in the consolidated financial statements).

All costs of employees and Directors are borne by a subsidiary undertaking. At 2 January 2022 the Company employed six 
persons, being the Directors (27 December 2020: six persons). Refer to the Directors remuneration report for further details 
of remuneration paid for services.

4 Investment in subsidiary undertakings

Shares
£m

Share Based 
Payment
£m

91.8
–
91.8

28.0
3.4
31.4

Total
£m

119.8
3.4
123.2

Proportion of voting 
rights and shares held
at 2 January 2022

Status

Holding
Holding
Holding
Holding
Holding
Holding
Trading
Trading
Trading
Holding
Holding
Trading
Holding

Trading
Trading
Trading

Holding
Trading
Trading
Holding
Trading

Trading

100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%

100%
100%
100%

100%
100%
100%
100%
100%

100%

Country of Incorporation

England and Wales
England and Wales
England and Wales
England and Wales
England and Wales
England and Wales
England and Wales
England and Wales
England and Wales
England and Wales
USA
USA
USA

England and Wales
England and Wales
England and Wales

England and Wales
England and Wales
England and Wales
England and Wales
England and Wales

England and Wales

Cost and net book value
At 27 December 2020
Share-based payment schemes
At 2 January 2022

The Company’s subsidiaries are listed below:

Wagamama
Mabel Topco Limited
Mabel Midco Limited
Mabel Mezzco Limited
Mabel Bidco Limited
Wagamama Finance Limited
Wagamama Group Limited
Wagamama Limited
Wagamama International (Franchising) Limited
Wagamama CPU Limited
Ramen USA Limited
Wagamama USA Holdings Inc
Wagamama Inc
Wagamama NY 55 3rd LLC
Pubs
Brunning and Price Limited
Blubeckers Limited
Ribble Valley Inns Limited
Leisure
TRG (Holdings) Limited
The Restaurant Group (UK) Limited
TRG Leisure Limited
G.R. Limited
D.P.P. Restaurants Limited
Concessions
TRG Concessions Limited

112  The Restaurant Group plc Annual Report 2021

4 Investment in subsidiary undertakings continued

Dormant
Wagamama Newco Limited
TRGI Limited
Caffe Uno Limited
Number One Leicester Square Limited
Strikes Restaurants Limited
Black Angus Steak Houses Limited
J.R. Restaurants Limited
Garfunkels Restaurants Limited
Frankie & Benny’s (UK) Limited
City Centre Restaurants (UK) Limited
City Hotels Group Limited
Est Est Est Group Limited
Factmulti Limited

Country of Incorporation

England and Wales
Ireland
England and Wales
Scotland
England and Wales
England and Wales
England and Wales
England and Wales
England and Wales
England and Wales
England and Wales
England and Wales
England and Wales

Proportion of voting 
rights and shares held
at 2 January 2022

Status

In liquidation 
In liquidation
In liquidation 
In liquidation 
In liquidation
In liquidation
In liquidation 
In liquidation 
In liquidation 
In liquidation 
In liquidation 
In liquidation 
In liquidation

100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%

The Company’s operating subsidiaries are registered in England and Wales and the USA, and operate restaurants in the  
United Kingdom and the USA.

5 Loans to subsidiary undertakings

On 5 June 2020, the Company assigned £91.0m of its receivable from The Restaurant Group (UK) Limited in return for 
a receivable of £48.0m from TRG Concessions Limited, and £43.0m from Brunning & Price Limited.

On 29 June 2020, as part of the provisions of the CVA of The Restaurant Group (UK) Limited, the Company released  
The Restaurant Group (UK) Limited from £37.6m of its loan owed to the Company which represented 50% of the loan 
outstanding at that time.

On 17 May 2021 as part of the refinancing of the Group, the Company extended a loan to TRG (Holdings) Limited of £228.5m, 
which is repayable on demand. Interest is payable at a rate of 8% plus SONIA per annum with interest accruing quarterly on 
to the balance outstanding. This loan was lent onwards within the Group to eventually allow repayment of the £225.0m 
Wagamama bond and accrued interest.

On 31 October 2021, the Company assigned £51.7m of its receivable from TRG Concessions Limited in return for a receivable 
of an equivalent amount from TRG (Holdings) Limited. Interest is payable at a rate of 8% plus SONIA per annum with interest 
accruing quarterly on to the balance outstanding. 

On 2 January 2022, the Company assigned £46.2m of its receivable from Brunning & Price Limited in return for a receivable 
of an equivalent amount from TRG (Holdings) Limited. Interest is payable at a rate of 8% plus SONIA per annum with interest 
accruing quarterly on to the balance outstanding. 

O
v
e
r
v
e
w

i

S

i

t
r
a
t
e
g
c
r
e
p
o
r
t

G
o
v
e
r
n
a
n
c
e

i

F
n
a
n
c

i

a

l

s
t
a
t
e
m
e
n
t
s

The Restaurant Group plc Annual Report 2021  113

 
 
 
Notes to the Company accounts continued

6 Long term borrowings

Total Company borrowing facilities consist of a £120.0m revolving credit facility maturing in May 2025, and a £330.0m Term 
Loan maturing in May 2026. The revolving credit facility has £120.0m of committed borrowing facilities in excess of gross 
borrowings (2020: £60.0m) and is committed until May 2025. 

At 2 January 2022, the interest rate on the Term Loan is 6.50% above SONIA. A commitment fee of 1.2% is charged on the 
undrawn Revolving Credit Facility. A margin ratchet linked to the leverage ratio is in place which results in a forecasted interest 
rate in 2022 of 6.3% for the Term Loan and a 0.8% commitment fee on the Revolving Credit Facility. The maturity dates on the 
Group’s debt facilities are as follows: May 2026 for the Term Loan; and May 2025 for the Revolving Credit Facility.

In the year, to manage the risk of interest rate changes on borrowings, the Group entered into an interest rate cap. The interest 
rate cap has an effective date of November 2022 to November 2025, for a value of £100.0m. The strike price of the interest rate 
cap is 0.8% and a total premium of £1.6m was paid. The interest rate cap is measured at fair value through the profit and loss. 
At 2 January 2022 the interest rate cap was valued at £2.1m, with a gain on fair value of £0.5m being recognised in the profit 
and loss. 

7 Lease liabilities and right of use assets

Set out below are the movements in the carrying amount of lease liabilities and right of use assets during the period. All leases 
relate to access to and use of property.

Brought forward
Additions
Unwinding of discount on lease liabilities
Cash payments made
Extinguished in disposals
Remeasurements
Depreciation
Impairment
Carried forward
Analysed as:

Amount due for settlement within one year
Amount due for settlement after one year

* Restated – see Note 2

Right of use asset

2021
£m

–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–

2020*
£m

–
13.6
–
–
–
2.8
(0.1)
(16.3)
–

Lease liability
2021
£m

(3.0)
–
(0.1)
0.4
1.2
–
–
–
(1.5)

(0.3)
(1.2)
(1.5)

2020*
£m

–
(13.6)
(0.3)
5.5
8.2
(2.8)
–
–
(3.0)

(0.5)
(2.5)
(3.0)

The total value of expense relating to short term leases in 2021 totalled £Nil (2020: £0.2m).

The Company has authorised guarantee agreements in place where the Company acts as the guarantor. In the event of a tenant 
default, the lease associated to the default event will be assigned to the Company. The Company has assessed the risk of this 
as remote.

114  The Restaurant Group plc Annual Report 2021

Group financial record

Revenue
Adjusted operating profit/(loss)
Underlying interest
Adjusted (loss)/profit before tax
Non–trading (charges)/credits
(Loss)/Profit on ordinary activities before tax
Tax
(Loss)/Profit for the year
Basic (loss)/earnings per share
Adjusted (loss)/earnings per share
Proposed total ordinary dividend per share for the year
Special dividend per share
Dividend cover (excluding non-trading items and special 
dividends)
Employment of finance
Property, plant and equipment
Other non-current assets
Net current liabilities
Long-term liabilities

Financed by:
Equity 
Net debt 
Gearing

2021 
£m
636.6
37.1
(45.1)
(8.0)
(24.9)
(32.9)
(5.5)
(38.4)
(5.3p)
(0.5p)
–
–

2020 
Restated 
£m
459.8
(49.7)
(37.8)
(87.5)
(45.4)
(132.9)
8.7
(124.2)
(22.1p)
(13.4p)
–
–

2019 
£m
1,073.1
91.1
(16.6)
74.5
(111.8)
(37.3)
(3.1)
(40.4)
(8.2p)
11.9p
2.1p
–

2018 
Restated 
£m
686.0
55.4
(2.2)
53.2
(39.3)
13.9
(7.0)
6.9
2.4p
14.7p
8.3p
–

2017 
Restated 
£m
679.3
59.5
(1.7)
57.8
(29.7)
28.1
(9.8)
18.3
6.7p
16.7p
14.4p
–

N/A

N/A

5.7p

1.8p

1.0p

285.1
599.9
(34.9)
(706.6)
143.5

300.3
599.5
(141.7)
(822.7)
(64.6)

439.7
(582.0)
132.4%

307.3
(824.2)
268.2%

335.7
618.0
(112.0)
(439.9)
401.8

401.9
(286.6)
71.3%

430.6
620.9
(97.6)
(495.3)
458.6

458.6
(291.1)
63.5%

327.3
26.4
(79.6)
(94.0)
180.1

180.2
(23.1)
12.8%

O
v
e
r
v
e
w

i

S

i

t
r
a
t
e
g
c
r
e
p
o
r
t

G
o
v
e
r
n
a
n
c
e

i

F
n
a
n
c

i

a

l

s
t
a
t
e
m
e
n
t
s

The Restaurant Group plc Annual Report 2021  115

 
 
 
Description
Calculated by taking the profit after tax of the business 
pre-exceptional items divided by the weighted average 
number of shares in issue during the year, including the 
effect of dilutive potential ordinary shares.
Earnings before interest, tax, depreciation, amortisation  
and exceptional items. Calculated by taking the Trading 
business operating profit and adding back depreciation  
and amortisation.
Calculated by taking the profit after tax of the business 
pre-exceptional items divided by the weighted average 
number of shares in issue during the year.
Operating profit prior to the impact of Exceptional items.

Calculated as the Operating profit as a percentage of 
Revenue. For the ‘Adjusted’ basis this is using the profit  
and revenue prior to Exceptional items.
Calculated by taking the profit before tax of the business 
pre-Exceptional items.

Calculated by taking the tax of the business pre-Exceptional 
items.
Calculated as the tax expense as a percentage of profit 
before tax. For the ‘Adjusted’ basis this is using the tax  
and profit prior to Exceptional items.
Calculated as the funds available to the business through 
either its Cash & cash equivalents balance or through 
undrawn facilities, less letters of credit.
This is calculated as the total of Development capital 
expenditure and Refurbishment and maintenance 
expenditure and is the cash outflow associated with the 
acquisition of Property, plant and equipment, intangibles 
and investments in the US joint venture.
This is the Capital expenditure relating to profit-generating 
projects upon which we expect a commercial return in 
future years.
Earnings before interest, tax, depreciation, amortisation  
and impairment.

Glossary

Measure
Adjusted diluted EPS Diluted EPS

Closest GAAP Measure Reconciliation 

Adjusted EBITDA

Operating Profit

Note 10

Income Statement  
& Note 4 for IAS 17 
basis

Adjusted EPS

EPS

Note 10

Adjusted operating 
profit

Operating Profit

Adjusted operating 
margin

N/A

Adjusted profit 
before tax

Profit before tax

Adjusted tax charge

Effective adjusted 
tax rate

Tax on profit from 
ordinary activities
N/A

Income Statement  
& Note 4 for IAS 17 
basis
Income Statement  
& Note 4 for IAS 17 
basis
Income Statement  
& Note 4 for IAS 17 
basis
Income Statement

Income Statement

Cash headroom

N/A

Note 23

Capital expenditure

Net cash flow from 
investing activities

Financial Review

Development capital 
expenditure

Net cash flow from 
investing activities

Financial Review

EBITDA

Operating profit

Income Statement  
& Note 4 for IAS 17 
basis

116  The Restaurant Group plc Annual Report 2021

Measure
Exceptional items

Free cash flow

Closest GAAP Measure Reconciliation 
N/A

Income Statement 
and Note 7
Note 22

Net cash flow from 
operating activities

Like-for-like sales

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

Note 23

N/A

Note 23

Financial Review

Leverage

N/A

Minimum liquidity

N/A

Net debt

Outlet EBITDA

Long-term 
borrowings
N/A

Pre-lease liability  
net debt
Refurbishment  
and maintenance 
expenditure
Return on Invested 
Capital (ROIC)
Trading business

TSR 

Long-term 
borrowings
Net cash flow from 
investing activities

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

Description
Those items that are material, and not related to the 
underlying trade of the business.
Adjusted EBITDA (IAS17 basis) less working capital and 
non-cash adjustments (excluding exceptional items), tax 
payments, interest payments and Refurbishment and 
maintenance expenditure.
This measure provides an indicator of the underlying 
performance of our existing restaurants. There is no 
accounting standard or consistent definition of ‘like-for-like 
sales’ across the industry. Group like-for-like sales are 
calculated by comparing the performance of all mature 
(traded for at least 65 weeks) sites in the current period 
versus the comparable period in 2019, as this is the last 
available unrestricted year of trading. Sites that are closed, 
disposed or disrupted during a financial year are excluded 
from the like-for-like sales calculation.
Net Debt/EBIDTA ratio (pre-IFRS 16 and exceptional 
charges).
The minimum liquidity is a financial covenant required under 
the terms of our loans to have a minimum of both available 
undrawn facilities plus Cash and cash equivalents of at least 
£40.0 million.
Net debt is calculated as the net of all borrowings less cash 
and cash equivalents, plus the IFRS 16 Lease liabilities.
Pre-IFRS 16 and Exceptional EBITDA directly attributable to 
individual sites and therefore excluding corporate and 
central costs.
As above Net Debt but excluding the IFRS 16 Lease liabilities.

This is the Capital expenditure relating to projects to 
maintain and refurbish our estate. No incremental financial 
return is expected on this expenditure.
Outlet EBITDA (pre-IFRS 16 and exceptional charges)/initial 
capital invested.
Represents the performance of the business before 
exceptional items.
Total Shareholder Return over a period. Total shareholder 
return (TSR) is calculated as the overall appreciation in the 
share price, plus any dividends paid, during a period of 
time; this is then divided by the initial purchase price of the 
stock to arrive at the TSR.

O
v
e
r
v
e
w

i

S

i

t
r
a
t
e
g
c
r
e
p
o
r
t

G
o
v
e
r
n
a
n
c
e

i

F
n
a
n
c

i

a

l

s
t
a
t
e
m
e
n
t
s

The Restaurant Group plc Annual Report 2021  117

 
 
 
Shareholder information

Directors
Ken Hanna 
Non-Executive Chairman

Andy Hornby  
Chief Executive Officer

Kirk Davis 
Chief Financial Officer

Graham Clemett 
Senior Independent Director

Alison Digges 
Independent Non-Executive Director

Alex Gersh 
Independent Non-Executive Director

Zoe Morgan 
Independent Non-Executive Director

Company Secretary
Jean-Paul Rabin 

Head office  
(and address for all correspondence)
5-7 Marshalsea Road 
London SE1 1EP

Telephone number
020 3117 5001

Company number
SC030343

Registered office
1 George Square 
Glasgow G2 1AL

Registrar
Equiniti Limited 
Aspect house 
Spencer Road 
Lancing  
West Sussex BN99 6DA

Auditor
Ernst & Young LLP 
1 More London Place 
London SE1 2AF

Solicitors
Slaughter and May 
One Bunhill Row 
London EC1Y 8YY

Brokers
Investec Bank plc  
30 Gresham Street 
London EC2V 7QP

Citigroup Global Markets Limited
33 Canada Square 
Canary Wharf 
London E14 5LB

Annual General Meeting
Tuesday 24 May 2022

118  The Restaurant Group plc Annual Report 2021

The paper used in this report is 100% recycled and FSC® certified.

Printed in the UK using vegetable based inks which have lower VOC emissions 
(Volatile Organic Compounds), are derived from renewable sources and less 
hazardous than oil-based inks. 

The printer is ISO 14001 accredited and Forest Stewardship Council® (FSC®) chain 
of custody certified. Under the framework of ISO 14001 a structured approach is 
taken by the company to measure, improve and audit their environmental status on 
an ongoing basis. FSC® ensures there is an audited chain of custody from the tree 
in the well-managed forest through to the finished document in the printing factory.

Designed and produced by Instinctif Partners  www.creative.instinctif.com

 
 
 
 
The Restaurant Group plc

5–7 Marshalsea Road
London SE1 1EP
Tel: 020 3117 5001
www.trgplc.com